Milnor K36 0005R Instruction manual

Published Manual Number/ECN: MPP72WE2AE/2006153A
• Publishing System: TPAS
• Access date: 4/11/2006
• Document ECN's: Latest Available
Service—
72044 WP2/WP3 WasherExtractors
PELLERIN MILNOR CORPORATION
POST OFFICE BOX 400, KENNER, LOUISIANA 70063-0400, U.S.A.
Please Read
About the Manual Identifying Information on the Cover
The front cover displays pertinent identifying information for this manual. Most important, are
the published manual number (part number) /ECN (date code). Generally, when a replacement
manual is furnished, it will have the same published manual number, but the latest available ECN.
This provides the user with the latest information applicable to his machine. Similarly all
documents comprising the manual will be the latest available as of the date the manual was
printed, even though older ECN dates for those documents may be listed in the table of
contents.
When communicating with the Milnor factory regarding this manual, please also provide the
other identifying information shown on the cover, including the publishing system, access date,
and whether the document ECN’s are the latest available or exact.
References to Yellow Troubleshooting Pages
This manual may contain references to “yellow pages.” Although the pages containing
troubleshooting procedures are no longer printed on yellow paper, troubleshooting instructions, if
any, will be contained in the easily located “Troubleshooting” chapter or section. See the table of
contents.
Trademarks of Pellerin Milnor Corporation
The following, some of which may be used in this manual, are trademarks of Pellerin Milnor
Corporation:
Ampsaver®
Autolint®
Auto-Purge®
Autovac
CBW®
Dye-Extractor®
Dyextractor®
E-P Express®
E-P OneTouch®
E-P Plus®
Gear Guardian®
Hands-Off®
Hydro-Cushion®
Mildata®
Milnet®
Milnor®
Miltrac
Miltron
Comments and Suggestions
Help us to improve this manual by sending your comments to:
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Attn: Technical Publications
P. O. Box 400
Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Fax: (504) 469-1849
Staph-Guard®
System 4®
System 7®
Totaltrol®
Table of Contents
for MPP72WE2AE/2006153A
72044 WP2/WP3 Washer-Extractors
Page
Description
Document/ECN
1
3
4
5
About This Manual
Warranty
How to Order Parts
Safety—Divided Cylinder and Staph-Guard™
Washer-Extractors
About the Forces Transmitted by Milnor Washer-Extractors
Glossary of Tag Illustrations - Suspended WasherExtractors
Avoiding Damage from Allied Remote Chemical
Delivery Systems
MHPHYDROAE/9541AV
10
12
18
23
24
34
35
39
40
41
42
43
44
63
64
68
69
70
71
73
74
75
76
77
78
88
89
91
BMP720097/92732A
BMP720097R/72332A
BIUUUS27/20051111
BIWUUI02/20001108
MSIUPUTGAE/2003026V
BIWUUI03/20030306
Section 1: Service and Maintenance
Lubrication and Preventive Maintenance for Hydrocushion
Machines
Lubricants for Milnor Machines
Baldor Motor Maintenance
General Assembly - Rapid Load 2-Pocket WasherExtractor
General Assembly - WED
Lubrication Chart
Lubrication Chart
Location - Lube Points = WED
Fastener Torque Requirements
MSSM0201CE/2004046V
MSSM0132AE/9903AV
MSSM0274AE/9731AV
BMP701387/70473
BMP701387R/71152A
BMP701226/74113A
BMP701226R/74113A
BMP701313/71143A
MSSM0101CE/9906AV
Section 2: Shell and Door Assemblies
Door Seal Replacement on Rapid Load Models
7244 WE3 Staph-Guard Door Assembly
Parts List - Door Assembly, 7244WE3, SG
60" & 72" WEH - Shell Door Assembly
Parts List - Shell Door Assembly, 60 & 72 WEH
Air Operated Vacuum Pump for Door Seals
Door Interlock Switch Assembly - 6036, 6044
& 7244 Rapid Load Washer-Extractors
Parts List - Door Interlock , WED
Door Latch Assembly
MSSMA413AE/8530BV
BMP790020/79492A
BMP790020R/98301V
BMP780109/81433B
BMP780109R/81433A
BMP810002/81073A
BMP701654/70481
BMP701654R/70481
BMP701316/98183V
Section 3: Drive Assemblies
Drive Base Components on Hydro-Cushion Machines
Jackshaft Bearing Assembly - 5238, 6036, 6044,
6442 & 7244
Parts List - Jackshaft Bearing Assembly (52, 60, 64, 72)
Drive Assembly - 7244 WE1/WE2/WE3 (50 +
60 Cycle Machines)
MSSMA407BE/85047V
BMP820109/89253C
BMP820109R/89253A
BMP840022/86016D
Table of Contents, cont.
Page
92
93
94
95
97
98
99
100
102
103
105
109
110
120
121
123
124
125
126
132
133
135
136
137
138
139
141
142
145
Description
Parts List - Drive Assembly, 7244 WE1/WE2/WE3
Brake Assembly - 60044 & 72044 WP2/WP3
Reducer Air Seal
Autospot Drive Assembly
Air Operated Autospot Assembly - 60044WP2/WP3
and 72044WP2/WP3
Sensing Unit = Airop Autospot
Parts List - Sensing Unit, Airop Autospot
Centrifugal Switch Assembly
Centrifugal Switch Operation
V-Belt Tension Adjustments
V-Belt Tension Adjustments for 48", 52", 60"
and 72" Washer-Extractors
BMP840022R/97107V
BMP710022/99512V
BMP700392/2002496V
BMP701411/2000133V
BMP710043/96216V
BMP710042/76143D
BMP710042R/85353A
BMP701195/2000242V
BMP701196/81271A
MSSM0301AE/9126BV
MSSMA405AE/8737BV
Section 4: Bearing Assemblies
Main Bearing and Seal Replacement for Divided
Cylinder Machines
Main Bearing Assembly - 60036, 60044 & 72044
WE2, WE3, SG2, SG3 & DA3
Parts List - Main Bearing Assembly
MSSM0303AE/8451BV
BMP840039/84336D
BMP840039R/96142V
Section 5: Frame, Pivots, and Suspension
Hold Down Adjustments 60" & 72" Rapid Load
& Staph-Guard Washer-Extractors
Hold Down Adjustments - 60" & 72" Rapid Load
and Staph-Guard
Suspension Adjustments for Divided Cylinder Machines
Hydro-Cushion Suspension Cylinder - 7244 Rapid
Load & Staph-Guard
Parts List - Suspension Cylinder Assembly
Suspension Cylinder Locations
Push Down Assembly
Parts List - Push Down Assembly
7244WE3 Cylinder Assembly
Parts List - Cylinder Assembly, 7244WE3
Cylinder Assembly - 6036, 6044, & 7244 WE2
Parts List - Cylinder Assembly, 60 & 70 WE2
BMP701672/71051
BMP701672R/71051
MSSM0302AE/8414BV
BMP701629/71047
BMP701629R/73261A
BMP701235/2000133V
BMP701671/70526
BMP701671R/70526
BMP790019/79477B
BMP790019R/86387A
BMP780043/79221B
BMP780043R/86387A
Section 6: Control and Sensing Devices
146
148
149
150
Vibration Safety Switch Adjustments
Vibration Switch Assembly
Parts List - Vibration Switch Assembly
Maintenance - Vib Safety Switch
151
Section 7: Chemical Supply Devices
152
Document/ECN
Rules for the Field Installation of Pumped-Type
Liquid Supply Systems
MSSMA408BE/9273BV
BMP700613/83211A
BMP700613R/83211A
BMP750047/81307A
MSSM0213AE/89457V
Table of Contents, cont.
Page
Description
154
155
Supply Injector Assembly - 7244
Parts List - 72" Supply Injector Assembly
157
Section 8: Water and Steam Piping and
Assemblies
158
159
160
163
165
167
169
171
172
173
174
175
177
178
179
181
182
183
184
186
187
189
191
193
194
196
198
Water Inlet Assembly - 7244 Rapid Load & Staph-Guard
Parts List - Water Inlet Assembly
Universal Actuators & Mounting Hardware for
Watts Ball Valves - New Pivot
Watts Ball Valves and Repair Kits
Pressure Regulators
Water Level Float Chamber
Parts List - Water Level Float Chamber Assembly
Water Level Switch Assembly
Stainless Steel Dump Valve Air or Water Operated
Parts List - Stainless Steel Dump Valve Assembly
Burket Steam Valve
Steam Sparger Assemblies
Document/ECN
BMP701401/71192D
BMP701401R/83173A
BMP701634/89112E
BMP701634R/71521A
BMP920005/96067V
BMP920007/96066V
BMP900031/96081V
BMP810111/2003262V
BMP810111R/89256A
BMP800186/2002226V
BMP701370/70102
BMP701370R/72431A
BMP800020/96066V
BMP900001/96132V
Section 9: Pneumatic Piping and Assemblies
3 Way Pilot Valves
Asco 3-way Solenoid Valves
½" ASCO N.C. Valve Assembly
Parts List - ½" ASCO N.C. Valve
Universal Airvalve Box Assembly
Parts List - Universal Airvalve Box
Air Valves & Mounting Hardware
Parts List - Air Valves & Mounting Hardware
Servicing Air Cylinders
Air Cylinders for 2"Watts Ball Valves
Air Cylinder Assembly, Long (For Smith's Ballvalves)
Parts List - Long Air Cylinder Assembly
Quick Exhaust Valves
Air Cylinder Assemblies
BMP900032/91182V
BMP701359/97086V
BMP701394/71463A
BMP701394R/81377A
BMP780088/83457C
BMP780088R/93046N
BMP780087/83457B
BMP780087R/83457A
MSSM0130AE/9313AV
BMP920006/2000133V
BMP701660/89111B
BMP701660R/89111A
BMP701406/2002382V
BMP830078/2005525B
MHPHYDROAE/9541AV (1 of 1)
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
È
Scope—This instruction manual is intended to provide preventive maintenance, service procedures, and
Ë
mechanical parts identification for your machine. See the safety manual for safety instructions before installing,
servicing, or operating this machine. See the installation guide for facility requirements, installation instructions,
and assembly instructions. See the operator guide for operator instructions. See the reference manual for programming, operating, and troubleshooting instructions. See the schematic manual for electrical parts identification and
electrical troubleshooting.
Manual Number/Date Code (When To Discard or Save)—The manual number/date code is loË
cated on the inside front cover, upper right corner just above the manual name. Whenever the manual is reprinted
with new information, part of this number changes. If the date code after the “/” changes, the new version applies
to all machines covered by the old version, but is improved— thus the old version can be discarded. If the
manual number before the “/” changes, the new manual covers only new machines. Example: Discard MATMODELAE/8739CV when MATMODELAE/8739DV is received (minor improvements). Also, discard MATMODELAE/8739DV when MATMODELAE/8746AV is received (major improvements). Bu t k eep
MATMODELAE/8746FV when MATMODELBE/8815AV is received, since the new manual no longer applies to
machines originally shipped with the old manual.
Documents and Change Bars—The individual documents comprising this manual use the same revision
Ë
criteria as the manual. Text documents also display change bars. Example: When section MSOP0599AE/9135BV
becomes MSOP0599AE/9135CV, change bars with the letter “C” appear next to all changes for this revision. For
a major rewrite (e.g., MSOP0599AE/9226AV), all change bars are deleted.
For Assistance—Please call:
Ë
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Attn: Service Department
P. O. Box 400
Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Phone: (504) 467-9591
Fax: (504) 467-9777
Trademarks of Pellerin Milnor Corporation—The following, some of which may be used in this pubË
lication, are trademarks of Pellerin Milnor Corporation:
Ampsaver®
Autolint®
Auto-Purge®
Autovac
CBW®
Dye-Extractor®
Dyextractor®
E-P Plus®
Gear Guardian®
Hands-Off®
Hydro-Cushion®
Mildata®
1
Milnet®
Milnor®
Miltrac
Miltron
Staph-Guard®
System 4®
System 7®
Totaltrol®
2
3(//(5,10,/125&25325$7,21
/,0,7('67$1'$5':$55$17<
We warrant to the original purchaser that MILNOR machines including electronic
hardware/software (hereafter referred to as “equipment”), will be free from defects in material
and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of shipment from our factory with no
operating hour limitation. This warranty is contingent upon the equipment being installed,
operated and serviced as specified in the operating manual supplied with the equipment, and
operated under normal conditions by competent operators.
Providing we receive written notification of a warranted defect within 30 days of its discovery,
we will – at our option – repair or replace the defective part or parts, FOB our factory. We
retain the right to require inspection of the parts claimed defective in our factory prior to
repairing or replacing same. We will not be responsible, or in any way liable, for unauthorized
repairs or service to our equipment, and this warranty shall be void if the equipment is repaired
or altered in any way without MILNOR’s written consent.
Parts which require routine replacement due to normal wear – such as gaskets, contact points,
brake and clutch linings and similar parts – are not covered by this warranty, nor are parts
damaged by exposure to weather or to chemicals.
We reserve the right to make changes in the design and/or construction of our equipment
(including purchased components) without obligation to change any equipment previously
supplied.
ANY SALE OR FURNISHING OF ANY EQUIPMENT BY MILNOR IS MADE ONLY UPON
THE EXPRESS UNDERSTANDING THAT MILNOR MAKES NO EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR USE OR
PURPOSE. MILNOR WILL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY COSTS OR DAMAGES
ACTUALLY INCURRED OR REQUIRED AS A RESULT OF: THE FAILURE OF ANY OTHER
PERSON OR ENTITY TO PERFORM ITS RESPONSIBILITIES, FIRE OR OTHER HAZARD,
ACCIDENT, IMPROPER STORAGE, MISUSE, NEGLECT, POWER OR ENVIRONMENTAL
CONTROL MALFUNCTIONS, DAMAGE FROM LIQUIDS, OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND
THE NORMAL RANGE OF USE. REGARDLESS OF HOW CAUSED, IN NO EVENT SHALL
MILNOR BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, PUNITIVE, LIQUIDATED, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL COSTS OR DAMAGES, OR ANY COSTS OR DAMAGES WHATSOEVER
WHICH EXCEED THE PRICE PAID TO MILNOR FOR THE EQUIPMENT IT SELLS OR
FURNISHES.
WE NEITHER ASSUME, NOR AUTHORIZE ANY EMPLOYEE OR OTHER PERSON TO
ASSUME FOR US, ANY OTHER RESPONSIBILITY AND/OR LIABILITY IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SALE OR FURNISHING OF OUR EQUIPMENT TO ANY BUYER.
BMP720097
92732A
3
How to order repair parts
Repair parts may be ordered either from the authorized dealer who sold you this
machine, or directly from the MILNOR factory. In most cases, your dealer will
have these parts in stock.
When ordering parts, please be sure to give us the following information:
1. Model and serial number of the machine for which the parts are required
2.
Part number
3. Name of the part
4. Quantity needed
5. Method of shipment desired
6. In correspondence regarding motors or electrical controls, please include all
nameplate data, including wiring diagram number and the make or
manufacturer of the motor or controls.
All parts will be shipped C.O.D. transportation charges collect only.
Please read this manual
It is strongly recommended that you read the installation and operating manual
before attempting to install or operate your machine. We suggest that this manual
be kept in your business office so that it will not become lost.
PELLERIN MILNOR CORPORATION
32%2;.(11(5/$86$
FAX: Administration 504/468-9307, Engineering 504/469-1849, Service 504/469-9777
BMP720097R
72332A
4
BIUUUS27 (Published) Book specs- Dates: 20051111 / 20051111 / 20060323 Lang: ENG01 Applic: HDU
Safety—Divided Cylinder and Staph-Guard™ Washer-Extractors
1.
General Safety Requirements—Vital Information for
Management Personnel [Document BIUUUS04]
Incorrect installation, neglected preventive maintenance, abuse, and/or improper repairs, or
changes to the machine can cause unsafe operation and personal injuries, such as multiple
fractures, amputations, or death. The owner or his selected representative (owner/user) is
responsible for understanding and ensuring the proper operation and maintenance of the machine.
The owner/user must familiarize himself with the contents of all machine instruction manuals.
The owner/user should direct any questions about these instructions to a Milnor® dealer or the
Milnor® Service department.
Most regulatory authorities (including OSHA in the USA and CE in Europe) hold the owner/user
ultimately responsible for maintaining a safe working environment. Therefore, the owner/user
must do or ensure the following:
• recognize all foreseeable safety hazards within his facility and take actions to protect his
personnel, equipment, and facility;
• work equipment is suitable, properly adapted, can be used without risks to health or safety,
and is adequately maintained;
• where specific hazards are likely to be involved, access to the equipment is restricted to those
employees given the task of using it;
• only specifically designated workers carry out repairs, modifications, maintenance, or
servicing;
• information, instruction, and training is provided;
• workers and/or their representatives are consulted.
Work equipment must comply with the requirements listed below. The owner/user must verify
that installation and maintenance of equipment is performed in such a way as to support these
requirements:
• control devices must be visible, identifiable, and marked; be located outside dangerous zones;
and not give rise to a hazard due to unintentional operation;
• control systems must be safe and breakdown/damage must not result in danger;
• work equipment is to be stabilized;
• protection against rupture or disintegration of work equipment;
• guarding, to prevent access to danger zones or to stop movements of dangerous parts before
the danger zones are reached. Guards to be robust; not give rise to any additional hazards; not
be easily removed or rendered inoperative; situated at a sufficient distance from the danger
zone; not restrict view of operating cycle; allow fitting, replacing, or maintenance by
restricting access to relevant area and without removal of guard/protection device;
• suitable lighting for working and maintenance areas;
• maintenance to be possible when work equipment is shut down. If not possible, then
protection measures to be carried out outside danger zones;
• work equipment must be appropriate for preventing the risk of fire or overheating; discharges
of gas, dust, liquid, vapor, other substances; explosion of the equipment or substances in it.
PELLERIN MILNOR CORPORATION
5
Safety—Divided Cylinder and Staph-Guard™ Washer-Extractors
1.1.
Laundry Facility—Provide a supporting floor that is strong and rigid enough to support–with
a reasonable safety factor and without undue or objectionable deflection–the weight of the fully
loaded machine and the forces transmitted by it during operation. Provide sufficient clearance for
machine movement. Provide any safety guards, fences, restraints, devices, and verbal and/or
posted restrictions necessary to prevent personnel, machines, or other moving machinery from
accessing the machine or its path. Provide adequate ventilation to carry away heat and vapors.
Ensure service connections to installed machines meet local and national safety standards,
especially regarding the electrical disconnect (see the National Electric Code). Prominently post
safety information, including signs showing the source of electrical disconnect.
1.2.
Personnel—Inform personnel about hazard avoidance and the importance of care and
common sense. Provide personnel with the safety and operating instructions that apply to them.
Verify that personnel use proper safety and operating procedures. Verify that personnel
understand and abide by the warnings on the machine and precautions in the instruction manuals.
1.3.
Safety Devices—Ensure that no one eliminates or disables any safety device on the machine
or in the facility. Do not allow machine to be used with any missing guard, cover, panel or door.
Service any failing or malfunctioning device before operating the machine.
1.4.
Hazard Information—Important information on hazards is provided on the machine safety
placards, in the Safety Guide, and throughout the other machine manuals. Placards must be kept
clean so that the information is not obscured. They must be replaced immediately if lost or
damaged. The Safety Guide and other machine manuals must be available at all times to
the appropriate personnel. See the machine service manual for safety placard part numbers.
Contact the Milnor Parts department for replacement placards or manuals.
1.5.
2.
Maintenance—Ensure the machine is inspected and serviced in accordance with the norms of
good practice and with the preventive maintenance schedule. Replace belts, pulleys, brake
shoes/disks, clutch plates/tires, rollers, seals, alignment guides, etc. before they are severely
worn. Immediately investigate any evidence of impending failure and make needed repairs (e.g.,
cylinder, shell, or frame cracks; drive components such as motors, gear boxes, bearings, etc.,
whining, grinding, smoking, or becoming abnormally hot; bending or cracking of cylinder, shell,
frame, etc.; leaking seals, hoses, valves, etc.) Do not permit service or maintenance by
unqualified personnel.
Safety Alert Messages—Internal Electrical and Mechanical
Hazards [Document BIUUUS11]
The following are instructions about hazards inside the machine and in electrical enclosures.
WARNING 1 : Electrocution and Electrical Burn Hazards—Contact with electric power
can kill or seriously injure you. Electric power is present inside the cabinetry unless the main
machine power disconnect is off.
• Do not unlock or open electric box doors.
• Do not remove guards, covers, or panels.
• Do not reach into the machine housing or frame.
• Keep yourself and others off of machine.
• Know the location of the main machine disconnect and use it in an emergency to remove
all electric power from the machine.
PELLERIN MILNOR CORPORATION
6
WARNING 2 : Entangle and Crush Hazards—Contact with moving components normally
isolated by guards, covers, and panels, can entangle and crush your limbs. These components
move automatically.
• Do not remove guards, covers, or panels.
• Do not reach into the machine housing or frame.
• Keep yourself and others off of machine.
• Know the location of all emergency stop switches, pull cords, and/or kick plates and use
them in an emergency to stop machine motion.
3.
Safety Alert Messages—External Mechanical Hazards [Document
BIUUUS12]
The following are instructions about hazards around the front, sides, rear or top of the machine.
WARNING 3 : Crush Hazards—Suspended machines only—Spaces between the shell and
housing can close and crush or pinch your limbs. The shell moves within the housing during
operation.
• Do not reach into the machine housing or frame.
• Keep yourself and others clear of movement areas and paths.
4.
Safety Alert Messages—Cylinder and Processing Hazards
[Document BIUUUS13]
The following are instructions about hazards related to the cylinder and laundering process.
WARNING 4 : Crush Hazards—Contact with the turning cylinder can crush your limbs. The
cylinder will repel any object you try to stop it with, possibly causing the object to strike or stab
you. The turning cylinder is normally isolated by the locked cylinder door.
• Do not attempt to open the door or reach into the cylinder until the cylinder is stopped.
• Do not place any object in the turning cylinder.
• Do not operate the machine with a malfunctioning door interlock.
• Divided cylinder machines only—Keep yourself and others clear of cylinder and goods
during inching or Autospot operation.
• Do not operate the machine with malfunctioning two-hand manual controls.
WARNING 5 : Confined Space Hazards—Confinement in the cylinder can kill or injure
you. Hazards include but are not limited to panic, burns, poisoning, suffocation, heat prostration,
biological contamination, electrocution, and crushing.
• Do not attempt unauthorized servicing, repairs, or modification.
WARNING 6 : Explosion and Fire Hazards—Flammable substances can explode or ignite
in the cylinder, drain trough, or sewer. The machine is designed for washing with water, not any
other solvent. Processing can cause solvent-containing goods to give off flammable vapors.
• Do not use flammable solvents in processing.
• Do not process goods containing flammable substances. Consult with your local fire
department/public safety office and all insurance providers.
PELLERIN MILNOR CORPORATION
7
Safety—Divided Cylinder and Staph-Guard™ Washer-Extractors
5.
5.1.
5.1.1.
Safety Alert Messages—Unsafe Conditions [Document BIUUUS14]
Damage and Malfunction Hazards
Hazards Resulting from Inoperative Safety Devices
DANGER 7 : Entangle and Sever Hazards—Cylinder door interlock—Operating the
machine with a malfunctioning door interlock can permit opening the door when the cylinder is
turning and/or starting the cycle with the door open, exposing the turning cylinder.
• Do not operate the machine with any evidence of damage or malfunction.
WARNING 8 : Multiple Hazards—Operating the machine with an inoperative safety device
can kill or injure personnel, damage or destroy the machine, damage property, and/or void the
warranty.
• Do not tamper with or disable any safety device or operate the machine with a
malfunctioning safety device. Request authorized service.
WARNING 9 : Electrocution and Electrical Burn Hazards—Electric box doors—
Operating the machine with any electric box door unlocked can expose high voltage conductors
inside the box.
• Do not unlock or open electric box doors.
WARNING 10 : Entangle and Crush Hazards—Guards, covers, and panels—Operating
the machine with any guard, cover, or panel removed exposes moving components.
• Do not remove guards, covers, or panels.
5.1.2.
Hazards Resulting from Damaged Mechanical Devices
WARNING 11 : Multiple Hazards—Operating a damaged machine can kill or injure
personnel, further damage or destroy the machine, damage property, and/or void the warranty.
• Do not operate a damaged or malfunctioning machine. Request authorized service.
WARNING 12 : Explosion Hazards—Cylinder—A damaged cylinder can rip apart during
extraction, puncturing the shell and discharging metal fragments at high speed.
• Do not operate the machine with any evidence of damage or malfunction.
WARNING 13 : Explosion Hazards—Inner door latches (divided cylinder machines)—A
damaged or improperly seated latch can cause the inner door to open during operation, damaging
the cylinder and shell. A damaged cylinder can rip apart during extraction, puncturing the shell
and discharging metal fragments at high speed.
• Ensure that the inner door is securely latched when loading and unloading.
• Do not operate the machine with any evidence of damage or malfunction.
WARNING 14 : Explosion Hazards—Clutch and speed switch (multiple motor
machines)—A damaged clutch or speed switch can permit the low speed motor to engage during
extract. This will over-speed the motor and pulleys and can cause them to rip apart, discharging
metal fragments at high speed.
• Stop the machine immediately if any of these conditions occur: • abnormal whining sound
during extract • skidding sound as extract ends • clutches remain engaged or re-engage
during extract
PELLERIN MILNOR CORPORATION
8
5.2.
5.2.1.
Careless Use Hazards
Careless Operation Hazards—Vital Information for Operator Personnel (see also
operator hazards throughout manual)
WARNING 15 : Multiple Hazards—Careless operator actions can kill or injure personnel,
damage or destroy the machine, damage property, and/or void the warranty.
• Do not tamper with or disable any safety device or operate the machine with a
malfunctioning safety device. Request authorized service.
• Do not operate a damaged or malfunctioning machine. Request authorized service.
• Do not attempt unauthorized servicing, repairs, or modification.
• Do not use the machine in any manner contrary to the factory instructions.
• Use the machine only for its customary and intended purpose.
• Understand the consequences of operating manually.
5.2.2.
Careless Servicing Hazards—Vital Information for Service Personnel (see also
service hazards throughout manuals)
WARNING 16 : Electrocution and Electrical Burn Hazards—Contact with electric
power can kill or seriously injure you. Electric power is present inside the cabinetry unless the
main machine power disconnect is off.
• Do not service the machine unless qualified and authorized. You must clearly understand
the hazards and how to avoid them.
• Abide by the current OSHA lockout/tagout standard when lockout/tagout is called for in
the service instructions. Outside the USA, abide by the OSHA standard in the absence of
any other overriding standard.
WARNING 17 : Entangle and Crush Hazards—Contact with moving components
normally isolated by guards, covers, and panels, can entangle and crush your limbs. These
components move automatically.
• Do not service the machine unless qualified and authorized. You must clearly understand
the hazards and how to avoid them.
• Abide by the current OSHA lockout/tagout standard when lockout/tagout is called for in
the service instructions. Outside the USA, abide by the OSHA standard in the absence of
any other overriding standard.
WARNING 18 : Confined Space Hazards—Confinement in the cylinder can kill or injure
you. Hazards include but are not limited to panic, burns, poisoning, suffocation, heat prostration,
biological contamination, electrocution, and crushing.
• Do not enter the cylinder until it has been thoroughly purged, flushed, drained, cooled,
and immobilized.
— End of BIUUUS27 —
PELLERIN MILNOR CORPORATION
9
About the Forces Transmitted by Milnor® Washer-extractors
About the Forces Transmitted by Milnor®
Washer-extractors
Document ..................... BIWUUI02
Specified Date ................. 20001108
As-of Date ....................... 20001108
Access Date ..................... 20001108
Applicability...........................WUU
During washing and extracting, all washer-extractors transmit both static and dynamic
(cyclic) forces to the floor, foundation, or any other supporting structure. During washing, the
impact of the goods as they drop imparts forces which are quite difficult to quantify. Size for size,
both rigid and flexibly-mounted machines transmit approximately the same forces during
washing. During extracting, rigid machines transmit forces up to 30 times greater than equivalent
flexibly-mounted models. The actual magnitude of these forces vary according to several factors:
•
•
•
•
•
machine size,
final extraction speed,
amount, condition, and type of goods being processed,
the liquor level and chemical conditions in the bath preceding extraction, and
other miscellaneous factors.
Estimates of the maximum force normally encountered are available for each Milnor® model
and size upon request. Floor or foundation sizes shown on any Milnor® document are only for
on-grade situations based only on previous experience without implying any warranty, obligation,
or responsibility on our part.
1.
Rigid Machines
Size for size, rigid washer-extractors naturally require a stronger, more rigid floor,
foundation, or other supporting structure than flexibly-mounted models. If the supporting soil
under the slab is itself strong and rigid enough and has not subsided to leave the floor slab
suspended without support, on grade installations can often be made directly to an existing floor
slab if it has enough strength and rigidity to safely withstand our published forces without
transmitting undue vibration. If the subsoil has subsided, or if the floor slab itself has insufficient
strength and rigidity, a deeper foundation, poured as to become monolithic with the floor slab,
may be required. Support pilings may even be required if the subsoil itself is “springy” (i.e., if its
resonant frequency is near the operating speed of the machine). Above-grade installations of rigid
machines also require a sufficiently strong and rigid floor or other supporting structure as
described below.
2.
Flexibly-mounted Machines
Size for size, flexibly-mounted machines generally do not require as strong a floor,
foundation, or other supporting structure as do rigid machines. However, a floor or other
supporting structure having sufficient strength and rigidity, as described in section 3, is
nonetheless vitally important for these models as well.
3.
How Strong and Rigid?
Many building codes in the U.S.A. specify that laundry floors must have a minimum live
load capacity of 150 pounds per square foot (732 kilograms per square meter). However, even
compliance with this or any other standard does not necessarily guarantee sufficient rigidity. In
any event, it is the sole responsibility of the owner/user to assure that the floor and/or any other
supporting structure exceeds not only all applicable building codes, but also that the floor and/or
any other supporting structure for each washer-extractor or group of washer-extractors actually
10
has sufficient strength and rigidity, plus a reasonable factor of safety for both, to support the
weight of all the fully loaded machine(s) including the weight of the water and goods, and
including the published 360º rotating sinusoidal RMS forces that are transmitted by the
machine(s). Moreover, the floor, foundation, or other supporting structure must have sufficient
rigidity (i.e., a natural or resonant frequency many times greater than the machine speed with a
reasonable factor of safety); otherwise, the mentioned 360º rotating sinusoidal RMS forces can be
multiplied and magnified many times. It is especially important to consider all potential vibration
problems that might occur due to all possible combinations of forcing frequencies (rotating
speeds) of the machine(s) compared to the natural frequencies of the floor and/or any other
supporting structure(s). A qualified soil and/or structural engineer must be engaged for this
purpose.
Figure 1: How Rotating Forces Act on the Foundation
Typical Machine
Legend
A.
B.
C.
Direction of force
Load
Rotation (Frequency = RPM / 60)
Figure 1 above is intended to depict both on-grade and above-grade installations and is
equally applicable to flexibly-mounted washer-extractors, as well as to rigid models installed
either directly on a floor slab or on a foundation poured integrally with the slab. Current machine
data is available from Milnor® upon request. All data is subject to change without notice and may
have changed since last printed. It is the sole responsibility of every potential owner to obtain
written confirmation that any data furnished by Milnor® applies for the model(s) and serial
number(s) of the specific machines.
— End of BIWUUI02 —
11
7\_ccQbi_VDQW9\\ecdbQdY_^c±
Cec`U^TUTGQcXUb5hdbQSd_bc
Illustration
<B8D?DC604!"!%E
Explanation
Stop! Read the manual first for complete
instructions before continuing.
Do not jack the machine here.
Do not lift the machine here.
Use three point or four point lifting as
determined by the lifting eyes furnished. Rig
the load using lifting cables of sufficient size
and length to ensure cables are not
over-stressed.
Do not lift the machine from one corner or one
side edge.
12
Illustration
Explanation
Do not start this machine until the packing
materials, lifting brackets, etc. with this tag
attached or behind this panel are removed.
These materials are painted red. Safety stands
or brackets (also painted red) may be provided
with this machine. Do not discard safety
stands or brackets
Do not step or stand on this machine part.
Maintain a 25 mm. (1") minimum clearance
between float clips. Set "low level" so that the
bottom of the float is always at least 25mm
(1") above the bottom of the float tube.
This motor or pump should rotate in the
direction of the arrow.
13
7\_ccQbi _V DQW 9\\ecdbQdY_^c±
Cec`U^TUT GQcXUb5hdbQSd_bc
Do not start this machine until the part with
this tag is installed on the machine.
Do not remove this component from the
machine.
Install the appropriate part here before
operating the machine.
Do not strap or chain over box
14
=C9E@ED715"
# "&F " #
Do not pump grease here.
During drain and extract, the cylinder must
rotate counterclockwise when viewed from
here (rear of machine).
During drain and extract, the cylinder must
rotate clockwise when viewed from here
(front of machine).
Do not strike shell front of washer-extractors
during fork lifting. Striking shell front will
cause door to leak.
Brake assembly under machine is fragile.
Forklift blades should only be placed under
main structural beams
15
7\_ccQbi _V DQW 9\\ecdbQdY_^c±
Cec`U^TUT GQcXUb5hdbQSd_bc
Set main bearing air pad gauge at 10 psi
(.70 kg/cm2), 64" and 72" ExN and JxN
models only.
Set disc brake air gauge at 10 psi
(.70 kg/cm2), 64" and 72" ExN and JxN
models only.
Make cold water connection here.
H20
Make hot water connection here.
H20
Make third (reuse) water connection here.
H20
16
=C9E@ED715"
# "&F # #
Hold the connection side of the valve with a
wrench when connecting plumbing.
17
BIWUUI03 (Published) Book specs- Dates: 20030306 / 20030306 / 20030306 Lang: ENG01 Applic: WUU
Avoiding Damage From Allied Remote Chemical Delivery
Systems
Milnor® does not manufacture or supply remote chemical delivery systems and this document is
meant only to illustrate some of the possible problems that can be minimized during installation
of such systems by the chemical supply company. Milnor washer-extractors and CBW® batch
washers (tunnels) are available with convenient inlets for such systems (see Figure 1). Most
common of the types of systems currently used in commercial laundering operations are pumped
chemical systems. Other types, such as constant pressure, re-circulating ring main systems have
also been, and may continue to be used with Milnor equipment.
This document warns about some of the possible hazards posed by chemical systems and lists
certain requirements needed to minimize those hazards. The procedures for interfacing with allied
chemical systems and information pertinent to chemical use in general are provided elsewhere in
the product manuals (see Note 1).
Figure 1: Pumped Chemical Inlets on CBW Batch Washer
Note 1: Misuse of laundering chemicals (such as injecting excessive concentrations of chlorine bleach or
permitting acid sours to react with hypo chlorite) due to incorrect formulation can also be hazardous.
Information pertinent to chemical use is provided elsewhere in the product manuals.
1.
How a Chemical System Can Damage the Machine It Serves
Milnor has manufactured washer-extractors and tunnel washers with the same stainless steel
specification since its founding. Every batch of steel used is certified and documented by the steel
mill. Testing of samples damaged by corrosion have, in every case, proven the steel to be well
within the AISI 304 specification.
PELLERIN MILNOR CORPORATION
18
Avoiding Damage From Allied Remote Chemical Delivery Systems
Chemical products commonly found in the laundry industry, when used in established dosages
and proper operating parameters, under the auspices of an experienced chemical specialist, should
produce satisfactory results, with no consequential detrimental effects. The industry has published
standards in Riggs and Sherrill, “Textile Laundering Technology”. However, the stainless steel
can be damaged and even destroyed by abnormal contact with chlorine bleach, hydrofluosilicic
acid and other commonly used chemicals, as will occur if chemicals are unintentionally leaked
into the machine, particularly when it is no longer in use and especially when machine surfaces
are dry.
Some chemical systems have been found to permit chemicals to dribble from the supply lines, or
worse, to siphon from the supply tank into the machine, during operation and long after the
system is shut down—as after working hours and during weekends. If this occurs, deterioration
(rusting) of the stainless steel and damage to any textiles therein will inevitably result. If this
condition goes undetected, machine damage is likely to be catastrophic. No machine is
immune to such damage.
CAUTION 1 : Equipment and Textile Damage Hazards—Chemicals leaked into the
machine, particularly when it is idle can destroy machine components and textiles left in the
machine. Pellerin Milnor Corporation accepts absolutely no responsibility for damage to its
equipment or to textiles therein from abnormal contact with chemicals.
• Ensure that the chemical system prevents unintentional release of chemicals.
• Inspect regularly for proper operation and evidence of damage.
2.
Requirements for Chemical Systems Used With Milnor Machines
It is the responsibility of the chemical system manufacturer and supplier to ensure that their
system is safe for personnel and equipment. Some important points are described below.
2.1.
Ensure the System Cannot Siphon.—The supply system must be designed to
counteract any siphoning that could occur as a result of having a sealed supply line between the
bottom of the chemical tank and the internal machine connection at the drain trough. As shown in
the Figure 2 examples, if the pump (P) and/or the valving does not provide positive closure and
there is no vacuum breaker protection, siphoning is likely to occur. In each of the Figure 2
illustrations, the volume of chemical in the tank above the siphon level (S), and indicated by
shading, will flow into the machine.
PELLERIN MILNOR CORPORATION
19
Figure 2: Siphoning
From the Chemical Tank into the Machine
Examples
Legend
P.
S.
T.
2.2.
Pump
Siphon level. Shading indicates the chemical delivery line and tank content that can siphon into
the machine.
Chemical tank
Ensure the Chemical Lines Cannot Dribble—The pumped chemical system may
provide a means of positively closing the chemical line at the pump location, but not at the
injection site. Hence, any concentrated chemical that remains in the injection line between the
pump and the machine is free to flow into the machine. Some examples of this are shown in
Figure 3.
PELLERIN MILNOR CORPORATION
20
Avoiding Damage From Allied Remote Chemical Delivery Systems
Figure 3: Dribbling
From Chemical Supply Line Into Machine
(assumes positive closure at the pump)
Examples
Legend
D.
P.
T.
3.
Portion of supply line, the contents of which can dribble into the machine
Pump
Chemical tank
Design and Installation Recommendations
It is the responsibility of the chemical system manufacturer and supplier to use whatever
measures are necessary to ensure that their system is safe for personnel and equipment. The
following are some of the possible methods the manufacturer or supplier may wish to use, as
appropriate.
3.1.
Siphoning: Positively close the line.—If the pump does not provide positive closure
when the system is off, employ a shutoff valve in the line to serve this purpose.
3.2.
Siphoning: Break the siphon.—Provide an air gap or vacuum breaker in the chemical
delivery line. This must be located above the “full” line of the tank.
3.3.
Dribbling: Flush the entire chemical delivery line.—If any concentrated chemical
that remains in the injection line between the pump and the machine is free to flow into the
machine, employ a system that flushes the entire line between the pump and the injection point
with fresh water after each injection.
PELLERIN MILNOR CORPORATION
21
3.4.
Dribbling: Locate the entire chemical line below the machine inlet.—
Assuming the chemical system does not retain any line pressure and that the pump provides
positive closure when the system is off, locate the entire chemical delivery line below the level of
the chemical inlet. An example of this is shown in Figure 4.
Figure 4: Locating
a Pumped Chemical System With Positive
Closure To Protect Against Machine Damage
Example of Correct Placement
Legend
I.
L.
P.
T.
4.
Chemical inlet on
machine
Chemical delivery line
Pump with positive
closure when system is
off
Chemical tank
Guarding Against Leaks
All personnel who may work with the chemical system (e.g., chemical system manufacturer,
chemical system supplier, chemical supplier, operator, maintenance personnel) should be vigilant
in observing for leaks in the system. When connecting, or reconnecting chemical lines, whether at
installation, after taking samples, or when replacing components, at a minimum ensure that:
1. the proper components are used,
2. all connections are the proper fit, and
3. all components are securely connected.
CAUTION 2 : Injury and Damage Hazards—Chemicals leaking from a chemical system
may be corrosive or toxic. Such chemicals can injure personnel and damage equipment.
• Use care when connecting chemical lines.
• Inspect regularly for leaks.
— End of BIWUUI03 —
PELLERIN MILNOR CORPORATION
22
Section
Service and Maintenance
23
1
MSSM0201CE/2004046V
ÈUBRICATION AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
L
FOR HYDRO-CUSHION® MACHINES
General Requirements
Ê
CRUSH/SEVER HAZARD—Tilting machines with tilt wheels/cradles may lunge
forward or rearward and even fall over if the tilt wheels at the non-tilted end are
raised out of their cradles—killing/injuring personnel and/or damaging property.
Maintenance procedures require:
☞ NEVER manually tilt (lift) both ends of the machine at the same time. One end must
always be seated in its cradle.
• A hand operated grease gun.
☞ ALWAYS visually inspect the tilt wheels to be sure they are all fully seated in their cradles before each manual tilt up.
• The correct lubricants (see “LUBRICANTS FOR MILNOR MACHINES,” in the Table of Contents).
Lubricant Requirements
Ê
To achieve the optimum performance and service life from the Milnor® machine and as a warranty requirement, the machine must be lubricated in strict accordance with the instructions in this section.
☞ Hydraulic valve manual operation must be done by trained competent maintenance personnel who thoroughly understand the system and all the consequences of manual
operations.
☞ ALWAYS understand beforehand all the consequences of manually operating hydraulic
valves.
☞ Never permit operation with malfunctioning tilt limit switches.
Correct Grease Gun Procedures
Ê
ENTANGLE AND CRUSH HAZARD—Belts and pulleys can entangle and crush
body parts.
☞ Lock OFF and tag out power at the wall disconnect before servicing, except
where specifically instructed otherwise in this section.
☞ Insure belt and pulley guards are in place during service procedures.
☞ Permit only qualified maintenance personnel to perform these procedures.
CRUSH/SEVER HAZARD—Tilting mechanism can crush or sever parts of your
body caught in them.
☞ Install the safety stands before performing maintenance under a tilted machine.
☞ NEVER test or operate (manually or automatically) any machine function
with any portion of a person’s body under the tilted machine—even if the
safety stands are installed.
24
1. Do not use a pneumatic grease gun. Pump grease slowly, taking 10-15 seconds to complete each stroke.
A grease gun can build up extremely high pressure which will force seals out of position and cause them to
leak, even though both the seal and the bearing housing are equipped with spring loaded relief plugs.
2. Apply quantity of grease called for in the checklist. Over-lubrication can be as damaging as under-lubrication. Where quantities are stated in strokes, one stroke of the grease gun is assumed to provide .0624 fluid
ounces (1.77 grams) (by volume) of grease. Therefore, one fluid ounce (28.3 grams) of grease would be provided by 16 strokes of the grease gun. Determine the flow rate of your grease gun by pumping one ounce
into a calibrated container. If fewer than 16 strokes are required, all quantities in strokes in the chart should
be reduced accordingly, and if more than 16 strokes are required, the number of strokes should be increased.
Before starting lubrication, make sure your grease gun is working and that you get a full charge of
grease with every stroke.
3. Do not pump grease in until it oozes out of the spring loaded relief plugs. Plugs bleed out excess grease
and help prevent abnormal pressures from building up in the housing during operation (especially when the
machine is first commissioned and after each lubrication). Plugs will not protect against over-lubrication.
4. Do not over-lubricate motors. Over-lubrication of a motor can seriously damage it by forcing grease into
motor windings. Over-lubrication of the extract motor can force grease into the centrifugal switch causing it
to malfunction.
5. Do not allow grease to drip on the brake disk or clutch tire/drum during lubrication. This will reduce
the braking action considerably, and may permit the cylinder to creep while loading and unloading.
MSSM0201CE/2004046V (1 of 9)
ÈUBRICATION AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
L
FOR HYDRO-CUSHION® MACHINES
General Requirements
Ê
CRUSH/SEVER HAZARD—Tilting machines with tilt wheels/cradles may lunge
forward or rearward and even fall over if the tilt wheels at the non-tilted end are
raised out of their cradles—killing/injuring personnel and/or damaging property.
Maintenance procedures require:
☞ NEVER manually tilt (lift) both ends of the machine at the same time. One end must
always be seated in its cradle.
• A hand operated grease gun.
☞ ALWAYS visually inspect the tilt wheels to be sure they are all fully seated in their cradles before each manual tilt up.
• The correct lubricants (see “LUBRICANTS FOR MILNOR MACHINES,” in the Table of Contents).
Lubricant Requirements
Ê
To achieve the optimum performance and service life from the Milnor® machine and as a warranty requirement, the machine must be lubricated in strict accordance with the instructions in this section.
☞ Hydraulic valve manual operation must be done by trained competent maintenance personnel who thoroughly understand the system and all the consequences of manual
operations.
☞ ALWAYS understand beforehand all the consequences of manually operating hydraulic
valves.
☞ Never permit operation with malfunctioning tilt limit switches.
Correct Grease Gun Procedures
Ê
ENTANGLE AND CRUSH HAZARD—Belts and pulleys can entangle and crush
body parts.
☞ Lock OFF and tag out power at the wall disconnect before servicing, except
where specifically instructed otherwise in this section.
☞ Insure belt and pulley guards are in place during service procedures.
☞ Permit only qualified maintenance personnel to perform these procedures.
CRUSH/SEVER HAZARD—Tilting mechanism can crush or sever parts of your
body caught in them.
☞ Install the safety stands before performing maintenance under a tilted machine.
☞ NEVER test or operate (manually or automatically) any machine function
with any portion of a person’s body under the tilted machine—even if the
safety stands are installed.
1. Do not use a pneumatic grease gun. Pump grease slowly, taking 10-15 seconds to complete each stroke.
A grease gun can build up extremely high pressure which will force seals out of position and cause them to
leak, even though both the seal and the bearing housing are equipped with spring loaded relief plugs.
2. Apply quantity of grease called for in the checklist. Over-lubrication can be as damaging as under-lubrication. Where quantities are stated in strokes, one stroke of the grease gun is assumed to provide .0624 fluid
ounces (1.77 grams) (by volume) of grease. Therefore, one fluid ounce (28.3 grams) of grease would be provided by 16 strokes of the grease gun. Determine the flow rate of your grease gun by pumping one ounce
into a calibrated container. If fewer than 16 strokes are required, all quantities in strokes in the chart should
be reduced accordingly, and if more than 16 strokes are required, the number of strokes should be increased.
Before starting lubrication, make sure your grease gun is working and that you get a full charge of
grease with every stroke.
3. Do not pump grease in until it oozes out of the spring loaded relief plugs. Plugs bleed out excess grease
and help prevent abnormal pressures from building up in the housing during operation (especially when the
machine is first commissioned and after each lubrication). Plugs will not protect against over-lubrication.
4. Do not over-lubricate motors. Over-lubrication of a motor can seriously damage it by forcing grease into
motor windings. Over-lubrication of the extract motor can force grease into the centrifugal switch causing it
to malfunction.
5. Do not allow grease to drip on the brake disk or clutch tire/drum during lubrication. This will reduce
the braking action considerably, and may permit the cylinder to creep while loading and unloading.
25
26
ÎFIGURE 3 (MSSM0201CE)
ÎTypical Upper Hydro-Cushion®
Grease Fitting
Î IGURE 1 (MSSM0201CE)
F
ÎHydraulic Fluid Reservoir Fill and Level Check Point
(located at rear of 48", 52", and 72" tilt machines only)
ÎFIGURE 2 (MSSM0201CE)
ÎTypical Hydro-Cushion®
Maintenance Points
Final stage and other v-belts
(throughout all machines)
FIGURES 1 and 12
NOTES 2 and 3
Hydro-Cushions®
(all machines)
FIGURES 2 and 3
Hydraulic Tilt System
(48", 52", and 72" Tilt machines)
• Reservoir
FIGURE 1 and NOTE 1
Component
Check for wear and
tension
Check for leaks
Check fluid with
machine not tilted
Action
NOTE 3: All v-belts are not alike. “Super” or “High Capacity” v-belts frequently have considerably higher
capacities than “Standard” belts. Sometimes, one brand of v-belt is more suitable than another
brand of v-belt, although both v-belts are “interchangable”. It is always best to purchase replacement
belts from the original manufacturer of the equipment. Purchasing exact replacements of the
original belts is the best way to assure belt life equal to the original set.
Occasionally, Milnor® will change a belt specification to improve belt life.
Belts purchased from Milnor® are as currently specified.
NOTE 2: V-belt instructions for the first week of operation
• After 24 hours operation (three eight hour days), tighten final stage v-belts.
• After 80 hours operation (ten eight hour days), tighten final stage v-belts again.
• After 160 hours of operation (twenty eight hour days), tighten final stage
v-belts, and check all other v-belts and tighten if necessary.
NOTE 1: Tank should be approximately three-quarters full when the machine is not tilted. Do not over-fill.
Weekly
Daily
Frequency
ÏDaily and Weekly Maintenance Items
27
ÎFIGURE 6 (MSSM0201CE)
Î42" Divided Cylinder Rear Bearing
and Seal Grease Fittings
ÎFIGURE 4 (MSSM0201CE)
Î 2" Divided Cylinder Front
4
Bearing and Seal Grease Fittings
®
0.37 ounces (10.6 grams),
six strokes at two locations
0.12 ounces (3.54 grams),
two strokes at two locations
• Each seal grease
fitting
Action
• Each bearing grease fitting
Ï
ÎFIGURE 8 (MSSM0201CE)
Î60" and 72" Divided Cylinder Rear Seal and Bearing
NOTE 6: Bearings can run hot enough to make it extremely uncomfortable for a
person to hold his hand on the bearing housing for more than a few seconds.
This is normal.
NOTE 5: Main bearings and jackshaft bearings (if so equipped) are prepacked with
lubricant at the factory. Do not add grease for thirty days. During the first
month’s operation, some grease will ooze out of the automatic grease fittings
at the bottom of the housing(s). This is normal. These grease fittings allow
excess grease to escape, thus avoiding over-heating. This escaping lubricant
need not be replaced. Every time these bearings are lubricated, the surplus
grease will come out of the spring loaded relief fittings after a few hours
running time.
NOTE 4: Once a month or once every 200 operating hours, whichever occurs first.
ÎFIGURE 7 (MSSM0201CE)
Î60" and 72" Divided Cylinder Front
Seal and Bearing Grease Fittings
ÎFIGURE 5 (MSSM0201CE)
Î 2" Staph-Guard® Front and
4
Rear Bearing and Seal Grease
Component
Monthly
All Divided cylinder and Staph-Guard main bearing and seals
(see NOTE 4 )
FIGURES 4 through 10, NOTES 5 and 6
Frequency
ÏMonthly Maintenance Items
28
ÎFIGURE 13 (MSSM0201CE)
ÎHydrocushion Bypass Valve
(48" machines only")
Hydro-cushion bypass
Î IGURE 10 (MSSM0201CE)
F
Î60044 and 72044 Staph-Guard® Rear
Bearing and Seal Grease Fittings (lo-
Î IGURE 12 (MSSM0201CE)
F
Î ypical Drive Train Components (48" machine shown)
T
Î IGURE 9 (MSSM0201CE)
F
Î60044 and 72044 Staph-Guard®
Front Bearing and Seal Grease Fit-
ÎFIGURE 11 (MSSM0201CE)
ÎAll Open-Pocket Machine Seal and
Bearing
Grease Fitting Plate
Action
0.06 ounces (1.77 grams),
one stroke at one location
Drain small quantity of oil.
If milky, see note 7 below
• Hydro-Cushion® bypass
(48" open-pocket only)
0.31 ounces (8.8 grams),
five strokes at one location
0.19 ounces (5.31 grams),
three strokes at one location
• Rear bearing grease fitting
• Seal grease fitting
Check for wear
Remove soil build-up
• Pulleys and clutches
• All components
Drive train components
FIGURE 12
0.62 ounces (17.7 grams),
ten strokes at one location
• Front bearing grease fitting
52" and 72" Open pocket main bearings and seals
FIGURE 11, NOTES 4, 5, and 6
See “SemiAnnualMaintenance Items”
in this section
• Seal grease fitting
• Front and rear bearing grease fitting 0.31 ounces (8.85 grams),
five strokes at two locations
48" Open pocket main bearings, seals and Hydro-Cushions®
FIGURES 11 and 13, NOTES 4, 5, 6 and 7
• Seal grease fitting
• Front and rear bearing grease fitting 0.12 ounces (3.54 grams),
two strokes at two locations
42" Open pocket main bearings and seals
FIGURE 11, NOTES 5 and 6
Component
NOTE 7:“Milky” oil is contaminated by water. Drain cylinder and unscrew cap on
bottom of bypass (See BMP890047). Remove piston rod and inspect the upper
piston cups and lower piston for wear or damage. Worn piston cups allow water
from the air supply to enter hydrocushion. Repair worn parts and change oil.
Monthly
(see NOTE 4)
Frequency
ÏMonthly Maintenance Items
29
ÎFIGURE 17 (MSSM0201CE)
Î42" Staph-Guard®
ldler Shaft
Grease Fitting
ÎFIGURE 14 (MSSM0201CE)
ÎHandwheel Screw
(42" Divided Cylinder and Staph-Guard® only)
ÎFIGURE 18 (MSSM0201CE)
Î60" and 72" Staph-Guard® Idler Shaft
and Disc Brake Grease Fittings
(60" shown)
ÎFIGURE 15 (MSSM0201CE)
ÎTypical Door Hinge
ÎFIGURE 19 (MSSM0201CE)
ÎTypical Jackshaft
Grease Fittings
( 52" machine shown)
ÎFIGURE 16 (MSSM0201CE)
ÎHandwheel Stop
(42" Divided Cylinder and Staph-Guard® only)
30
ÎFIGURE 20 (MSSM0201CE)
ÎTilt Wheels
(42"and 48" tilt machines only)
Ï
0.12 ounces (3.54 grams),
two strokes at each location
0.06 ounces (1.77 grams),
one stroke at one location
0.31 ounces (8.85 grams),
five strokes at two locations
0.12 ounces (3.54 grams),
two strokes at one location
0.12 ounces (3.54 grams)
two strokes at two locations
0.12 ounces (3.54 grams),
two strokes at each locations
Door hinges
• Grease fittings
FIGURE 15
Handwheel stop
(42" Divided Cylinder and StaphGuard® )
• Grease fitting
FIGURE 16
Idler shaft
(Staph-Guard® only)
• Grease fittings
FIGURES 17 and 18
Disc brake
(60" and 72" Staph-Guard® only)
• Grease fittings
FIGURE 18
Jackshaft
(if equipped)
• Grease fittings
FIGURE 19
NOTES 5 and 6
Tilt wheels
(42", 48", and 72" Tilt Models )
• Grease fittings
FIGURE 20
Action
Three drops of light machine
oil
Component
Monthly
Handwheel screw
(see NOTE 4) (42" Divided Cylinder and StaphGuard® )
• Screw thread
FIGURE 14
Frequency
Monthly Maintenance Items
31
ÎFIGURE 24 (MSSM0201CE)
ÎDisk Brake
(Staph-Guard® only)
Î IGURE 21 (MSSM0201CE)
F
ÎDisk Brake Reservoir
(Staph-Guard® only)
ÎFIGURE 25 (MSSM0201CE)
Î ydraulic Tilt Pressure Gauge
H
(On rear of 42", 48", and 72" tilt models)
ÎFIGURE 22 (MSSM0201CE)
Î rake Band Grease Fittings
B
(60044 and 72044WP2/WP3)
Brake band
grease fittings
ÎFIGURE 26 (MSSM0201CE)
ÎDoor Seal Pressure Regulator
ÎFIGURE 23 (MSSM0201CE)
ÎBrake Shoes (all machines)
32
Component
Check for wear, adjust or replace as required.
Check for wear, replace as required
• Brake shoes
FIGURE 23
• Disc brake pads
(60" and 72" Staph-Guard®only)
FIGURE 24
Check pressure while machine is returning from
a tilted position
800 PSI (55 Bar)
900 PSI (62 Bar)
1000 PSI (69 Bar)
Check settings with machine in bare manual and
clockwise wash rotation. See instructions for
operating individual outputs in the reference
manual.
48 - 50 PSI (3.37 - 3.51Kg/cm2)
25 - 28 PSI (1.76 - 1.97 Kg/cm2)
18 - 20 PSI (1.27 - 1.41 Kg/cm2)
Hydraulic tilt
pressure gauge
FIGURE 25
• 42" Open pocket
• 48" Open pocket
• 72" Open pocket
Door seal
pressure regulator
FIGURE 26
• 42" and 48" Open pocket
• 60" and 72" Rapid load
• 60" and 72" Staph-Guard®
NOTE 9: Pump grease slowly with relief ports open. Do not over-lubricate.
NOTE 8: If motor manufacturer’s instructions conflict with manual section, follow nameplate instructions.
motors are warrantied by their manufacturers, not by Milnor®.
See “BALDOR MOTOR MAINTENANCE...,”
MSSM0274AE in this manual.
Motors
FIGURE 12
NOTES 8 and 9
Check oil level, add as necessary
Inspect washer, replace as necessary
0.06 ounces (1.77 grams),
one stroke at two locations. Do not allow grease
to drip on brake surfaces.
• Brake band grease fittings
(60044 and 72044 WP2/WP3 only)
FIGURE 22
Hydro-Cushions®
FIGURES 2 and 3
Check level, refill as required
(Always use fresh fluid from a sealed container)
Action
• Disk brake reservoir
(60" and 72" Staph-Guard® only)
FIGURE 21
Quarterly Brake Components
Frequency
ÏQuarterly Maintenance Items
33
ÎFIGURE 28 (MSSM0201CE)
ÎPush Back and Forward Hydraulic System
Gauges and Regulators
(42", 48", and 72" Tilt Models)
ÎFIGURE 30 (MSSM0201CE)
Î hell Door Recirculation Hose
S
(48" dye machine only - cover removed for clarity)
Î IGURE 27 (MSSM0201CE)
F
ÎTypical Gear Reducer Fill and Drain
ÎFIGURE 29 (MSSM0201CE)
Î ush-Down Control Valve
P
(72" Rapid load and Staph-Guard® only)
Component
Hydraulic system
FIGURE 28
Hydro-Cushions®
FIGURE 2
Gear reducer
FIGURE 27
Component
Change oil
Change oil
Change oil and clean magnetic
plug (if so equipped)
Action
ÏAnnual or Less Frequent Maintenance Items
NOTE 11:Adjust push-down control valves so that machine moves down evenly,
and all push-down sockets meet simultaneously. If the back of the machine
comes down first, close the valve slowly. If the front comes down first, open
the valve.
NOTE 10:52" and 72" machines are not equipped with a tilt pressure regulator
or gauge.
Every 2
years
Annual
Frequency
Observe operation and adjust if
required
Push-down control valves
(72" Rapid load and StaphGuard®)
FIGURE 29 and NOTE 11
Replace hose
Check pressure in a “wash step”
30 PSI (2.11Kg/cm2)
• Tilt position pressure regulator
and gauge
Recirculation
(48" dye models only)
FIGURE 30
Check pressure in a “wash step”
3 - 5 PSI (.21- 0.35 Kg/cm2)
Check oil level, refill as required
0.12 ounces (3.54 grams),
two strokes at one location
Action
• Down position pressure
gauge and regulator
Push Back and Forward System
FIGURE 28 and NOTE 10
Gear reducer
FIGURE 27
Semi-Annual Main bearings and seals
• 48" Seal grease fittings
FIGURE 11
Frequency
ÏSemi-Annual Maintenance Items
34
52038WP1/WTL/WTN
64046ExN
72046ExN
72058JxN
Divided Cylinder Machines
42031 - 44 WP2/3
42031 - 44 SP2/3
60044 SP2/3
72044 SP2/3
30015, 20, 22, C, S, and M
3022F8J
36021Q4x, 36026Q4x
36021BWP
36021Q6x, 36026Q6x,
42024Q4x, 42026Q6x
36030Fxx
42032Fxx
42026QHP
48032BHP/BTL/BTN
48036QHP/QTL/QTN
Open Pocket Machines
Bearing housings
EPLF 2
EPLF 2
220
30
Gear reducers
220
220
220
Isolators
1030
1030
220
®
Hydro-Cushions
1030 EPLF 2
1030
220
Motors
EPLF 2
Commutator cam
Wells
Balancing mechanism
1540
DOT 3
DOT 3
DOT 3
Disc brake
(if so equipped)
Washer-Extractors
68
1030
Hydraulic tilt mechanism
The following are lubricants used in Milnor® machines. Always refer to the preventive maintenance instructions for
specific lubricating instructions. Consult lubricant manufacturer to verify equivalence before using a substitute. Mixing
different base greases can cause bearing and seal damage.
Door EPLF 2
Door EPLF 2
Door latches
Bearing housings
EPLF 2
Gear reducer
EPLF 2
Drive motors
ÏOils
634
1030
220
32
220
Disc brake
Hydraulic mechanisms
68 DOT 3
Drive/Support rollers
Guide rollers
23
Blower shaft bearings
Door
EPLF 2
EP2
FL
R
Wells
SRI
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
EP2
EPLF 2 EP2
T32 EPLF 2 EPLF 2
Mist oiler
DOT 3 = NAPA Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
23
= Shell Tellus® 23
30
= High quality SAE 30, 40, or 50 weight motor oil
(non-detergent, if available)
32
= Shell Tellus® 32
T32
= Shell Turbo® T32
68
= Shell Tellus® 68
220
= Shell Morlina® 220
630
= Valvoline Special Moly® EP 630
634
= Mobile SHC® 634 Oil
1030
= Shell Rotella T® 10W30
1540
= Shell Rotella T® HD 15W40
Dryvac
Shuttle &
Conveyor
Dryer
Press
Single Stage
Press
42032M9E
42032M7E
CBW®
®
Hydro-Cushions
LUBRICANTS FOR MILNOR® MACHINES
È
Other grease points
CBW® , Extractor, Press, Shuttles, Conveyors, and Dryvacs
Press pressure pump
R
R
SRI
Inflatable rib couplings
FL
Shuttle chain
EPLF 2
Doorease® Stick lubricant
Shell Alvania® EP-LF Type 2
Shell Darina® EP-2
Recol Food Lubricant
Shell Dolium® R
Wells CL200 Cam Lubricant
Chevron SRI oil
ÏGreases
630
Blower motors
MSSM0132AE/9903AV (1 of 1)
All other grease points
21<4?B=?D?B=19>D5>1>35
<BB<!&#04(&"
0E
Most of the information in this document is taken from the Baldor Electric Company Instruction,
Operation, and Maintenance Manual, and provides a means of more accurately determining motor
lubrication requirements based on local conditions.
7U^UbQ\=QY^dU^Q^SU
Inspect, clean, and test motors at regular intervals— approximately every 500 operating hours
or every three months, whichever comes first. Lubricate motors at the intervals determined herein. Keep
accurate maintenance records.
!
41>75B* 5\USdb_SedY_^ Q^T 5\USdbYSQ\ 2eb^ 8QjQbTc
2^]cPRc fXcW WXVW e^[cPVT fX[[ T[TRca^RdcT ^a Qda] h^d ?^fTa bfXcRWTb ^] cWT
\PRWX]T P]S cWT R^]ca^[ Q^g S^ ]^c T[X\X]PcT cWTbT WPiPaSb 7XVW e^[cPVT Xb
_aTbT]c Pc cWT \PRWX]T d][Tbb cWT \PX] _^fTa Xb ^UU 4[TRcaXRP[ _^fTa RP] RPdbT
STPcW ^a bTeTaT X]Ydah
☞
☞
3^ ]^c bTaeXRT \PRWX]T d][Tbb `dP[XUXTS P]S PdcW^aXiTS
;^RZ >55 P]S cPV ^dc _^fTa Pc cWT fP[[ SXbR^]]TRc QTU^aT bTaeXRX]V ^a X]
PRR^aSP]RT fXcW UPRc^ah bTaeXRT _a^RTSdaTb
!
41>75B* 5^dQ^W\U Q^T 3becX 8QjQbT
2^]cPRc fXcW \^eX]V R^\_^]T]cb ]^a\P[[h Xb^[PcTS Qh VdPaSb R^eTab P]S
_P]T[b
RP]
T]cP]V[T
P]S
RadbW
h^da
[X\Qb
CWTbT
R^\_^]T]cb
Pdc^\PcXRP[[h
☞
3^
]^c
bTaeXRT
\PRWX]T
d][Tbb
`dP[XUXTS P]S PdcW^aXiTS
☞
;^RZ >55 P]S cPV ^dc _^fTa Pc cWT
fP[[ SXbR^]]TRc QTU^aT bTaeXRX]V ^a
X] PRR^aSP]RT fXcW UPRc^ah bTaeXRT
_a^RTSdaTb
3\UQ^—Keep the exterior of the motor free of dirt, oil,
grease, water, etc. Keep ventilation openings clear. Oily
vapor, paper pulp, textile lint, etc., can accumulate and
block ventilation, causing overheating and early motor
failure.
DUcd—Periodically, check the motor and winding
insulation integrity using a “megger.” Record the megger
readings and immediately investigate any significant drop
in insulation resistance. Check all electrical connectors to
be sure they are tight.
<eRbYSQdU—Determine the proper lubrication interval
for your motor as explained in “How to Determine
Lubrication Interval” in this section, and lubricate
accordingly.
586DA4
=CC= "'$15
Di`YSQ\ =_d_b 4QdQ @\QdU
35
\^eT
21<4?B =?D?B =19>D5>1>35
=CC= "'$15)'#!1F"$
8_gd_4UdUb]Y^U<eRbYSQdY_^9^dUbfQ\—The useful life of antifriction bearing
grease can be estimated, based on service conditions, frame type, and motor rpm. An example of
determining the correct lubrication interval is provided below.
Ex: A fan motor, operating at an ambient temperature of 109oF (43oC) in a moderately corrosive
atmosphere. The motor has a NEMA 286T/(IEC 180) frame and is rated at 1750 rpm.
Table 1 classifies the service condition as “severe.”
Table 2 specifies a 0.5 service condition multiplier value for “severe” service condition.
Table 3 specifies 9500 hours as the recommended lubrication interval for frame sizes 254 to 286
(see nameplate), given standard service conditions.
Multiply .5 (service condition multiplier value) by 9500 hours (recommended lubrication interval)
= 4750 hours (calculated lubrication interval).
Table 4 shows that the amount of grease to be added is 0.32 ounces (9.1 grams).
Table 1 — Determining the Service Condition
Severity of Service
Maximum Ambient
Temperature
Atmospheric
Contamination
Type of Bearing
Standard
104oF (40oC)
Clean, little corrosion
Deep groove ball
bearing
Severe
122oF (50oC)
Moderate dirt, corrosion
Ball thrust, Roller
Severe dirt, abrasive dust,
corrosion
All bearings
o
o
Extreme
>122 F (>50 C) or
Class H Insulation
(Note 1)
Low Temperature
-22oF (-30oC)
(Note 2)
Note 1: Special high temperature grease is recommended.
Note 2: Special low temperature grease is recommended.
Table 2 — Service Condition Multiplier Value
Operating
Condition
Multiplier
Standard
1.0
Severe
0.5
Extreme
0.1
36
21<4?B =?D?B =19>D5>1>35
=CC= "'$15)'#!1F#$
Table 3 — Recommended Lubrication Intervals at Standard Service Conditions
NEMA (IEC)
Frame Size
Rated Speed - RPM
3600
1800
1200
900
Up to 215 (132)
5500 Hrs.
12000 Hrs.
18000 Hrs.
22000 Hrs.
254 to 286 (160 - 180)
3600 Hrs.
9500 Hrs.
15000 Hrs.
18000 Hrs.
324 to 365 (200 - 225)
2200 Hrs.(Note 3)
7400 Hrs.
12000 Hrs.
15000 Hrs.
404 to 5000 (280 - 315)
2200 Hrs.(Note 3)
3500 Hrs.
7400 Hrs.
10500 Hrs.
Note 3: Bearings in 404 through 5000 frame, 2 pole motors are either 6313 or 6314 bearings and the
lubrication interval is shown in the table. If roller bearings are used, the bearings must be
lubricated more frequently. Divide the listed lubrication interval by two.
Table 4 — Lubrication Amounts per Frame
NEMA (IEC)
Frame Size
Bearing Description
These are the “Large” bearings (Shaft End) in each frame size (Note 4)
Largest
bearing
in size
category
OD
D mm
Width
B mm
Up to 215 (132)
6307
80
21
254 to 286
(160 - 180)
6311
120
324 to 365
(200 - 225)
6313
404 to 5000
(280 - 315)
NU322
Grease gun
strokes
(Note 5)
Volume of grease to
be added
ounces
grams
2.5
0.16
4.7
29
5.0
0.32
9.1
140
33
7.0
0.43
12.2
240
50
18.0
1.11
31.5
Note 4: Smaller bearings in size category may require reduced amounts of grease.
Note 5: See “Correct Grease Gun Procedures” for information on estimating the output of handoperated grease guns.
37
21<4?B =?D?B =19>D5>1>35
=CC= "'$15)'#!1F$$
<eRbYSQdY_^BUS_]]U^TQdY_^c
Di`U_V7bUQcU—Use Shell Dolium R (factory installed) or Chevron SRI greases for standard
service conditions. The extreme and low temperature conditions are not normally encountered in the
laundry. However, for extreme conditions, use Darmex 707 and for low temperature conditions, use
Arrowshell 7. Contact Baldor for equivalents, if necessary.
3_bbUSd7bUQcU7e^@b_SUTebUc
Use hand-operated grease gun, not a pneumatic grease gun. Pump grease slowly, taking 10 to 12
seconds to complete each stroke.
Apply quantity of grease called for. Over-lubrication can be as damaging as under-lubrication.
Where quantities are stated in strokes, one stroke of the grease gun is assumed to provide .0624
fluid oz. (1.77 grams) (by volume) of grease. Therefore, one fluid ounce (28.3 grams) of grease
would be provided by 16 strokes of the grease gun. Determine the flow rate of your grease gun by
pumping one ounce into a calibrated container. If fewer than 16 strokes are required, all quantities
in strokes in the chart should be reduced accordingly. If more than 16 strokes are required, the
number of strokes should be increased. Before starting lubrication, make sure your grease gun
is working and that you get a full charge of grease with every stroke.
Do not over-lubricate motors. Over-lubrication of a motor can seriously damage it by forcing grease
into motor windings. Over-lubrication of the extract motor can force grease into the centrifugal
switch causing it to malfunction.
Do not allow grease to drip on the brake disk or clutch tire/drum during lubrication. This will reduce
the braking action considerably, and may permit the cylinder to creep while loading and unloading.
<eRbYSQdY_^@b_SUTebU
$
>?D935* =_d_b 4Q]QWU
C^ Pe^XS SP\PVT c^ \^c^a QTPaX]Vb VaTPbT \dbc QT ZT_c UaTT ^U SXac 5^a P]
TgcaT\T[h SXach T]eXa^]\T]c R^]cPRc h^da 1P[S^a SXbcaXQdc^a ^a P] PdcW^aXiTS
1P[S^a BTaeXRT 2T]cTa U^a PSSXcX^]P[ X]U^a\PcX^]
Clean grease fittings.
Remove grease outlet plug.
Add recommended amount of grease. Be sure grease to be added is compatible with the grease
already in motor. Consult your Baldor distributor or an authorized Baldor Service Center if grease
other than recommended is to be used. Stop when new grease appears at shaft hole in the endplate
or grease outlet plug.
Replace grease outlet plug.
38
39
General Assembly - WED
R
BMP701387R/71152A
(Sheet 1 of 1)
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Litho in U.S.A.
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Parts List—General Assembly - WED
Description
Item
6036
Part List
6044
7244
.
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES-----------------------------------------------------------------1.
Level Indicator Gasket, Outer
2 -18940
2-18940
2-18940
2.
Sight Glass
2 -18657
2-18657
2-18657
3.
Level Indicator Gasket, Inner
2 -18941
2-18941
2-18941
4.
Hex Cap Screw, 3/8"-16 X 1 1/4"
1 5K100
15K100
15K100
5.
Water Level Clamp Ring
2-19128
2-19128
3-6075
6.
Airmount, Firestone #3582-01-7264
60B100
60B100
-----------
7.
Lower Belt Guard W/O AUTOSPOT
2-19111
2-19111
3-6095
Lower Guard W/AUTOSPOT
2 -175043
2-175043
3-6095
Upper Belt Guard W/O AUTOSPOT
2-19110
2-19110
3-6099
Upper Belt Guard W/AUTOSPOT
2 -185045
2-175045
3-6099
9.
Excursion Switch
9R008
9R008
9R008
10.
Marker, Water Level Indicator, cm
2 -175071
2-175071
2-175071
11.
Marker, Water Level Indicator, Inches
2-18980
2-18980
2-18980
12.
Airmount, Firestone #3582-01-7081
-------------
---------------
60B120
8.
40
41
42
43
MSSM0101CE/9906AV (1 of 19)
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
È
The specifications in this section apply to 1/4 inch and larger Unified National fine and coarse fasteners used on
Milnor® machines. This information is to be used only when torque specifications are not stated in the installation
or service instructions.
When tightening applicable fastener, abide by the following precautions:
1. Always use new fasteners. Replace bolts, nuts, flat washers, and lock washers in the order shown on the parts
drawing.
2. Unless otherwise specified, use:
Loctite® 271 threadlocker or equivalent for bearing
housing mounting bolts from one half to one inch in diameter.
•
•
Loctite® 277 threadlocker or equivalent for bearing
housing mounting bolts of one inch diameter or larger.
•
Loctite® 242 threadlocker for all other fasteners
requiring thread locking compound.
3. Use a torque wrench to assure proper tightness.
4. Never lubricate fasteners. The values specified herein are
maximum recommended torques and are calculated from
published ASTM and SAE data. Actual allowable torques
are application dependent and can vary for many reasons,
(joint types, gaskets, etc.). Use these values as a guide.
ÎFIGURE 1 (MSSM0101CE)
ÎFastener Grade Markings
5. Although FIGURE 1 depicts hex head bolts, the table applies to all head types.
Fasteners and Threadlocker
Ê
How Fasteners Loosen—Standard threaded fasteners are manufactured with a clearance fit for easy assemË
bly. With the fastener at the proper torque, 85% of the tightening torque is absorbed in the threads and under the
fastener head. The remaining 15% provides the friction that prevents the thread from slipping. When this friction is
overcome (by bending, thermal expansion, internal pressures, functional loads, or impact) the thread slips and loosens. Although higher torques reduce the likelihood of thread slippage, if slippage occurs, the threads unwind and
the fastener loosens. Once thread slippage begins, vibration increases the rate of loosening.
Preventing Loosening—The most effective way to prevent loosening of threaded parts is by proper appliË
cation of a threadlocking compound. Threadlocker provides lubrication during assembly, then hardens to seal the
threads against corrosion and provide resistance to thread slippage.
44
MSSM0101CE/9906AV (2 of 19)
Applying Threadlocker
Ê
NOTE: The following threadlocker information and
illustrations are excerpts from the Loctite® User’s
Guide and are used with permission.
For maximum strength, threadlocker must fill the thread
voids completely, as shown in FIGURE 2. Organic or petroleum solvent will remove excess uncured adhesive from
joints. Consult information below for the specific fastener application.
ÎFIGURE 2 (MSSM0101CE)
ÎCorrect Threadlocker Use
Bolts and Nuts—See FIGURE 3.
Ë
1. Clean all threads (bolt and nut) with cleaning solvent.
Apply here
2. Spray all threads with Loctite® Primer N. Allow to dry.
3. Insert bolt into through hole assembly.
4. Apply several drops of threadlocker onto bolt engagement area.
5. Assemble and tighten nut to correct torque for the
threadlocker.
Blind Holes—See FIGURE 4.
Ë
Not here
1. Clean all threads (bolt and nut) with cleaning solvent.
2. Spray all threads with Loctite® Primer N. Allow to dry.
ÎFIGURE 3 (MSSM0101CE)
ÎApplying Threadlocker to
Through Hole
3. Squirt several drops down female threads into bottom of
hole.
Onto
threads
4. Apply several drops to bolt.
5. Tighten to correct torque for the threadlocker.
Onto
threads
ÎFIGURE 4 (MSSM0101CE)
ÎApplying Threadlocker to Blind Holes
45
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
MSSM0101CE/9906AV (3 of 19)
Removing Fasteners
Ë
High strength threadlockers like Loctite® 271 (or equivalent)
may be weakened by heating to at least 500o F (260o C) as
follows.
1. Apply localized heat to fastener as shown in FIGURE 5.
2. Disassemble while hot. Once disassembled, the cured adhesive can be removed with Loctite® Gasket Remover
#790 (or equivalent).
ÎFIGURE 5 (MSSM0101CE)
ÎRemoving High Strength Threadlocker
ÏCarbon Steel Fasteners
Ï ll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
A
Nominal Grade
bolt size Designation and
Standard
1/4 - 20
Zinc or
If instructions call for :
Cadmium
Loctite
Loctite
Loctite
Plated
222 or
242
271
262
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
2.5
(3.39)
3.0
(4.06)
3.3
(4.47)
3.6
(4.88)
4.6
(6.23)
4.3
(5.83)
3.3
(4.47)
SAE Grade 2
4.1
(5.56)
4.9
(6.64)
5.5
(7.45)
6.0
(8.13)
7.7
(10.44)
7.1
(9.63)
5.5
(7.46)
SAE Grade 4
4.8
(6.50)
5.8
(7.86)
6.4
(8.67)
7.0
(9.49)
9.0
(12.20)
8.3
(11.25)
6.4
(8.67)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
6.3
(8.54)
7.6
(10.3)
8.4
(11.38)
9.3
(12.60)
11.8
(15.99)
11.0
(14.91)
8.4
(11.39)
SAE Grade 7
7.9
(10.7)
9.4
(12.7)
10.5
(14.23)
11.5
(15.59)
14.7
(19.93)
13.6
(18.44)
10.5
(14.23)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354 Grade
BD
8.9
(12.0)
10.7
(14.5)
11.9
(16.13)
13.1
(17.76)
16.6
(22.50)
15.4
(20.88)
11.9
(16.13)
ASTM A354 Grade
BC
7.9
(10.7)
9.4
(12.7)
10.5
(14.23)
11.5
(15.59)
14.7
(19.93)
13.6
(18.44)
10.5
(14.23)
46
MSSM0101CE/9906AV (4 of 19)
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
NomiGrade Designation
nal bolt and Standard
size
1/4 - 28
Zinc or If instructions call for :
Cadmium
Loctite
Loctite
Loctite
Plated
222 or
242
271
262
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
2.8
(3.80)
3.4
(4.61)
3.8
(5.15)
4.1
(5.56)
5.3
(7.18)
4.9
(6.64)
3.8
(5.15)
SAE Grade 2
4.7
(6.37)
5.6
(7.60)
6.3
(8.54)
6.9
(9.36)
8.8
(11.93)
8.1
(10.98)
6.3
(8.54)
SAE Grade 4
5.5
(7.46)
6.6
(8.95)
7.3
(9.90)
8.1
(10.98)
10.3
(13.96)
9.5
(12.88)
7.3
(9.90)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
7.3
(9.90)
8.7
(11.80)
9.7
(13.15)
10.7
(14.50)
13.6
(18.44)
12.6
(17.08)
9.7
(13.15)
SAE Grade 7
8.9
(12.07)
10.7
(14.50)
11.9
(16.13)
13.1
(17.76)
16.6
(22.51)
15.4
(20.88)
11.9
(16.13)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354 Grade
BD
10.2
(13.83)
12.2
(16.54)
13.6
(18.44)
15.0
(20.34)
19.0
(25.76)
17.7
(23.99)
13.6
(18.44)
ASTM A354 Grade
BC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade Designation
bolt size and Standard
Zinc or If instructions call for :
Cadmium
Loctite
Loctite
Loctite
Plated
222
242
271
or262
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
5/16 - 18 SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
5.1
(6.91)
6.2
(8.40)
6.8
(9.22)
7.5
(10.17)
9.6
(13.02)
8.9
(12.07)
6.8
(9.22)
SAE Grade 2
8.5
(11.52)
10.2
(13.83)
11.3
(15.32)
12.5
(16.95)
15.9
(21.56)
14.7
(19.93)
11.3
(15.32)
SAE Grade 4
10.0
(13.56)
12.0
(16.27)
13.3
(18.03)
14.6
(19.79)
18.6
(25.22)
17.3
(23.46)
13.3
(18.03)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
13.0
(17.63)
15.6
(21.15)
17.4
(23.60)
19.1
(25.90)
24.3
(32.95)
22.6
(30.64)
17.4
(23.60)
SAE Grade 7
16.1
(21.83)
19.3
(26.17)
21.5
(29.15)
23.6
(31.99)
30.1
(40.81)
27.9
(37.83)
21.5
(29.15)
SAE Grade 8 ASTM
A354 Grade BD
18.5
(25.08)
22.1
(29.96)
24.6
(33.35)
27.1
(36.74)
34.5
(46.78)
32.0
(43.39)
24.6
(33.35)
ASTM A354 Grade
BC
16.1
(21.83)
19.3
(26.17)
21.5
(29.15)
23.6
(31.99)
30.1
(40.81)
27.9
(37.83)
21.5
(29.15)
47
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
MSSM0101CE/9906AV (5 of 19)
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade Designation Zinc
If instructions call for :
bolt size and Standard
orCadmium
Loctite Loctite Loctite
Plated
222 or
242
271
262
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
5/16 - 24 SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
5.6
(7.59)
6.7
(9.08)
7.4
(10.03)
8.2
(11.12)
10.4
(14.10)
9.6
(13.01)
7.4
(10.03)
SAE Grade 2
9.4
(12.74)
11.3
(15.32)
12.5
(16.94)
13.8
(18.71)
17.5
(23.73)
16.3
(22.09)
12.5
(16.94)
SAE Grade 4
11.0
(14.91)
13.2
(17.90)
14.6
(19.79)
16.1
(21.83)
20.5
(27.79)
19.0
(25.76)
14.6
(19.79)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
14.4
(19.52)
17.2
(23.32)
19.1
(25.90)
21.1
(28.60)
26.8
(36.35)
24.9
(33.76)
19.1
(25.90)
SAE Grade 7
17.9
(24.27)
21.4
(29.01)
23.8
(32.27)
26.2
(35.52)
33.4
(45.28)
31.0
(42.03)
23.8
(32.27)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354 Grade
BD
20.4
(27.66)
24.4
(33.08)
27.1
(36.74)
29.9
(40.54)
38.0
(51.52)
35.3
(47.86)
27.1
(36.74)
ASTM A354 Grade
BC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade
bolt size Designation and
Standard
3/8 - 16
Zinc or
Cadmium
Plated
If instructions call for :
Loctite
222 or
262
Loctite
242
Loctite
271
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
9.0
(12.20)
10.8
(14.64)
12.0
(16.27)
13.1
(17.76)
16.7
(22.64)
15.5
(21.01)
12.0
(16.27)
SAE Grade 2
14.9
(20.20)
17.9
(24.27)
19.9
(26.98)
21.9
(29.69)
27.9
(37.83)
25.9
(35.11)
19.9
(26.98)
SAE Grade 4
17.8
(24.13)
21.3
(28.88)
23.7
(32.13)
26.0
(35.25)
33.1
(44.87)
30.8
(41.76)
23.7
(32.13)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
23.2
(31.45)
27.8
(37.69)
30.9
(41.89)
34.0
(46.09)
43.3
(58.70)
40.2
(54.50)
30.9
(41.89)
SAE Grade 7
28.7
(38.91)
34.4
(46.64)
38.2
(51.79)
42.0
(56.94)
53.5
(72.54)
49.7
(67.39)
38.2
(51.79)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354
Grade BD
32.7
(44.33)
39.2
(53.15)
43.6
(59.11)
48.0
(65.08)
61.0
(82.70)
56.7
(76.87)
43.6
(59.11)
ASTM A354
Grade BC
28.7
(38.91)
34.4
(46.64)
38.2
(51.79)
42.0
(56.94)
53.5
(72.54)
49.7
(67.39)
38.2
(51.79)
48
MSSM0101CE/9906AV (6 of 19)
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade Designation
bolt size and Standard
3/8 - 24
Zinc or
If instructions call for :
Cadmium
Loctite
Loctite
Loctite
Plated
222 or
242
271
262
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
10.2
(13.83)
12.2
(16.54)
13.6
(18.44)
15.0
(20.33)
19.0
(25.76)
17.7
(24.00)
13.6
(18.44)
SAE Grade 2
16.9
(22.91)
20.3
(27.52)
22.5
(30.52)
24.8
(33.62)
31.5
(42.70)
29.3
(39.73)
22.5
(30.50)
SAE Grade 4
20.0
(27.11)
24.0
(32.54)
26.7
(36.20)
29.4
(39.86)
37.4
(50.70)
34.7
(47.04)
26.7
(36.20)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
26.2
(35.52)
31.4
(42.57)
34.9
(47.32)
38.4
(52.06)
48.9
(66.30)
45.4
(61.55)
34.9
(47.32)
SAE Grade 7
32.3
(43.79)
38.8
(52.60)
43.1
(58.44)
47.4
(64.26)
60.4
(81.89)
56.1
(76.06)
43.1
(58.43)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354 Grade
BD
36.9
(50.02)
44.3
(60.06)
49.2
(66.70)
54.1
(73.35)
68.9
(93.41)
64.0
(86.77)
49.2
(66.70)
ASTM A354 Grade
BC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade Designation Zinc or
If instructions call for :
bolt size and Standard
CadmiumLoctite
Loctite
Loctite
Plated
222 or
242
271
262
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
7/16 - 14 SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
14.0
(18.98)
17.0
(23.04)
19.14
(25.95)
21.0
(28.47)
27.0
(36.60)
25.0
(33.89)
19.0
(25.76)
SAE Grade 2
24.0
(32.54)
28.8
(39.05)
32.0
(43.39)
35.2
(47.72)
44.8
(60.74)
41.6
(56.40)
32.0
(43.39)
SAE Grade 4
28.3
(38.37)
34.0
(46.10)
37.7
(51.11)
41.5
(56.27)
52.8
(71.59)
49.1
(66.57)
37.7
(51.11)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
37.1
(50.30)
44.5
(60.33)
49.5
(67.11)
54.4
(73.76)
69.3
(93.96)
64.3
(87.18)
49.5
(67.11)
SAE Grade 7
45.9
(62.23)
55.1
(74.70)
61.3
(83.11)
67.4
(91.38)
85.8
(116.33)
79.6
(107.92)
61.3
(83.11)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354 Grade
BD
52.5
(71.18)
63.0
(85.41)
70.0
(94.90)
77.0
(104.40)
98.0
(132.87)
91.0
(123.38)
70.0
(94.90)
ASTM A354 Grade
BC
45.7
(61.96)
54.9
(74.43)
61.0
(82.70)
67.1
(90.97)
85.4
(115.79)
79.3
(107.52)
61.0
(82.70)
49
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
MSSM0101CE/9906AV (7 of 19)
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade
bolt size Designation and
Standard
Zinc or
Cadmium
Plated
If instructions call for :
Loctite
222 or
262
Loctite
242
Loctite
271
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
7/16 - 20 SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
16.0
(21.70)
19.2
(26.03)
21.3
(28.88)
23.5
(31.86)
29.9
(40.54)
27.7
(37.56)
21.3
(28.88)
SAE Grade 2
26.9
(36.48)
32.2
(43.66)
35.8
(48.54)
39.4
(53.42)
50.1
(67.93)
46.6
(63.18)
35.8
(48.54)
SAE Grade 4
31.6
(42.84)
37.9
(51.39)
42.1
(57.08)
46.3
(62.77)
59.0
(79.99)
54.7
(74.16)
42.1
(57.08)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
41.4
(56.13)
49.7
(67.38)
55.2
(74.84)
60.8
(82.43)
77.3
(104.80)
71.8
(97.35)
55.2
(74.84)
SAE Grade 7
51.3
(69.55)
61.5
(83.38)
68.4
(92.74)
75.2
(101.96)
95.7
(129.75)
88.9
(120.53)
68.4
(92.74)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354
Grade BD
58.2
(78.90)
69.9
(94.77)
77.7
(105.35)
85.4
(115.78)
108.7
(147.37)
101.0
(136.94)
77.7
(105.35)
ASTM A354
Grade BC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade
bolt size Designation and
Standard
1/2 - 13
Zinc or
Cadmium
Plated
If instructions call for :
Loctite
222
or262
Loctite
242
Loctite
271
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
22.0
(29.83)
26.0
(35.25)
29.38
(39.83)
32.0
(43.39)
41.0
(55.59)
38.0
(51.52)
29.0
(39.32)
SAE Grade 2
36.6
(49.62)
43.9
(59.52)
48.8
(66.16)
53.6
(72.67)
68.3
(92.60)
63.4
(85.96)
48.8
(66.16)
SAE Grade 4
43.1
(58.44)
51.8
(70.23)
57.5
(77.96)
63.3
(85.82)
80.5
(109.14)
74.8
(101.42)
57.5
(77.96)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
56.7
(76.87)
68.1
(92.33)
75.6
(102.5)
83.2
(112.80)
105.9
(143.58)
98.3
(133.27)
75.6
(102.50)
SAE Grade 7
69.8
(94.64)
83.8
(113.62)
93.1
(126.23)
102.4
(138.84)
130.4
(176.80)
121.1
(164.19)
93.1
(126.23)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354
Grade BD
79.7
(108.05)
95.6
(129.62)
106.3
(144.12)
116.9
(158.50)
148.8
(201.75)
138.1
(187.24)
106.3
(144.12)
ASTM A354
Grade BC
69.8
(94.64)
83.8
(113.62)
93.1
(126.23)
102.4
(138.84)
130.4
(176.80)
121.1
(164.19)
93.1
(126.23)
50
MSSM0101CE/9906AV (8 of 19)
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Standard and
Zinc or
bolt size Grade Designation Cadmium
Plated
1/2 - 20
If instructions call for :
Loctite
222 or
262
Loctite
242
Loctite
271
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
24.8
(33.62)
29.8
(40.40)
33.1
(44.88)
36.4
(49.35)
46.4
(62.91)
43.1
(58.44)
33.1
(44.88)
SAE Grade 2
41.3
(56.00)
49.5
(67.11)
55.0
(74.57)
60.5
(82.02)
77.0
(104.40)
71.5
(96.94)
55.0
(74.57)
SAE Grade 4
48.8
(66.16)
58.5
(79.32)
65.0
(88.13)
71.5
(96.94)
91.0
(123.38)
84.5
(114.57)
65.0
(88.13)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
63.8
(86.50)
76.5
(103.72)
85.0
(115.24)
93.5
(126.77)
119.0
(161.34)
110.5
(149.82)
85.0
(115.24)
SAE Grade 7
78.8
(106.84)
94.5
(128.12)
105.0
(142.36)
115.5
(156.60)
147.0
(199.30)
136.5
(185.07)
105.0
(142.36)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354 Grade
BD
90.0
(122.02)
108.0
(146.43)
120.0
(162.70)
132.0
(179.00)
168.0
(277.78)
156.0
(211.51)
120.0
(162.70)
ASTM A354 Grade
BC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade Designation Zinc or
bolt size and Standard
Cadmium
Plated
If instructions call for :
Loctite
222
or 262
Loctite
242
Loctite
271
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
9/16 - 12 SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
32.0
(43.39)
38.0
(51.52)
42.19
(57.20)
46.0
(62.37)
59.0
(80.00)
55.0
(74.57)
42
(56.94)
SAE Grade 2
52.7
(71.45)
63.3
(85.82)
70.3
(95.31)
77.3
(104.80)
98.4
(133.41)
91.4
(123.92)
70.3
(95.31)
SAE Grade 4
62.2
(84.33)
74.7
(101.28)
83.0
(112.53)
91.3
(123.79)
116.2
(157.55)
107.9
(146.30)
83.0
(112.53)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
81.7
(110.77)
98.1
(133.00)
109.0
(147.78)
119.9
(162.56)
152.6
(206.90)
141.7
(192.17)
109.0
(147.78)
SAE Grade 7
100.7
(136.53)
120.9
(163.92)
134.3
(182.09)
147.7
(200.25)
188.0
(254.89)
174.6
(236.73)
134.3
(182.09)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354 Grade
BD
115.0
(155.92)
138.0
(187.10)
153.3
(207.85)
168.6
(228.59)
214.6
(290.96)
199.3
(270.21)
153.3
(207.85)
ASTM A354 Grade
BC
100.7
(136.53)
120.9
(163.92)
134.3
(182.09)
147.7
(200.25)
188.0
(254.89)
174.6
(236.73)
134.3
(182.09)
51
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
MSSM0101CE/9906AV (9 of 19)
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade Designation
bolt size and Standard
Zinc or If instructions call for:
Cadmium
Loctite
Loctite
Loctite
Plated
222 or
242
271
262
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
9/16 - 18 SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
35.3
(47.86)
42.4
(57.49)
47.1
(63.86)
51.8
(70.23)
66.0
(89.48)
61.2
(82.98)
47.1
(63.86)
SAE Grade 2
59.1
(80.13)
70.9
(96.13)
78.8
(106.84)
86.6
(117.41)
110.3
(149.55)
102.4
(138.84)
78.8
(106.84)
SAE Grade 4
69.6
(94.36)
83.5
(113.21)
92.8
(125.82)
102.1
(138.43)
129.9
(176.12)
120.7
(163.65)
92.8
(125.85)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
91.2
(123.65)
109.5
(148.46)
121.6
(164.87)
133.8
(181.40)
170.3
(230.90)
158.1
(214.36)
121.6
(164.87)
SAE Grade 7
112.3
(152.26)
134.8
(182.76)
149.8
(203.10)
164.7
(223.30)
209.7
(284.32)
194.7
(263.98)
149.8
(203.10)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354 Grade
BD
128.7
(174.61)
154.4
(209.34)
171.6
(232.66)
188.7
(255.84)
240.2
(325.67)
223.0
(302.35)
171.6
(232.66)
ASTM A354 Grade
BC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade Designation
bolt size and Standard
5/8 - 11
Zinc or If instructions call for:
Cadmium
Loctite
Loctite
Loctite
Plated
222 or
242
271
262
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
44
(59.66)
52
(70.50)
58.2
(78.90)
64
(86.77)
81
(109.82)
76
(103.04)
58
(78.64)
SAE Grade 2
72.7
(98.57)
87.2
(118.23)
96.9
(131.38)
106.6
(144.53)
135.6
(183.85)
125.9
(170.70)
96.9
(131.38)
SAE Grade 4
86.1
(116.74)
103.4
(140.19)
114.8
(155.65)
126.3
(171.24)
160.8
(218.02)
149.3
(202.42)
114.8
(155.65)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
112.5
(152.53)
135.0
(183.04)
150.0
(203.37)
165.0
(223.71)
210.0
(284.72)
195.0
(264.38)
150.0
(203.37)
SAE Grade 7
138.9
(188.32)
166.6
(225.88)
185.2
(251.10)
203.7
(276.18)
259.2
(351.43)
240.7
(326.35)
185.2
(251.10)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354 Grade
BD
158.8
(215.30)
190.5
(258.28)
211.7
(287.03)
232.9
(315.77)
296.4
(401.86)
275.2
(373.12)
211.7
(287.03)
ASTM A354 Grade
BC
139.2
(188.73)
167.0
(226.42)
185.5
(251.50)
204.1
(276.72)
259.8
(352.24)
241.2
(327.02)
185.5
(251.50)
52
MSSM0101CE/9906AV (10 of 19)
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade Designation
bolt size and Standard
5/8 - 18
Zinc or If instructions call for:
Cadmium
Loctite
Loctite
Loctite
Plated
222 or
242
271
262
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
49.5
(67.11)
59.4
(80.54)
66.0
(89.48)
72.6
(98.43)
92.4
(125.27)
85.8
(116.33)
66.0
(89.48)
SAE Grade 2
82.6
(112.00)
99.1
(134.36)
110.2
(149.41)
121.2
(164.33)
154.2
(209.07)
143.2
(194.15)
110.2
(149.41)
SAE Grade 4
97.3
(131.92)
116.7
(158.22)
129.7
(175.85)
142.7
(193.48)
181.6
(246.22)
168.6
(228.59)
129.7
(175.85)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
127.7
(173.14)
153.3
(207.85)
170.3
(230.90)
187.3
(253.95)
238.4
(323.23)
221.4
(300.18)
170.3
(230.90)
SAE Grade 7
157.6
(213.68)
189.1
(256.39)
210.2
(285.00)
231.2
(313.47)
294.2
(398.88)
273.2
(370.41)
210.2
(285.00)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354 Grade
BD
179.9
(243.91)
215.9
(292.72)
239.8
(325.13)
263.8
(357.66)
335.8
(455.28)
311.8
(422.74)
239.8
(325.13)
ASTM A354 Grade
BC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade Designation
bolt size and Standard
3/4 - 10
Zinc or If instructions call for:
Cadmium
Loctite
Loctite
Loctite
Plated
222 or
242
271
262
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
77
(104.40)
93
(126.09)
103.1
(139.78)
113
(153.20)
144
(195.24)
134
(181.68)
103
(139.65)
SAE Grade 2
129.4
(175.44)
155.3
(210.55)
172.5
(233.88)
189.8
(257.33)
241.5
(327.43)
224.3
(304.11)
172.5
(233.88)
SAE Grade 4
152.6
(206.90)
183.1
(248.25)
203.4
(275.77)
223.8
(303.43)
284.8
(386.14)
264.5
(358.61)
203.4
(275.77)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
199.7
(270.76)
239.6
(324.85)
266.3
(361.05)
292.9
(397.12)
372.8
(505.45)
346.1
(469.25)
266.3
(361.05)
SAE Grade 7
246.8
(334.62)
296.2
(401.60)
329.1
(446.20)
362.0
(355.22)
460.7
(624.63)
427.8
(580.02)
329.1
(446.20)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354 Grade
BD
282.0
(382.34)
338.3
(458.67)
375.9
(509.65)
413.5
(560.63)
526.3
(713.57)
488.7
(662.59)
375.9
(509.65)
ASTM A354 Grade
BC
246.4
(334.07)
295.7
(400.92)
328.6
(445.53)
361.5
(490.13)
460.0
(623.67)
427.2
(579.20)
328.6
(445.53)
53
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
MSSM0101CE/9906AV (11 of 19)
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade Designation
bolt size and Standard
3/4 - 16
Zinc or If instructions call for:
Cadmium
Loctite
Loctite
Loctite
Plated
222 or
242
271
262
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
86.5
(117.28)
103.8
(140.73)
115.3
(156.33)
126.8
(171.92)
161.4
(218.83)
149.9
(203.24)
115.3
(156.33)
SAE Grade 2
144.1
(195.37)
173.0
(234.56)
192.2
(260.59)
211.4
(286.62)
269.1
(364.85)
249.8
(338.68)
192.2
(260.59)
SAE Grade 4
170.2
(230.76)
204.2
(276.86)
226.9
(307.64)
249.6
(338.41)
317.6
(430.61)
294.9
(399.15)
226.9
(307.64)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
222.9
(302.21)
267.5
(362.68)
297.2
(402.95)
326.9
(443.22)
416.1
(564.16)
386.3
(523.75)
297.2
(402.95)
SAE Grade 7
275.6
(373.66)
330.8
(448.50)
367.5
(498.26)
404.3
(548.16)
514.5
(697.57)
477.8
(647.81)
367.5
(498.26)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354 Grade
BD
315.0
(427.08)
378.0
(512.50)
420.0
(569.44)
462.0
(626.39)
588.0
(797.22)
546.0
(740.28)
420.0
(569.44)
ASTM A354 Grade
BC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade Designation
bolt size and Standard
7/8 - 9
Zinc or If instructions call for:
Cadmium
Loctite
Loctite
Loctite
Plated
222 or
242
271
262
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
124.7
(169.07)
149.6
(202.83)
166.3
(225.47)
182.9
(247.98)
232.8
(315.63)
216.1
(293.0)
166.3
(225.47)
SAE Grade 2
124.7
(169.07)
149.6
(202.83)
166.3
(225.47)
182.9
(247.98)
232.8
(315.63)
216.1
(293.00)
166.3
(255.47)
SAE Grade 4
246.1
(333.67)
295.3
(400.37)
328.1
(444.84)
360.9
(489.32)
459.4
(622.86)
426.6
(578.40)
328.1
(444.84)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
322.4
(437.11)
386.9
(524.57)
429.8
(582.73)
472.8
(641.03)
601.8
(815.93)
558.8
(757.63)
429.8
(582.73)
SAE Grade 7
397.9
(539.48)
477.4
(647.27)
530.5
(719.26)
583.5
742.7
689.6
(791.12) (1007.00) (935.00)
530.5
(719.26)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354 Grade
BD
454.5
(616.22)
545.3
(739.33)
605.9
(821.49)
666.5
848.3
787.7
605.9
(903.65) (1150.14) (1067.98) (821.49)
ASTM A354 Grade
BC
397.9
(539.48)
477.4
(647.27)
530.5
(719.26)
583.5
742.7
689.6
(791.12) (1007.00) (935.00)
54
530.5
(719.26)
MSSM0101CE/9906AV (12 of 19)
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade Designation
bolt size and Standard
7/8 - 14
Zinc or If instructions call for:
Cadmium
Loctite
Loctite
Loctite
Plated
222 or
242
271
262
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
137.8
(186.83)
165.4
(224.25)
183.8
(249.20)
202.1
(274.01)
257.3
(348.85)
238.9
(323.90)
183.8
(249.20)
SAE Grade 2
137.8
(186.83)
165.4
(224.25)
183.8
(249.20)
202.1
(274.01)
257.3
(348.85)
238.9
(323.90)
183.8
(249.20)
SAE Grade 4
271.5
(368.11)
325.8
(441.73)
362.0
(490.80)
398.2
(539.89)
506.8
(687.13)
470.6
(638.05)
362.0
(490.80)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
355.2
(481.59)
426.2
(577.85)
473.6
(642.12)
521.0
(706.38)
663.0
(898.91)
615.7
(834.78)
473.6
(642.12)
SAE Grade 7
438.0
(593.85)
525.7
(712.75)
584.1
(791.93)
642.5
817.7
759.3
584.1
(871.11) (1108.65) (1029.47) (791.93)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354 Grade
BD
501.2
(679.54)
601.5
(815.53)
668.3
(906.09)
735.1
935.6
868.8
668.3
(996.66) (1268.50) (1177.94) (906.09)
ASTM A354 Grade
BC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade Designation
bolt size and Standard
1-8
Zinc or If instructions call for:
Cadmium
Loctite
Loctite
Loctite
Plated
222 or
242
271
262
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
187.5
(254.22)
225.0
(305.06)
250.0
(338.95)
275.0
(372.85)
350.0
(474.54)
325.0
(440.64)
250.0
(338.95)
SAE Grade 2
187.5
(254.22)
225.0
(305.06)
250.0
(338.95)
275.0
(372.85)
350.0
(474.54)
325.0
(440.64)
250.0
(338.95)
SAE Grade 4
369.4
(500.84)
443.3
(601.03)
492.5
(667.74)
541.8
(734.58)
689.5
(934.84)
640.3
(868.13)
492.5
(667.74)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
482.8
(654.59)
579.4
(785.56)
643.8
(872.88)
708.1
901.3
836.9
643.8
(960.05) (1222.00) (1134.69) (872.88)
SAE Grade 7
596.3
(808.47)
715.5
795.0
874.5
1113.0
1033.5
795.0
(970.09) (1077.88) (1185.66) (1509.03) (1401.24) (1077.88)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354 Grade
BD
681.6
817.9
908.8
999.6
1272.3
1181.4
908.8
(924.13) (1108.92) (1232.17) (1355.28) (1725.00) (1601.77) (1232.17)
ASTM A354 Grade
BC
596.7
(809.01)
716.1
795.6
875.2
1113.9
1034.3
795.6
(970.90) (1078.69) (1186.61) (1510.25) (1402.32) (1078.69)
55
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
MSSM0101CE/9906AV (13 of 19)
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade
bolt size Designation and
Standard
1 - 12
Zinc or
Cadmium
Plated
If instructions call for :
Loctite
222 or
262
Loctite
242
Loctite
271
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
205.3
278.35
246.4
(334.07)
273.8
(371.22)
301.1
(408.24)
383.3
(519.69)
355.9
(482.54)
273.8
(371.22)
SAE Grade 2
205.3
(278.35)
246.4
(334.07)
273.8
(371.22)
301.1
(408.24)
383.3
(519.69)
355.9
(482.54)
273.8
(371.22)
SAE Grade 4
404.1
(547.88)
484.9
(657.44)
538.8
(730.52)
592.6
754.3
700.4
(803.46) (1022.70) (949.62)
538.8
(730.52)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
528.8
(716.96)
634.5
(860.27)
705.0
775.5
987.0
916.5
705.0
(955.85) (1051.44) (1338.19) (1242.61) (955.85)
SAE Grade 7
652.5
(884.67)
783.0
870.0
957.0
1218.0
1131.0
870.0
(1061.60) (1179.56) (1297.52) (1651.39) (1533.42) (1179.56)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354
Grade BD
746.3
(1011.85)
895.5
995.0
1094.5
1393.0
1293.5
995.0
(1214.14) (1349.04) (1483.49) (1888.66) (1753.73) (1349.04)
ASTM A354
Grade BC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade
bolt size Designation and
Standard
1 - 14
Zinc or
Cadmium
Plated
If instructions call for :
Loctite
222 or
262
Loctite
242
Loctite
271
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
210.0
(284.72)
252.0
(341.66)
280.0
(379.63)
308.0
(417.60)
392.0
(531.48)
364.0
(493.52)
280.0
(379.63)
SAE Grade 2
210.0
(284.72)
252.0
(341.66)
280.0
(379.63)
308.0
(417.60)
392.0
(531.48)
364.0
(493.52)
280.0
(379.63)
SAE Grade 4
413.4
(560.50)
496.1
(672.62)
551.3
(747.46)
606.4
771.8
716.6
(822.17) (1046.42) (971.58)
551.3
(747.46)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
540.9
(733.36)
649.1
(880.06)
721.3
793.4
1009.8
937.6
721.3
(977.95) (1075.70) (1369.10) (1271.22) (977.95)
SAE Grade 7
668.4
(906.23)
802.1
891.3
980.4
1247.8
1158.6
891.3
(1087.50) (1208.44) (1329.25) (1691.79) (1570.85) (1208.44)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354
Grade BD
764.1
(1035.98)
916.9
1018.8
1120.6
1426.3
1324.4
1018.8
(1243.15) (1381.31) (1519.33) (1933.80) (1795.65) (1381.30)
ASTM A354
Grade BC
—
—
—
56
—
—
—
—
MSSM0101CE/9906AV (14 of 19)
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade Designation
bolt size and Standard
Zinc or If instructions call for :
Cadmium
Loctite
Loctite
Loctite
Plated
222 or
242
271
262
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
1-1/8 • 7 SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
265.8
(360.37)
318.9
(432.37)
354.4
(480.50)
389.8
(528.50)
496.1
(672.62)
460.7
(624.63)
354.4
(480.50)
SAE Grade 2
265.8
(360.37)
318.9
(432.37)
354.4
(480.50)
389.8
(528.50)
496.1
(672.62)
460.7
(624.63)
354.4
(480.50)
SAE Grade 4
523.1
(709.23)
627.8
(851.18)
697.5
767.3
976.5
906.8
697.5
(945.68) (1040.32) (1323.96) (1229.46) (945.68)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
595.9
(807.93)
715.1
794.5
874.0
1112.3
1032.9
794.5
(969.55) (1077.20) (1184.99) (1508.07) (1400.43) (1077.20)
SAE Grade 7
844.8
1013.8
1126.4
1239.0
1577.0
1464.3
1126.4
(1145.40) (1374.53) (1527.20) (1679.86) (2138.13) (1985.33) (1527.20)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354 Grade
BD
966.1
1159.3
1288.1
1416.9
1803.4
1674.6
1288.1
(1309.86) (1571.80) (1746.43) (1921.06) (2445.08) (2270.46) (1746.43)
ASTM A354 Grade
BC
844.8
1013.8
1126.4
1239.0
1577.0
1464.3
1126.4
(1145.40) (1374.53) (1527.20) (1679.86) (2138.13) (1985.33) (1527.20)
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade Designation
bolt size and Standard
Zinc or If instructions call for :
Cadmium
Loctite
Loctite
Loctite
Plated
222 or
242
271
262
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
1-1/8 • 12 SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
297.4
(403.22)
356.9
(483.89)
396.6
(537.72)
436.2
(591.40)
555.2
(752.75)
515.5
(698.93)
396.6
(537.72)
SAE Grade 2
297.4
(403.22)
356.9
(483.89)
396.6
(537.72)
436.2
(591.40)
555.2
(752.75)
515.5
(698.93)
396.6
(537.72)
SAE Grade 4
586.4
(795.05)
703.7
781.9
860.1
1094.6
1016.4
781.9
(954.09) (1060.12) (1166.14) (1484.08) (1378.06) (1060.12)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
667.6
801.1
890.2
979.2
1246.2
1157.2
890.2
(905.14) (1086.15) (1206.95) (1327.62) (1689.62) (1568.95) (1206.95)
SAE Grade 7
948.2
1137.8
1264.2
1390.6
1769.9
1643.5
1264.2
(1285.58) (1542.65) (1714.02) (1855.40) (2399.66) (2228.30) (1714.02)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354 Grade
BD
1083.2
1299.8
1444.2
1588.6
2021.9
1877.5
1444.2
(1468.62) (1762.30) (1958.07) (2153.85) (2741.33) (2545.55) (1958.07)
ASTM A354 Grade
BC
—
—
—
57
—
—
—
—
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
MSSM0101CE/9906AV (15 of 19)
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade
Zinc or
bolt size Designation and Cadmium
Standard
Plated
1-1/4 • 7
If instructions call for :
Loctite
222 or
262
Loctite
242
Loctite
271
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
375.0
(508.43)
450.0
(610.11)
500.0
(677.91)
550.0
(745.70)
700.0
(949.07)
650.0
(881.28)
500.0
(677.91)
SAE Grade 2
375.0
(508.43)
450.0
(610.11)
500.0
(677.91)
550.0
(745.70)
700.0
(949.07)
650.0
(881.28)
500.0
(677.91)
SAE Grade 4
738.3
(1001.00)
885.9
984.4
1082.8
1378.1
1279.7
984.4
(1201.12) (1334.67) (1468.08) (1868.45) (1735.04) (1334.67)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
840.2
(1139.16)
1008.3
1120.3
1232.3
1568.4
1456.4
1120.3
(1367.07) (1518.93) (1670.78) (2126.47) (1974.62) (1518.93)
SAE Grade 7
1191.8
(1615.87)
1430.2
1589.1
1748.0
2224.7
2065.8
1589.1
(1939.09) (2154.53) (2369.97) (3016.30) (2800.85) (2154.53)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354
Grade BD
1362.9
(1847.85)
1635.5
1817.2
1998.9
2544.1
2362.3
1817.2
(2217.44) (2463.80) (2710.15) (3449.34) (3202.85) (2463.80)
ASTM A354
Grade BC
1192.4
(1616.68)
1430.9
1589.8
1748.8
2225.8
2066.8
1589.8
(1940.04) (2155.48) (2371.05) (3017.78) (2802.20) (2155.48)
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade
Zinc or
bolt size Designation and Cadmium
Standard
Plated
If instructions call for :
Loctite
222 or
262
Loctite
242
Loctite
271
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
1-1/4 • 12 SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
414.8
(562.40)
497.8
(674.93)
553.1
(749.90)
608.4
774.4
719.1
(824.88) (1049.95) (974.97)
553.1
(749.90)
SAE Grade 2
414.8
(562.40)
497.8
(674.93)
553.1
(749.90)
608.4
774.4
719.1
(824.88) (1049.95) (974.97)
553.1
(749.90)
SAE Grade 4
816.8
(1107.43)
980.2
1089.1
1198.0
1524.7
1415.8
1089.1
(1328.97) (1476.62) (1624.27) (2067.22) (1919.57) (1476.62)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
930.5
(1261.60)
1116.6
1240.6
1364.7
1736.9
1612.8
1240.6
(1513.90) (1682.03) (1850.29) (2354.92) (2186.66) (1682.03)
SAE Grade 7
1320.7
(1790.63)
1584.8
1760.9
1937.0
2465.3
2289.2
1760.9
(2148.70) (2387.46) (2626.22) (3342.50) (3103.74) (2387.46)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354
Grade BD
1509.4
(2046.47)
1811.3
2012.5
2213.8
2817.5
2616.3
2012.5
(2455.80) (2728.59) (3001.51) (3820.02) (3547.23) (2728.58)
ASTM A354
Grade BC
—
—
—
58
—
—
—
—
MSSM0101CE/9906AV (16 of 19)
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade Designation Zinc or
bolt size and Standard
Cadmium
Plated
If instructions call for :
Loctite
222 or
262
Loctite
242
Loctite
271
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
1-3/8 • 6 SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
491.1
(665.84)
589.4
(799.12)
654.8
(887.79)
720.3
916.8
851.3
654.8
(976.60) (1243.00) (1154.21) (887.80)
SAE Grade 2
491.1
(665.84)
589.4
(799.12)
654.8
(887.79)
720.3
916.8
851.3
654.8
(976.60) (1243.00) (1154.21) (887.80)
SAE Grade 4
968.1
(1312.57)
1161.7
1290.8
1419.9
1807.1
1678.0
1290.8
(1575.06) (1750.10) (1925.13) (2450.10) (2275.07) (1750.09)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
1102.1
(1494.25)
1322.6
1469.5
1616.5
2057.3
1910.4
1469.5
(1793.20) (1992.38) (2191.68) (2789.33) (2590.16) (1992.38)
SAE Grade 7
1563.6
(2119.96)
1876.4
2084.8
2293.3
2918.8
2710.3
2084.8
(2544.06) (2826.61) (3109.30) (3957.37) (3674.68) (2826.61)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354 Grade
BD
1786.6
(2422.30)
2144.0
2382.2
2620.4
3335.1
3096.8
2382.2
(2906.88) (3229.83) (3552.79) (4521.80) (4198.70) (3229.83)
ASTM A354 Grade
BC
1563.6
(2119.96)
1876.4
2084.8
2293.3
2918.8
2710.3
2084.8
(2544.06) (2826.61) (3109.30) (3957.37) (3674.68) (2826.61)
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade
bolt size Designation and
Standard
Zinc or
Cadmium
Plated
If instructions call for :
Loctite
222 or
262
Loctite
242
Loctite
271
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
1-3/8 • 12 SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
559.5
(758.58)
671.3
745.9
820.5
1044.3
969.7
745.9
(910.16) (1011.30) (1112.45) (1415.88) (1314.74) (1011.30)
SAE Grade 2
559.5
(758.58)
671.3
745.9
820.5
1044.3
969.7
745.9
(910.16) (1011.30) (1112.45) (1415.88) (1314.74) (1011.30)
SAE Grade 4
1102.1
(1494.25)
1322.6
1469.5
1616.5
2057.3
1910.4
1469.5
(1793.21) (1992.38) (2191.68) (2789.33) (2590.16) (1992.38)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
1254.3
(1700.60)
1505.1
1672.3
1839.6
2341.3
2174.0
1672.3
(2040.64) (2267.34) (2494.16) (3174.38) (2947.55) (2267.34)
SAE Grade 7
1780.2
(2413.63)
2136.2
2373.6
2611.0
3323.0
3085.7
2373.6
(2896.30) (3218.17) (3540.04) (4505.39) (4183.65) (3218.17)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354
Grade BD
2034.1
(2757.87)
2441.0
2712.2
2983.4
3797.1
3525.8
2712.2
(3309.56) (3677.25) (4044.95) (5148.18) (4780.35) (3677.25)
ASTM A354
Grade BC
—
—
—
59
—
—
—
—
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
MSSM0101CE/9906AV (17 of 19)
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade
bolt size Designation and
Standard
Zinc or
Cadmium
Plated
If instructions call for :
Loctite
222 or
262
Loctite
242
Loctite
271
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
1-1/2 • 6 SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
652.5
(884.67)
783.0
870.0
957.0
1218.0
1131.0
870.0
(1061.60) (1179.56) (1297.52) (1651.39) (1533.43) (1179.56)
SAE Grade 2
652.5
(884.67)
783.0
870.0
957.0
1218.0
1131.0
870.0
(1061.60) (1179.56) (1297.52) (1651.39) (1533.43) (1179.56)
SAE Grade 4
1283.9
(1740.74)
1540.7
1711.9
1883.1
2396.6
2225.4
1711.9
(2088.91) (2321.03) (2553.14) (3249.36) (3017.24) (2321.03)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
1462.5
(1982.88)
1755.0
1950.0
2145.0
2730.0
2535.0
1950.0
(2379.46) (2643.85) (2908.23) (3701.39) (3437.00) (2643.85)
SAE Grade 7
2074.2
(2812.24)
2489.1
2765.6
3042.2
3871.9
3595.3
2765.6
(3374.77) (3749.66) (4124.67) (5249.60) (4874.58) (3749.66)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354
Grade BD
2370.9
(3214.51)
2845.1
3161.3
3477.4
4425.8
4109.6
3161.3
(3857.44) (4286.15) (4714.73) (6000.58) (5571.88) (4286.15)
ASTM A354
Grade BC
2074.9
(2813.20)
2489.9
2766.6
3043.2
3873.2
3596.5
2766.6
(3375.85) (3751.01) (4126.03) (5251.36) (4876.20) (3751.01)
ÏAll values in foot pounds and (Newton meters)
Nominal Grade
bolt size Designation and
Standard
Zinc or
If instructions call for :
Cadmium
Loctite
Loctite
Loctite
Plated
222 or
242
271
262
Loctite
272
Loctite
277
Bare
1-1/2 • 12 SAE Grade 1
ASTM A307
734.1
(995.30)
880.9
978.8
1076.6
1370.3
1272.4
978.8
(1194.34) (1327.07) (1459.67) (1857.88) (1725.14) (1327.07)
SAE Grade 2
734.1
(995.30)
880.9
978.8
1076.6
1370.3
1272.4
978.8
(1194.34) (1327.07) (1459.67) (1857.88) (1725.14) (1327.07)
SAE Grade 4
1445.6
1734.8
1927.5
2120.3
2698.5
2505.8
1927.5
(1959.97) (2352.07) (2613.34) (2874.33) (3658.68) (3397.41) (2613.34)
SAE Grade 5
ASTM A449
1645.3
1974.4
2193.8
2413.1
3071.3
2851.9
2193.8
(2230.73) (2676.93) (2974.40) (3271.73) (4164.13) (3866.66) (2974.40)
SAE Grade 7
2334.4
2801.3
3112.5
3423.8
4357.5
4046.3
3112.5
(3165.02) (3798.06) (4219.99) (4642.05) (5907.98) (5486.05) (4219.99)
SAE Grade 8
ASTM A354
Grade BD
2667.7
3201.2
3556.9
3912.6
4979.6
4623.9
3556.9
(3616.92) (4340.25) (4822.51) (5304.78) (6751.44) (6269.17) (4822.51)
ASTM A354
Grade BC
—
—
—
60
—
—
—
—
MSSM0101CE/9906AV (18 of 19)
ÏOther Fastener Torque Specifications
ÏAll values in foot-pounds and (Newton-meters)
Nominal bolt size
18 - 8
Stainless Steel
316
Stainless Steel
Brass
Aluminum
2024 - T4
1/4 - 20
6.3 (8.54)
6.6 (8.95)
5.1 (6.91)
3.8 (5.15)
1/4 - 28
7.8 (10.57)
8.3 (11.25)
6.4 (8.67)
4.8 (6.50)
5/16 - 18
11.0 (14.90)
11.5 (15.60)
8.9 (12.06)
6.7 (9.08)
5/16 - 24
11.8 (16.00)
12.3 (16.67)
9.7 (13.15)
7.2 (9.76)
3/8 - 16
19.7 (26.71)
20.6 (27.93)
16.0 (21.70)
11.9 (16.13)
3/8 - 24
21.6 (29.28)
22.6 (30.64)
17.7 (24.00)
13.1 (17.76)
7/16 - 14
31.3 (42.44)
32.8 (44.47)
26.4 (35.80)
19.0 (25.76)
7/16 - 20
33.3 (45.15)
34.8 (47.18)
27.3 (37.00)
20.2 (27.38)
1/2 - 13
43.1 (58.43)
45.2 (61.28)
35.2 (47.72)
26.1 (35.38)
1/2 - 20
45.1 (61.14)
47.1 (63.86)
36.9 (50.00)
27.3 (37.00)
9/16 - 12
56.8 (77.00)
59.4 (80.53)
46.5 (63.04)
34.4 (46.64)
9/16 - 18
62.7 (85.00)
65.6 (88.94)
51.3 (69.55)
38.0 (51.52)
5/8 - 11
92.5 (125.41)
96.7 (131.10)
75.6 (102.50)
59.6 (80.80)
5/8 - 18
103.7 (140.60)
108.4 (146.97)
84.7 (114.84)
66.5 (90.16)
3/4 - 10
127.5 (172.86)
131.8 (178.70)
104.1 (141.14)
81.7 (110.77)
3/4 - 16
124.2 (168.39)
129.8 (175.98)
101.7 (137.88)
79.8 (108.19)
61
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
MSSM0101CE/9906AV (19 of 19)
ÏOther Fastener Torque Specifications
ÏAll values in foot-pounds and (Newton-meters)
Nominal bolt size
18 - 8
Stainless Steel
316
Stainless Steel
Brass
Aluminum
2024 - T4
7/8 - 9
194.0 (263.03)
202.5 (274.55)
158.8 (215.30)
124.6 (168.93)
7/8 - 14
193.2 (261.94)
201.7 (273.47)
157.9 (214.08)
124.2 (168.40)
1-8
286.7 (388.71)
299.6 (406.20)
234.6 (318.07)
183.8 (249.20)
1 - 14
259.2 (351.43)
270.8 (367.16)
212.1 (287.57)
166.3 (225.47)
1-1/8 • 7
413.0 (559.95)
432.0 (585.71)
337.0 (456.91)
265.0 (359.29)
1-1/8 • 12
390.0 (528.77)
408.0 (553.17)
318.0 (431.15)
251.0 (340.31)
1-1/4 • 7
523.0 (709.09)
546.0 (740.28)
428.0 (580.30)
336.0 (455.55)
1-1/4 • 12
480.0 (650.80)
504.0 (683.33)
394.0 (534.19)
308.0 (417.60)
1-1/2 • 6
888.0 (1203.97)
930.0 (1260.91)
727.0 (985.68)
570.0 (772.82)
1-1/2 • 12
703.0 (953.14)
732.0 (992.46)
575.0 (779.60)
450.0 (610.12)
62
Section
Shell and Door Assemblies
63
2
MSSMA413AE/8530BV
Location A—Seals must
contact each other and
shell front.
È OOR SEAL REPLACEMENT ON
D
RAPID LOAD MODELS
Door Seal Replacement
Ê
The seal components referred to herein are contained in kits K28 0005R (for 60" machines) or K36 0003R (for
72" machines).
1. Remove old seal from the door cavity and carefully pull air tubing out of inner door so as not to cut tubing.
2. Remove as much as possible of the old adhesive from the rubber filler strip inside door cavity.
Location B—Seals must
contact each other and
shell front.
3. Carefully remove old seal from the air tubing fittings and attach new seal.
4. Carefully stretch new seal around door and into cavity. Because the new seal is fabric reinforced it is slightly
narrower than the old style rubber seal; the wall is thinner and it does not stretch as easily. It will therefore
feel much tighter than the all rubber seal when stretching it over the edge of the door.
5. After new seal is fitted and aligned into the door cavity, close both doors and inflate. Check to see that seals
contact each other along the seam between the doors and that the seal contacts the shell front all around. To
check this, attempt to slide a piece of paper between these surfaces.
6. If the seal does not contact the shell at locations A or D (see FIGURE 1), open the doors and stretch the seal
toward these points.
7. If seals do not contact each other or the shell front in other areas, install rubber shims (part number 02
175267) between seal and filler strip as required to bring the seal further out from the door. Use adhesive
(part number 20C015A) to attach shims to filler strip.
Location C—Seals must
not drag against shell
when door opens.
Location D—Seal must
contact shell front.
ÎFIGURE 1 (MSSMA413AE)
ÎDoor Seal Checks
Ê
Door Seal—Preventive Maintenance
Ê
Check Door Alignment About the Shell Opening—Each door must be centered in its respective
Ë
shell front opening. If the doors are not centered, the inflatable door seals will drag on the sealing edge of the shell
front as the doors are opened and closed. The doors can be moved in any direction for centering by loosening the
1/2" hex cap nuts which hold the door assembly to the hinge cross brace as shown below.
8. If seals do not contact each other at locations A and B, (see FIGURE 1), then at these points, glue tapered
patches (part number 02 175134), as required, to the outside of seal (using adhesive 20C080C) to add thickness.
9. After seal has been completely fitted, roll seal up on one side, and with a small brush, paint adhesive (part
number 20C015A) on filler strip to hold seal in place.
Equal distant around entire
door.
Adjusting 1/2"
Hex Nuts.
ÎFIGURE 2 (MSSMA413AE)
ÎDoor Alignments
64
MSSMA413AE/8530BV
(1 of 2)
Location A—Seals must
contact each other and
shell front.
È OOR SEAL REPLACEMENT ON
D
RAPID LOAD MODELS
Door Seal Replacement
Ê
The seal components referred to herein are contained in kits K28 0005R (for 60" machines) or K36 0003R (for
72" machines).
1. Remove old seal from the door cavity and carefully pull air tubing out of inner door so as not to cut tubing.
2. Remove as much as possible of the old adhesive from the rubber filler strip inside door cavity.
Location B—Seals must
contact each other and
shell front.
3. Carefully remove old seal from the air tubing fittings and attach new seal.
4. Carefully stretch new seal around door and into cavity. Because the new seal is fabric reinforced it is slightly
narrower than the old style rubber seal; the wall is thinner and it does not stretch as easily. It will therefore
feel much tighter than the all rubber seal when stretching it over the edge of the door.
5. After new seal is fitted and aligned into the door cavity, close both doors and inflate. Check to see that seals
contact each other along the seam between the doors and that the seal contacts the shell front all around. To
check this, attempt to slide a piece of paper between these surfaces.
6. If the seal does not contact the shell at locations A or D (see FIGURE 1), open the doors and stretch the seal
toward these points.
7. If seals do not contact each other or the shell front in other areas, install rubber shims (part number 02
175267) between seal and filler strip as required to bring the seal further out from the door. Use adhesive
(part number 20C015A) to attach shims to filler strip.
Location C—Seals must
not drag against shell
when door opens.
Location D—Seal must
contact shell front.
ÎFIGURE 1 (MSSMA413AE)
ÎDoor Seal Checks
Ê
Door Seal—Preventive Maintenance
Ê
Check Door Alignment About the Shell Opening—Each door must be centered in its respective
Ë
shell front opening. If the doors are not centered, the inflatable door seals will drag on the sealing edge of the shell
front as the doors are opened and closed. The doors can be moved in any direction for centering by loosening the
1/2" hex cap nuts which hold the door assembly to the hinge cross brace as shown below.
8. If seals do not contact each other at locations A and B, (see FIGURE 1), then at these points, glue tapered
patches (part number 02 175134), as required, to the outside of seal (using adhesive 20C080C) to add thickness.
9. After seal has been completely fitted, roll seal up on one side, and with a small brush, paint adhesive (part
number 20C015A) on filler strip to hold seal in place.
Equal distant around entire
door.
Adjusting 1/2"
Hex Nuts.
ÎFIGURE 2 (MSSMA413AE)
ÎDoor Alignments
65
Check Condition of Door Seal Channel—Be certain the sides of the channel in which the door seal
Ë
Check Door Alignment In and Out—Misalignment of the doors in and out of the shell front opening can
Ë
fits are straight and that mainly the inner edge is not bent. See FIGURE 3 below. Because outer edge is double
thickness it is not likely to be bent out of shape. But it is possible for the inner edge to become bent as shown.
be most often attributed to worn striker plates as described above. The doors should be adjusted so that, with one
door open and one door closed, the closed door’s inflatable seal channel will be centered on the shell front sealing
surface when viewed edgewise (see FIGURE 5). If the door latch mechanism is loose, worn, or mismounted the
door can travel too far into the machine, with the result that the inflatable seal can protrude past the door channel
and the shell front sealing surface and be scissored when the door is reopened.
Double
Thickness
Normal Deflated
Bent Retaining
Channel
Normal Inflated
Abnormal Inflated Condition
ÎFIGURE 3 (MSSMA413AE)
ÎDoor Alignment
Replace Worn Striker PLates—Each of the outer doors are securely held in the closed position by air
Ë
latches. These air latches snap into striker plates bolted to the shell front. If the hole in these striker plates becomes
worn, the shell doors will be allowed to move while the machine is in operation. It will look as though the doors are
“breathing.” This will cause rapid wear and premature seal failure. Striker plate components are shown below.
Normal Inflated Condition
WRONG: Door Too Far In
Shell Front
WRONG: Door Too Far Out
Shell Front Opening
ÎFIGURE 5 (MSSMA413AE)
ÎDoor Seals
Check Seal Air Pressure—Air pressure on these inflatable door seals should be set and maintained at 25
Ë
60" + 72" Rapid Load 2-Pocket
72" Rapid Load 2-Pocket Only
to 28 PSI. Too high air pressure will cause blowouts and too low air pressure will cause not enough contact between
seal and shell front, thus movement and rapid wear. Kit K28 0011, which contains a fixed at 25 to 28 PSI regulator,
plus a pressure gauge is available from the Milnor® factory. If yours is inoperative, it should be replaced.
Check Door Bumper—Be sure large rubber bumper (part number 60C075) on right hand door is in place and
Ë
not worn.
Seal Vacuum Pump Feature
Ê
Nylon
Bushing
02 18954
Upper Door Striker Plate
Right 02 18978
Left 02 18953
ÎFIGURE 4 (MSSMA413AE)
ÎWorn Striker Plate
66
Lower Door
Striker Plate
03 06209
Since approximately June of 1980, all production machines have a vacuum pump which delays the opening of
the door by 7.5 seconds and during that time literally sucks the air from the inflatable door seal. This is the single
greatest extender of the life of the inflatable door seal. This feature is retrofitable to all 60" and 72" WE2 machines
manufactured prior to June 1980. Order retrofit kit, part number K28 0013.
Check Condition of Door Seal Channel—Be certain the sides of the channel in which the door seal
Ë
Check Door Alignment In and Out—Misalignment of the doors in and out of the shell front opening can
Ë
fits are straight and that mainly the inner edge is not bent. See FIGURE 3 below. Because outer edge is double
thickness it is not likely to be bent out of shape. But it is possible for the inner edge to become bent as shown.
be most often attributed to worn striker plates as described above. The doors should be adjusted so that, with one
door open and one door closed, the closed door’s inflatable seal channel will be centered on the shell front sealing
surface when viewed edgewise (see FIGURE 5). If the door latch mechanism is loose, worn, or mismounted the
door can travel too far into the machine, with the result that the inflatable seal can protrude past the door channel
and the shell front sealing surface and be scissored when the door is reopened.
Double
Thickness
Normal Deflated
Bent Retaining
Channel
Normal Inflated
Abnormal Inflated Condition
ÎFIGURE 3 (MSSMA413AE)
ÎDoor Alignment
Replace Worn Striker PLates—Each of the outer doors are securely held in the closed position by air
Ë
latches. These air latches snap into striker plates bolted to the shell front. If the hole in these striker plates becomes
worn, the shell doors will be allowed to move while the machine is in operation. It will look as though the doors are
“breathing.” This will cause rapid wear and premature seal failure. Striker plate components are shown below.
Normal Inflated Condition
WRONG: Door Too Far In
Shell Front
WRONG: Door Too Far Out
Shell Front Opening
ÎFIGURE 5 (MSSMA413AE)
ÎDoor Seals
Check Seal Air Pressure—Air pressure on these inflatable door seals should be set and maintained at 25
Ë
60" + 72" Rapid Load 2-Pocket
72" Rapid Load 2-Pocket Only
to 28 PSI. Too high air pressure will cause blowouts and too low air pressure will cause not enough contact between
seal and shell front, thus movement and rapid wear. Kit K28 0011, which contains a fixed at 25 to 28 PSI regulator,
plus a pressure gauge is available from the Milnor® factory. If yours is inoperative, it should be replaced.
Check Door Bumper—Be sure large rubber bumper (part number 60C075) on right hand door is in place and
Ë
not worn.
Seal Vacuum Pump Feature
Ê
Nylon
Bushing
02 18954
Upper Door Striker Plate
Right 02 18978
Left 02 18953
Lower Door
Striker Plate
03 06209
Since approximately June of 1980, all production machines have a vacuum pump which delays the opening of
the door by 7.5 seconds and during that time literally sucks the air from the inflatable door seal. This is the single
greatest extender of the life of the inflatable door seal. This feature is retrofitable to all 60" and 72" WE2 machines
manufactured prior to June 1980. Order retrofit kit, part number K28 0013.
ÎFIGURE 4 (MSSMA413AE)
ÎWorn Striker Plate
67
68
Door Assembly
BMP790020R/98301V
(Sheet 1 of 1)
7244WE3,SG
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
R
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Litho in U.S.A.
Parts List—Door Assembly
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
.
Item
Used In
Description
Part Number
Comments
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES-----------------------------------------------------------------all
all
A
B
SA 36 019
SA 36 020
930725*SHELL DOOR ASY 72WE3+SG SOIL
93072@*SHELL DOOR ASY 72SG CLEAN
SOIL DOOR
CLEAN DOOR
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS-----------------------------------------------------------------A
B
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
A
B
all
all
all
all
all
A
B
B
A
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
29
30
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SA 36 019
SA 36 020
01 09028
02 18981G
03 06225
15K085
15U255
15G234
15P010
15U280
15P010
15G206
15K112
15U260
53A031XB
53A500
53A059A
53A501
60E004TE
60E005
51V010
53A047H
12P016
W3 06126
W3 06127
02 18181
SA 15 028
02 15633
03 06302
02 175231
SA 36 045
SA 36 046
W3 06303
W3 06304
60A006
X3 06128
03 06127D
03 06127A
15N188D
15G164
ASD36001
03 06137
03 06136
54A975
54A974
X3 06146
54M021
03 06132
15U521
15K214E
15U316
930725*SHELL DOOR ASY 72WE3+SG SOIL
93072@*SHELL DOOR ASY 72SG CLEAN
SPRING-BRAKEPRESSURE
DOOR TUBE-60SGH-PRES.TUBE E
76347 DOOR TUBE 72" SG2
HEXCAPSCR 3/8-16UNC2AX3/4 GR5 ZINC
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM 3/8 ZINCPL
LOKNUT 1/2-13NC CAD FLXLOC#21FKF813
12Z PHILPAN TRDCUTSCRTYP10-24X1/2SS
01Z FL+WASHER(USS STD)1/2 ZNC PL+D
12Z PHILPAN TRDCUTSCRTYP10-24X1/2SS
HEXNUT 3/8-16 UNC2 SS 18-8
HXCAPSCR 3/8-16X1+1/2 SS18-8
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM 3/8 SS18-8
BODY-EL90MALE.25X25 #269C-4-4B
1/4" SLEEVE-DELRIN
NUT 1/4"BR.HOLYOKE AND #61A-4
TUBEINSERT .170"OD
04Z 1/4"OD X.170"ID NYL TUBING *
TUBING 5/16"OD POLY-FLOW#55P-FOOT
TEE PIPE 1/8 BRASS FORGING TYPE
MALCON 5/16X1/8POLY PH#68P-5-2
01Z CABLE CLMP-BLACK UL APPROVED
93072D* SHELLDOOR 72SG2+3 SOILSIDE
93072#* SHELLDOOR 72SG2+3 CLEANSID
78333A FITTING-BRASS FOR INNER TUBE
70239D* DOOR LATCH ASSY-DIVCYLS
ADJPLATE=DOORLATCH
84416A BAR=GASKET CLAMPING
84426A PLATE=SHELL DOOR GASKET
82317J LINER ASSY=DOOR 72WE3+SG,SS
82317J LINER ASSY=DOOR 72SG CLEAN
81414C*WLDMT=PRESSPLT,DR.72SG CLEAN
82162C*WLDMT=PRESPLT 72WE3+SG SOIL
NEO RUB STRIP 1/4X1X10' CLSD CELL
81414C FILL-PLATE=SHELLDOOR 72WE
72284D GASKET=SHELL DOOR 2/72SGD
90486C LINER=SHELDOOR-72SGD-SS
HXCAPSCR 1/4-20UNC2X7/8SS18-8
01Z HX THIN LOCKNUT NYL1/4-20 SS
88043# BEARING & HINGE PIN ASSY 72"
80163B HINGE PIN 72 SG2,SG3,WE2&WE3
81306B WASHER,BRG BACKUP 72SG
01Z CONE TIMKEN #L68149 IND. BOX
CUP TIMKEN #L68111 1/BX+PT#
87311B BEARING ADAPTER 60&72 SG DR.
GRSFIT 1/8PIPE X 1/4STR 1607-B
80113B BUSHING,HINGE PIN 60&72 SG
01Z SPRINGWSHR.630ID 1.250D.051T
HXCAPSCR 5/8-11UNC2AX1.5 GR5 ZNC/CD
05ZFLTWASH 5/8 ZNC DICR
69
SOIL DOOR
CLEAN DOOR
SOIL DOOR
CLEAN DOOR
SOIL DOOR
CLEAN DOOR
CLEAN DOOR
SOIL DOOR
70
Shell Door Assembly
BMP780109R/81433A
(Sheet 1 of 2)
60 & 70 WEH
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
R
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Litho in U.S.A.
Parts List—Shell Door Assembly
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Item
. Used In
Part Number
Description
Comments
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES-----------------------------------------------------------------none
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS-----------------------------------------------------------------all
1
SA 36 010
930721*SHELL DOOR ASY 72WE2 RIGHT
all
2
SA 28 122
930721*SHELL DOOR ASY 60WE2 RIGHT
all
3
60C075
TRUCK BUMPER 2+1/2"OD+3/8"HOLE #613
all
4
15G200
01Z HXCPNUT 3/8-16 UNC2A 5/8X1/2
all
5
15U240
FLATWASHER(USS STD) 3/8" ZNC PLT
all
6
15U255
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM 3/8 ZINCPL
all
7
15K095
HXCPSCR 3/8-16UNC2AX1 GR5 ZINC/CAD
all
8
03 06068
70358C PLATE=DOOR OPENING 1/72WED
(USED ON SA-36-010)
all
8
02 18961
91071C PLATE=DOOR OPENING 60WED
(USED ON SA-28-122)
all
9
02 175134
71143A PATCH=SHELL DOOR GASKET
all
10
02 175131
82231B PLATE-LATCH MOUNT RT 60+72WE
all
11
15K039
HXCAPSCR 1/4-20UNC2AX3/4 GR5 ZNC/CD
all
12
15U180
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM 1/4 ZINCPL
all
13
15U185
FLATWASHER(USS STD) 1/4" ZNC PLT
all
14
15K097
PLOWSCR-#3 3/8-16NCX1 BLK GR5
all
15
W3 06063
93072#* HINGE PLATE WELDMENT-RIGHT
(USED ON SA-36-010)
all
15
W2 18874
93072D* HINGEPLATE WELDMNT-RITE=WED
(USED ON SA-28-122)
all
16
54M015
65408A GREASEFIT 60X36/60X44 1610BL
all
17
W3 06061
89412#* SHELLDOOR WELDMENT-RITE=WED (USED ON SA-36-010)
all
17
W2 18960
93362#* SHELL DOOR-60"WED-RIGHT
all
18
15U490
FLAWASH 1+1/2X17/32X1/4ZINC
all
19
15G228
01Z HXCPNUT 1/2-13 UNC GR-2
all
20
15U300
LOKWASHER REGULAR 1/2 ZINC PLT
all
21
03 06310
89393B PLATE=LATCH MOUNTING LOWER
all
22
15K084S
HXCAPSCR 3/8-16NCX5/8 SS18-8
all
23
15U260
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM 3/8 SS18-8
71
(USED ON SA-28-122)
(USED ON SA-36-010
ONLY)
BMP780109R/81433A
(Sheet 2 of 2)
R
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Litho in U.S.A.
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Item
Used In
Parts List, cont.—SHELL DOOR ASSEMBLY
Part Number
Description
Comments
all
24
02 175037
92452C HANDLE=SHELDOR=WED-SS
all
25
53A500
1/4" SLEEVE-DELRIN
all
26
53A059A
NUT 1/4"COMP.HOLYOKE ANDERSON#61A-4
all
27
53A005F
BODY=FEMCONN 1/4X1/8 COMP W#B66X4
all
28
SA 10 020
90516B* DOORLATCH ASSY-SMALL
all
29
03 06301
87233T COVER=LOWER DOOR LATCH CYL
all
30
SA 28 125
93402C*LID ASSY=SOAP CHUTE-GASKETED
all
31
02 18640
65531Z HOOK=SOAPCHUTE LATCH
all
32
15P100
07Z THDCUT-F PANHD 8-32 X 3/8 SS410
all
33
02 19308
81247C GUARD=60+72WE SOAP CHUTE
all
36
15N117
RDMACSCR 10-24UNC2X3/8SS18-8
all
37
24G018N
ROLLED WASHER .194"ID NYLTITE #10W
all
38
15G121
HXCAPNUT 10-24UNC2 #3266BR NKLPLTG2
all
39
15P010
12Z PHILPAN TRDCUTSCRTYP10-24X1/2SS
all
40
AAM36001R
82246J PIPING=SEAL+LATCH RITE 72WED
all
41
53A031B
BODY-MAL90ELL1/4X1/8COMPPH#269C-42B
all
42
60E004TE
04Z 1/4"OD X.170"ID NYLON TUBING *
all
43
53A039B
BODY=BRMAL90 5/16X1/8COMP #B69A-5A
all
44
53A060A
NUT BRASS 5/16 COMP W#61X5
all
45
53A508
5/16" SLEEVE-DELRIN
all
46
53A509
TUBEINSERT .187"OD
all
47
53A501
TUBEINSERT .170"OD
all
48
AAM28001R
77512J PIPING=SEAL+LATCH RITE 60WED
all
49
02 18888
92601A DOORFILLER RUBBER 75FT/COIL*
all
50
02 175267
76119B RUBBER STRIP=CORNERS+DR STEM
all
51
03 06050B
81441D 72"DORSEAL,G-28-6X124+1/2"
(USED ON SA-36-010)
all
51
02 18889B
83426D 60"DORSEAL,G-28-6X100"
(USED ON SA-28-122)
all
53
54A716
FLANGEBEAR 1"ID SEAL SCHATZ#TW-25
all
54
02 18878
73056B PIN-HINGE=SHELL DOOR 60WED
72
(USED ON SA-36-010
ONLY)
BMP810002/81073A
AIR OPERATED VACUUM PUMP FOR DOOR SEALS
MILNOR Rapid load door seals are now deflated with an air operated vacuum pump. The air
operated vacuum pump quickly deflates the door seals when the stop button is pressed. Once the
stop button is pressed a timer in the door circuit prevents the doors from being opened for 7-1/2
seconds. This allows the seals time to deflate before the doors are open. The air operated
vacuum pump is mounted on the side of the main valve set. The two valves, the relay and the
time delay for the vacuum pump is shown on the wiring diagram that was shipped with the
machine. The two valves that operate the vacuum pump are labeled deflator enable and deflator
supply valve, the relay is aux 3-wire and the time delay is door latch delay.
73
74
Door Interlock - WED
R
BMP701654R/70481
(Sheet 1 of 1)
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Litho in U.S.A.
Parts List—Door Interlock - WED
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
. Used In
Item
Description
Part Number
Comments
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES-----------------------------------------------------------------1.
15K038
Cap Screw, Hex Head, 1/4"-20 X 3/4"
2.
15U180
Lockwasher, 1/4"
3.
15U185
Flatwasher, 1/4"
4.
15K031
Cap Screw, Hex Head, 1/4"-20 X 1/2"
5.
9R012
Micro Switch, #BZE-RN125
6.
2-18952
Striker & Switch Bracket, Left
7.
2-18979
Striker & Switch Bracket, Right
8.
2-18953
Striker Plate, Left
9.
2-18978
Striker Plate, Right
10.
2-18954
Plunger Bushing
11.
15N092
Machine Screw, Rd. Hd., #8-32 X 5/8"
12.
15G100
Hex Nut, #8-32
13.
15U120
Lockwasher, #8
14.
12M041
3/8" Straight Sealtite Connector, T & B 5231
15.
12M040
3/8" X 90° Sealtite Connector, T & B 5251
16.
12F030
3/8" Sealtite Flex Conduit
75
76
R
7
3
2
1
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
6
5
4
BMP701316/98183V (1 of 1)
36030F8S 42032F7S 52038WTL 60044WP2 72044DA1,WP2
Door Latch Assembly
Parts List—Door Latch Assembly
Item
Part Number
Description
Comments
SA 10 020
90516B* DOORLATCH ASSY-SMALL
3
4
5
6
7
all
all
all
all
2
all
all
1A
1B
all
all
17B014
60C115
60C112
Y2 10314
02 10221
02 10222
02 10188
02 10188L
INTRETRING IND#3000-X100-ST-ZD ZINC
ORING 3/4 ID 1/8CS BN70 DURO #210
ORING 5/8 ID 3/32CS BN 70 DURO #114
70256B* PLUNGER=DOOR INTERLOCK
RETAINER-DOORLATCH SPRING
82391B SPRING=DOOR LATCH=BALCOM
CYLINDER-DOORLATCH
97087# CYL=DR LATCH W/TAP LEFT SIDE
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS------------------------------------------------------------------
A
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES------------------------------------------------------------------
. Used In
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP701316/98183V
(Sheet 1 of 1)
Section
Drive Assemblies
77
3
MSSMA407BE/85047V
È RIVE BASE COMPONENTS ON
D
HYDRO-CUSHION® MACHINES
General Description of Drive Mechanism
Ê
Wash motor
E1 motor is optional on
42" and 48" machines
and standard on larger
models
Major drive train components of the drive base include the following:
Gear reducer
E-1 motor
1. Drive motors: Wash, Drain, E-1 (low extract), E-2 (high extract) and Autospot. (The E1 motor is optional on
42" machines and standard on larger models except for 64" machines, which use one 2-speed extract motor.
Autospot is optional on divided cylinder machines and not applicable to open pocket machines.)
Centrifugal
switch
2. Belts and pulleys
3. Jackshaft (The jackshaft assembly is used on 52", 60", 64" and 72" machines only. On 42" and 48" machines,
the E2 (high extract) motor also serves as the jackshaft.)
Drain
motor
E-2 motor
Jackshaft
pulley
4. Clutch and drum assembly
Clutch drum
(clutch tire inside)
5. Gear reducer
6. Brake assembly (The brake is located on the drive base on 42" and 48" machines only. On larger models, it is
located elsewhere.)
7. Centrifugal switch
Concept of Drive Train Operation—See FIGURE 1. During washing and inching, the cylinder is driven
Ë
by the wash motor through the gear reducer and the clutch, while the drain motor and the extract motors merely
coast. As soon as the drain valve opens, the wash motor is shut off and coasts with the extract motors, while the
drain motor drives the cylinder through the reducer and clutch. During extraction, both the wash and drain motors
are shut off, the clutch disengages, and the extract motor drives the cylinder through the jackshaft pulley and main
“V” belt drive. At the expiration of extract, the extract motor shuts off, the brake is applied, and either the drain or
wash motor (depending upon whether the drain valve is open or closed) starts and runs idle while the brake decelerates the machine. When the machine has slowed down sufficiently to actuate the centrifugal switch, the brake is
automatically released, and the clutch engages, returning the machine to wash or drain speed.
Advance Preparations for Drive Assembly Maintenance
Ê
The drive train on your Milnor® machine has been designed to give long, trouble-free service under continuous use. Strict adherence to the lubrication schedule, proper belt tensioning, and the normal good practice of inspecting your machine regularly for possible problems is the best way of prolonging service life.
A jackshaft (not shown) is
required on larger models
to support the jackshaft
pulley.
Brake (42" and 48" machines
only). Brake located elsewhere on larger models.
ÎFIGURE 1 (MSSMA407BE)
Î rive Base: 42" and 48" Machines
D
(Shows Concept of Operation For All Hydro-cushion® Washers and Dye-extractors® )
Eventually, however, drive train components may require replacement. If this becomes necessary, the following preparations and precautions will help to minimize down time:
1. Inspect belts regularly and purchase a replacement set for future use, before those on your machine become severely worn. This is especially important for the main drive belts. Purchase a belt tension tester (see “VBELT TENSION ADJUSTMENTS”) and familiarize yourself with its use. It is also recommended to stock
an extra clutch tire.
2. Although any motor can fail with no prior warning, two signs of potential failure are 1) motor running slower
than normal and 2) motor emitting a loud or unusual noise. If either condition is detected, immediately
check for voltage fluctuations in your electrical supply. Fluctuations greater than 10% below or 10% above
those specified may cause the above symptoms and are extremely detrimental to the motor. If voltage fluctuations are not detected, yet the symptom persists, then the motor will probably soon fail. A slow running
motor may indicate a bad rotor; whereas a loud or unusual noise likely indicates worn bearings. If possible,
make immediate repairs to avert complete failure. If this is not possible, make sure replacement parts will be
on hand when needed. Note however, that if a motor is allowed to fail, this is almost sure to require a new
or completely rebuilt motor.
3. Familiarize yourself with the various components of the drive base and with the procedures herein.
78
MSSMA407BE/85047V
(1 of 5)
È RIVE BASE COMPONENTS ON
D
HYDRO-CUSHION® MACHINES
General Description of Drive Mechanism
Ê
Wash motor
E1 motor is optional on
42" and 48" machines
and standard on larger
models
Major drive train components of the drive base include the following:
Gear reducer
E-1 motor
1. Drive motors: Wash, Drain, E-1 (low extract), E-2 (high extract) and Autospot. (The E1 motor is optional on
42" machines and standard on larger models except for 64" machines, which use one 2-speed extract motor.
Autospot is optional on divided cylinder machines and not applicable to open pocket machines.)
Centrifugal
switch
2. Belts and pulleys
3. Jackshaft (The jackshaft assembly is used on 52", 60", 64" and 72" machines only. On 42" and 48" machines,
the E2 (high extract) motor also serves as the jackshaft.)
Drain
motor
E-2 motor
Jackshaft
pulley
4. Clutch and drum assembly
Clutch drum
(clutch tire inside)
5. Gear reducer
6. Brake assembly (The brake is located on the drive base on 42" and 48" machines only. On larger models, it is
located elsewhere.)
7. Centrifugal switch
Concept of Drive Train Operation—See FIGURE 1. During washing and inching, the cylinder is driven
Ë
by the wash motor through the gear reducer and the clutch, while the drain motor and the extract motors merely
coast. As soon as the drain valve opens, the wash motor is shut off and coasts with the extract motors, while the
drain motor drives the cylinder through the reducer and clutch. During extraction, both the wash and drain motors
are shut off, the clutch disengages, and the extract motor drives the cylinder through the jackshaft pulley and main
“V” belt drive. At the expiration of extract, the extract motor shuts off, the brake is applied, and either the drain or
wash motor (depending upon whether the drain valve is open or closed) starts and runs idle while the brake decelerates the machine. When the machine has slowed down sufficiently to actuate the centrifugal switch, the brake is
automatically released, and the clutch engages, returning the machine to wash or drain speed.
Advance Preparations for Drive Assembly Maintenance
Ê
The drive train on your Milnor® machine has been designed to give long, trouble-free service under continuous use. Strict adherence to the lubrication schedule, proper belt tensioning, and the normal good practice of inspecting your machine regularly for possible problems is the best way of prolonging service life.
A jackshaft (not shown) is
required on larger models
to support the jackshaft
pulley.
Brake (42" and 48" machines
only). Brake located elsewhere on larger models.
ÎFIGURE 1 (MSSMA407BE)
Î rive Base: 42" and 48" Machines
D
(Shows Concept of Operation For All Hydro-cushion® Washers and Dye-extractors® )
Eventually, however, drive train components may require replacement. If this becomes necessary, the following preparations and precautions will help to minimize down time:
1. Inspect belts regularly and purchase a replacement set for future use, before those on your machine become severely worn. This is especially important for the main drive belts. Purchase a belt tension tester (see “VBELT TENSION ADJUSTMENTS”) and familiarize yourself with its use. It is also recommended to stock
an extra clutch tire.
2. Although any motor can fail with no prior warning, two signs of potential failure are 1) motor running slower
than normal and 2) motor emitting a loud or unusual noise. If either condition is detected, immediately
check for voltage fluctuations in your electrical supply. Fluctuations greater than 10% below or 10% above
those specified may cause the above symptoms and are extremely detrimental to the motor. If voltage fluctuations are not detected, yet the symptom persists, then the motor will probably soon fail. A slow running
motor may indicate a bad rotor; whereas a loud or unusual noise likely indicates worn bearings. If possible,
make immediate repairs to avert complete failure. If this is not possible, make sure replacement parts will be
on hand when needed. Note however, that if a motor is allowed to fail, this is almost sure to require a new
or completely rebuilt motor.
3. Familiarize yourself with the various components of the drive base and with the procedures herein.
79
To Replace Pulleys and Belt(s)
Ë
Motor, Belt, and Pulley Replacement
Ê
Part numbers for belts, pulleys, and related components may be found on the Drive Chart and/or Drive Assembly drawings for your machine. When ordering motors and motor parts from the Milnor® factory, provide the
machine model and serial number and the motor function (i.e., wash, drain, E1 (low extract), E2 (high extract) or
Autospot). Replacement rotors and bearings are available from Milnor® for some motors.
Whenever a motor, belt, or pulley is replaced, the corresponding pulleys must be precisely aligned when
reinstalled, the taper lock bushing properly tightened and the belt(s), properly tensioned. (See “V-BELT TENSION
ADJUSTMENTS” for tensioning procedure using a tension testing device available from the Milnor® factory.)
All pulleys (used for power transmission) on Milnor® Hydro-cushion® machines use taper lock bushings. This
feature greatly facilitates the removal and/or adjustment of these pulleys. Components of the taperlock bushing are
identified below.
1. Clean the tapered bore of the sheave, mating surface of the bushing, bore of the bushing, and the shaft until
free of any foreign substance (including paint).
NOTE: Do not use lubricants, “Locktite,” or other adhesives on these mating surfaces.
2. Assemble the key in the shaft keyway checking to ensure the key is a snug fit, neither too tight nor too loose.
3. Loosely assemble the sheave and bushing on the shaft in the approximate location for proper belt alignment,
allowing for take-up movement of the sheave. Make certain Grade 5 bolts, identified by the head marking
shown in FIGURE 3, were supplied.
4. Carefully tighten the cap screws alternately and progressively until the taper is seated (approximately the “Initial Torque” as shown in the “Taperlock Bushing Bolt Torque Specs” elsewhere herein). Rotate the sheave
to detect any wobble or runout (see FIGURE 2 next page).
To Remove a Pulley
Ë
Taper lock
bushing
1. See FIGURE 2.
2. Remove the belts. Release belt tension by adjusting the
position of the component to which the pulley is attached
with the jack screws, until the belts easily slip off of the
sheave. Do not force belts off by using a pry bar or rolling the sheave.
Shaft
Sheave
(pully)
3. Loosen all three bushing cap screws.
4. Put two cap screws into the push-off holes in the bushing
flange and tighten alternately until the sheave has loosened
from the bushing (see FIGURE 2).
5. Remove sheave and bushing from the shaft.
5. Install the belts onto the sheaves (driving and driven) and with the slack of each belt on the same side, adjust
Push-off holes
Bushing cap screws
Head marking
(grade 5 bolts)
To Maximize Belt Life
Ë
Check for Wobble
Key
2. Never mix belts from more than one manufacturer.
3. Always replace with the right type of belt and observe V-belt matching limits.
Check for Runout
Straight edge placed against mating groove side of pulley
Point D
Î IGURE 2 (MSSMA407BE)
F
ÎTypical Taperlock Bushing
Construction
1. Never mix new and used belts on a drive.
Sheave must be concentric with shaft
Sheave
must
be at right
angle to
shaft
Point C
Point B
Point A
Gap between
pulley and
straight edge
at point D
4. Inspect belt grooves in sheaves and replace sheave for any of the following reasons:
a. Worn groove side walls. Walls should be straight (not curved inward) when viewed in cross section.
b. Chipped or broken side walls.
Adjust motor
position to
eliminate gap
c. Shiny groove bottoms (indicating that belt is bottoming out).
ÎFIGURE 3 (MSSMA407BE)
Î est for Pulley Alignment
T
(Straight edge must touch points A, B, C, and D)
80
To Replace Pulleys and Belt(s)
Ë
Motor, Belt, and Pulley Replacement
Ê
Part numbers for belts, pulleys, and related components may be found on the Drive Chart and/or Drive Assembly drawings for your machine. When ordering motors and motor parts from the Milnor® factory, provide the
machine model and serial number and the motor function (i.e., wash, drain, E1 (low extract), E2 (high extract) or
Autospot). Replacement rotors and bearings are available from Milnor® for some motors.
Whenever a motor, belt, or pulley is replaced, the corresponding pulleys must be precisely aligned when
reinstalled, the taper lock bushing properly tightened and the belt(s), properly tensioned. (See “V-BELT TENSION
ADJUSTMENTS” for tensioning procedure using a tension testing device available from the Milnor® factory.)
All pulleys (used for power transmission) on Milnor® Hydro-cushion® machines use taper lock bushings. This
feature greatly facilitates the removal and/or adjustment of these pulleys. Components of the taperlock bushing are
identified below.
Taper lock
bushing
1. See FIGURE 2.
2. Remove the belts. Release belt tension by adjusting the
position of the component to which the pulley is attached
with the jack screws, until the belts easily slip off of the
sheave. Do not force belts off by using a pry bar or rolling the sheave.
2. Assemble the key in the shaft keyway checking to ensure the key is a snug fit, neither too tight nor too loose.
3. Loosely assemble the sheave and bushing on the shaft in the approximate location for proper belt alignment,
allowing for take-up movement of the sheave. Make certain Grade 5 bolts, identified by the head marking
shown in FIGURE 3, were supplied.
5. Install the belts onto the sheaves (driving and driven) and with the slack of each belt on the same side, adjust
Shaft
Sheave
(pully)
3. Loosen all three bushing cap screws.
5. Remove sheave and bushing from the shaft.
NOTE: Do not use lubricants, “Locktite,” or other adhesives on these mating surfaces.
4. Carefully tighten the cap screws alternately and progressively until the taper is seated (approximately the “Initial Torque” as shown in the “Taperlock Bushing Bolt Torque Specs” elsewhere herein). Rotate the sheave
to detect any wobble or runout (see FIGURE 2 next page).
To Remove a Pulley
Ë
4. Put two cap screws into the push-off holes in the bushing
flange and tighten alternately until the sheave has loosened
from the bushing (see FIGURE 2).
1. Clean the tapered bore of the sheave, mating surface of the bushing, bore of the bushing, and the shaft until
free of any foreign substance (including paint).
Push-off holes
Bushing cap screws
Head marking
(grade 5 bolts)
To Maximize Belt Life
Ë
1. Never mix new and used belts on a drive.
Check for Wobble
Key
3. Always replace with the right type of belt and observe V-belt matching limits.
Check for Runout
Straight edge placed against mating groove side of pulley
Point D
Î IGURE 2 (MSSMA407BE)
F
ÎTypical Taperlock Bushing
Construction
2. Never mix belts from more than one manufacturer.
Sheave must be concentric with shaft
Sheave
must
be at right
angle to
shaft
Point C
Point B
Point A
Gap between
pulley and
straight edge
at point D
4. Inspect belt grooves in sheaves and replace sheave for any of the following reasons:
a. Worn groove side walls. Walls should be straight (not curved inward) when viewed in cross section.
b. Chipped or broken side walls.
Adjust motor
position to
eliminate gap
c. Shiny groove bottoms (indicating that belt is bottoming out).
ÎFIGURE 3 (MSSMA407BE)
Î est for Pulley Alignment
T
(Straight edge must touch points A, B, C, and D)
81
the motor position with the motor mount (or other component) jack screws until all slack is taken up. Do
not force belts onto the sheaves by using a pry bar or rolling the sheaves.
6. Check for sheave alignment as shown in FIGURES 3. The sheaves must be aligned within 1/64" per foot between shaft centerlines and in no case greater than 1/8". Readjust the sheave position as required to correct
alignment.
7. Continue to alternately and progressively tighten cap screws to the “Final Torque” shown in the table. Use a
torque wrench for the final torque check. When properly mounted, the gap between the bushing flange
should not be less than .078" nor more than .130".
8. Check for proper belt tension and adjust if required. See “V-BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENTS” (see Table
of Contents).
ÏTaperlock Bushing Bolt Torque Specifications
Gear Reducer and Clutch
Ê
For gear reducer part numbers, see Gear Reducer Assembly and Reducer Air Seal drawings for your machine.
For clutch components, see Drive Assembly drawing for your machine.
Concept of Clutch Operation—The clutch (see cross section view, next page) consists of a tubeless tire
Ë
mounted to the gear reducer output shaft and a drum similar to an automobile brake drum, mounted to the jackshaft
(or E2 motor shaft), within which the tire nests. When the tire is automatically inflated on command from the
machine controls, it grips the inside of the drum, thus engaging the gear reducer and the jackshaft. When air pressure
is released, the tire deflates, thus disengaging the gear reducer and jackshaft and allowing the machine to run in
extract without overspeeding the reducer, wash motor or drain motor.
Air controlled by a solenoid valve is admitted to the clutch through a hole in the center of the gear reducer
shaft. The air is prevented from entering the reducer housing itself by a mechanical end face seal located inside the
air inlet on the gear reducer. The reducer is also fitted with a vented fill plug to prevent build up of air pressure in
the housing, should the mechanical seal fail. A quick release valve permits instant clutch release by providing a large
area “short circuit” exhaust connection near the clutch. The quick release valve is necessary for the clutch used on
Milnor® washer-extractors, and is furnished as original equipment. The air supplied to the clutch must be free of oil
and moisture.
Size Code
(Stamped on bushing)
Bolt Size
(All National Coarse Thread)
Initial torque
(in lb.)
Final torque
(in lb.)
G
1/4 x 5/8
48
115
H
1/4 x 3/4
48
115
P1
5/16 x 1
96
240
P2
5/16 x 1
96
240
Q1
3/8 x 1 1/4
174
430
Q2
3/8 x 1 1/4
174
430
R1
3/8 x 1 3/4
174
430
Alignment Requirements—The gear reducer must be posiË
R2
3/8 x 1 3/4
174
430
S1
1/2 x 2 1/4
420
1080
S2
1/2 x 2 1/4
420
1080
SH
1/4 x 1 3/8
54
115
tioned on the drive base such that its output shaft is on the same axis
as the jackshaft (or E2 motor shaft), as shown in FIGURE 4. Otherwise, the clutch tire will not properly engage the drum. Slight misalignment reduces the service life of the clutch tire and perhaps other
components. Severe misalignment may result in serious damage to
the jackshaft, clutch, or gear reducer (i.e., broken shaft).
SDS
1/4 x 1 3/8
54
115
SD
1/4 x 1 7/8
54
115
SK
5/16 x 2
90
240
SF
3/8 x 2
180
430
M
3/4 x 6 3/4
1350
3700
If the machine makes a loud screeching sound like skidding automobile tires during deceleration from extract speed to wash speed, turn the Master switch to off immediately and
refer to the troubleshooting procedures.
Brake drum (42"
and 48" machines
Reducer
output
shaft
To Remove the Gear Reducer and Clutch
Ë
1. Remove all belts from the gear reducer and clutch drum pulleys
as previously explained.
2. Remove the air line to the quick release valve located on the reducer air seal.
3. Remove any other components which may be mounted to the
gear reducer mounting bracket, such as Autospot motor, brake
assembly, etc.
4. On all machines except 64" models, shims are used under the
gear reducer mounting bracket, to align the gear reducer.
82
Clutch
drum
Clutch
tire
Jackshaft
(or E2 motor shaft)
Air-line
to clutch
ÎFIGURE 4 (MSSMA407BE)
ÎCross Section View of Clutch
the motor position with the motor mount (or other component) jack screws until all slack is taken up. Do
not force belts onto the sheaves by using a pry bar or rolling the sheaves.
6. Check for sheave alignment as shown in FIGURES 3. The sheaves must be aligned within 1/64" per foot between shaft centerlines and in no case greater than 1/8". Readjust the sheave position as required to correct
alignment.
7. Continue to alternately and progressively tighten cap screws to the “Final Torque” shown in the table. Use a
torque wrench for the final torque check. When properly mounted, the gap between the bushing flange
should not be less than .078" nor more than .130".
8. Check for proper belt tension and adjust if required. See “V-BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENTS” (see Table
of Contents).
ÏTaperlock Bushing Bolt Torque Specifications
Gear Reducer and Clutch
Ê
For gear reducer part numbers, see Gear Reducer Assembly and Reducer Air Seal drawings for your machine.
For clutch components, see Drive Assembly drawing for your machine.
Concept of Clutch Operation—The clutch (see cross section view, next page) consists of a tubeless tire
Ë
mounted to the gear reducer output shaft and a drum similar to an automobile brake drum, mounted to the jackshaft
(or E2 motor shaft), within which the tire nests. When the tire is automatically inflated on command from the
machine controls, it grips the inside of the drum, thus engaging the gear reducer and the jackshaft. When air pressure
is released, the tire deflates, thus disengaging the gear reducer and jackshaft and allowing the machine to run in
extract without overspeeding the reducer, wash motor or drain motor.
Air controlled by a solenoid valve is admitted to the clutch through a hole in the center of the gear reducer
shaft. The air is prevented from entering the reducer housing itself by a mechanical end face seal located inside the
air inlet on the gear reducer. The reducer is also fitted with a vented fill plug to prevent build up of air pressure in
the housing, should the mechanical seal fail. A quick release valve permits instant clutch release by providing a large
area “short circuit” exhaust connection near the clutch. The quick release valve is necessary for the clutch used on
Milnor® washer-extractors, and is furnished as original equipment. The air supplied to the clutch must be free of oil
and moisture.
Size Code
(Stamped on bushing)
Bolt Size
(All National Coarse Thread)
Initial torque
(in lb.)
Final torque
(in lb.)
G
1/4 x 5/8
48
115
H
1/4 x 3/4
48
115
P1
5/16 x 1
96
240
P2
5/16 x 1
96
240
Q1
3/8 x 1 1/4
174
430
Q2
3/8 x 1 1/4
174
430
R1
3/8 x 1 3/4
174
430
Alignment Requirements—The gear reducer must be posiË
R2
3/8 x 1 3/4
174
430
S1
1/2 x 2 1/4
420
1080
S2
1/2 x 2 1/4
420
1080
SH
1/4 x 1 3/8
54
115
tioned on the drive base such that its output shaft is on the same axis
as the jackshaft (or E2 motor shaft), as shown in FIGURE 4. Otherwise, the clutch tire will not properly engage the drum. Slight misalignment reduces the service life of the clutch tire and perhaps other
components. Severe misalignment may result in serious damage to
the jackshaft, clutch, or gear reducer (i.e., broken shaft).
SDS
1/4 x 1 3/8
54
115
SD
1/4 x 1 7/8
54
115
SK
5/16 x 2
90
240
SF
3/8 x 2
180
430
M
3/4 x 6 3/4
1350
3700
If the machine makes a loud screeching sound like skidding automobile tires during deceleration from extract speed to wash speed, turn the Master switch to off immediately and
refer to the troubleshooting procedures.
Brake drum (42"
and 48" machines
Clutch
drum
Clutch
tire
Reducer
output
shaft
To Remove the Gear Reducer and Clutch
Ë
1. Remove all belts from the gear reducer and clutch drum pulleys
as previously explained.
2. Remove the air line to the quick release valve located on the reducer air seal.
3. Remove any other components which may be mounted to the
gear reducer mounting bracket, such as Autospot motor, brake
assembly, etc.
4. On all machines except 64" models, shims are used under the
gear reducer mounting bracket, to align the gear reducer.
83
Jackshaft
(or E2 motor shaft)
Air-line
to clutch
ÎFIGURE 4 (MSSMA407BE)
ÎCross Section View of Clutch
It is essential when removing the gear reducer, to record the positions of these shims so that they may be
replaced in the exact same position later. Bearing this in mind, carefully remove the gear reducer mounting bracket (with the reducer attached) from the drive base. Note that the clutch tire, attached to the reducer
output shaft, must be allowed to slip out of the clutch drum as the reducer is removed.
4a. On 64" machine models only (i.e., 64042BTN), check and adjust the jacking bolts on the gear reducer support bracket under the input shaft side of the reducer to be sure they are just touching the drive base. Leave
the angle bracket between the reducer mounting bracket and the drive base side members firmly attached to
the drive base. Remove only the two bolts and one dowel pin on each side of the reducer mounting bracket
that attaches it to the angle brackets.
5. The gear reducer should not be unbolted from the mounting bracket unless absolutely necessary (i.e., replacing an old gear reducer with a new one); since this will complicate clutch alignment. The clutch tire may be
removed from the gear reducer by removing the retaining locknut, as well as the connection where the short
length of copper tubing meets the reducer shaft, then gently working the assembly off of the tapered shaft
with a rubber mallet or pulling fixture. The clutch drum may also be removed from the jackshaft, if required, by removing the retaining locknut and pulling the drum off with a pulling fixture. Do not attempt
to drive the drum off with a hammer or mallet.
6. In addition to any other required maintenance, inspect the various belts and the clutch tire. These components
should be replaced at this time if they show appreciable wear. It is highly recommended to replace the belts
that drive the clutch drum pulley, unless these are brand new.
To Replace the Gear Reducer and Clutch—Reassemble all components in reverse order of their reË
moval. Remember that all components such as motors, brake, etc. must be properly adjusted, using the alignment procedures described herein.
When the gear reducer and mounting brackets are replaced on the drive base, with the shims replaced in their
original positions, this should achieve rough alignment of the reducer. If, however, the gear reducer was removed
from its mounting brackets, or the jackshaft was removed from its housing, the reducer may be out of rough alignment.
3. Temporarily disconnect the internal air line to the gear reducer and connect an external, valve-controlled air
line to the reducer, but do not inflate the tire yet.
4. Loosen but do not remove the bolts that attach the gear reducer mounting brackets to the drive base. (On 64"
machine models, check to be sure the jacking bolts under the input shaft side of the reducer are resting on
the drive base then loosen the bolts and remove the dowel pins if they were reinstalled.)
5. Inflate the clutch tire to cause the gear reducer to position itself with the clutch precisely centered. (It should
move very little, if at all.)
6a. On all machines except 64" models, add or remove shims as required to firmly seat the reducer mounting
brackets on the drive base and tighten down the mounting bolts.
6b. On 64" machine models only (i.e., 64042BTN), tighten down the mounting bolts. If the dowel pin holes
are aligned, reinstall the pins. If the holes are not aligned, drill new holes, install the dowel pins, and mark
the new holes as being the correct ones.
7. Replace the internal air line to the gear reducer.
8. Energize power to the machine and run in wash, while observing for any evidence of gear reducer misalignment such as 1) wobbling of the gear reducer or related components, or 2) any apparent difficulty of the
clutch tire to engage the drum (i.e., an extended squealing sound).
9. If any of the above symptoms are observed, repeat the alignment procedures.
Jackshaft Replacement: 52", 60", 64", and 72" Machines
Ê
Jackshaft components may be found in the JACKSHAFT BEARING ASSEMBLY drawing for your machine.
Replacement jackshafts are supplied, preassembled and are installed as a one-piece unit. To replace the jackshaft,
proceed as follows:
1. Remove belts, gear reducer, and clutch drum exactly as previously explained.
To align the gear reducer and clutch:
2. Lower the drive base using the drive base jacking bolts. Remove the main drive belts and the jackshaft pulley.
1. Observe the position of the clutch tire within the drum and check for clearance between the tire and drum all
around, with a feeler gauge. Determine that the tire is roughly centered within the drum. If it is, skip to
step 3. If not, proceed to step 2a or 2b.
2a. For all machines except 64" models, add or remove shims from between the gear reducer mounting brackets and drive base as required to roughly position the clutch tire within the drum in accordance with the
“CLUTCH ALIGNMENT REQUIREMENTS” drawing.
2b. On 64" machine models only (i.e., 64042BTN), remove the two bolts and one dowel pin from each side of
the gear reducer mounting bracket and using C-clamps to secure the mounting bracket to the angle brackets,
adjust the position of the gear reducer to achieve rough alignment in accordance with the “CLUTCH
ALIGNMENT REQUIREMENTS” drawing. If the existing bolt holes are now misaligned, either enlarge
the existing holes or drill new holes as required and reinstall the four bolts. Mark any new bolt holes as being the correct ones. Do not reinstall the dowel pins.
84
3. Remove the grease fittings (or grease lines as appropriate).
4. To remove the jackshaft bearing assembly from its housing, it is convenient to remove the mounting plates
from both ends of the housing. Shims may have been installed between the mounting plates and the housing
to align the jackshaft within the housing. It is essential to record the positions of these shims, so that
they may be replaced in the exact same position later.
On some models, the front mounting plate differs from the rear plate. Therefore, it is also necessary to identify
the mounting plates as front or rear, so that they will be returned to the same positions. Remove each mounting plate
by first unbolting the jackshaft from the plate then unbolting the plate from the housing.
5. Remove the jackshaft bearing assembly from the housing.
6. In addition to any other required maintenance, inspect all belts that were removed and replace with new belts,
if they show appreciable wear.
It is essential when removing the gear reducer, to record the positions of these shims so that they may be
replaced in the exact same position later. Bearing this in mind, carefully remove the gear reducer mounting bracket (with the reducer attached) from the drive base. Note that the clutch tire, attached to the reducer
output shaft, must be allowed to slip out of the clutch drum as the reducer is removed.
4a. On 64" machine models only (i.e., 64042BTN), check and adjust the jacking bolts on the gear reducer support bracket under the input shaft side of the reducer to be sure they are just touching the drive base. Leave
the angle bracket between the reducer mounting bracket and the drive base side members firmly attached to
the drive base. Remove only the two bolts and one dowel pin on each side of the reducer mounting bracket
that attaches it to the angle brackets.
5. The gear reducer should not be unbolted from the mounting bracket unless absolutely necessary (i.e., replacing an old gear reducer with a new one); since this will complicate clutch alignment. The clutch tire may be
removed from the gear reducer by removing the retaining locknut, as well as the connection where the short
length of copper tubing meets the reducer shaft, then gently working the assembly off of the tapered shaft
with a rubber mallet or pulling fixture. The clutch drum may also be removed from the jackshaft, if required, by removing the retaining locknut and pulling the drum off with a pulling fixture. Do not attempt
to drive the drum off with a hammer or mallet.
6. In addition to any other required maintenance, inspect the various belts and the clutch tire. These components
should be replaced at this time if they show appreciable wear. It is highly recommended to replace the belts
that drive the clutch drum pulley, unless these are brand new.
To Replace the Gear Reducer and Clutch—Reassemble all components in reverse order of their reË
moval. Remember that all components such as motors, brake, etc. must be properly adjusted, using the alignment procedures described herein.
When the gear reducer and mounting brackets are replaced on the drive base, with the shims replaced in their
original positions, this should achieve rough alignment of the reducer. If, however, the gear reducer was removed
from its mounting brackets, or the jackshaft was removed from its housing, the reducer may be out of rough alignment.
3. Temporarily disconnect the internal air line to the gear reducer and connect an external, valve-controlled air
line to the reducer, but do not inflate the tire yet.
4. Loosen but do not remove the bolts that attach the gear reducer mounting brackets to the drive base. (On 64"
machine models, check to be sure the jacking bolts under the input shaft side of the reducer are resting on
the drive base then loosen the bolts and remove the dowel pins if they were reinstalled.)
5. Inflate the clutch tire to cause the gear reducer to position itself with the clutch precisely centered. (It should
move very little, if at all.)
6a. On all machines except 64" models, add or remove shims as required to firmly seat the reducer mounting
brackets on the drive base and tighten down the mounting bolts.
6b. On 64" machine models only (i.e., 64042BTN), tighten down the mounting bolts. If the dowel pin holes
are aligned, reinstall the pins. If the holes are not aligned, drill new holes, install the dowel pins, and mark
the new holes as being the correct ones.
7. Replace the internal air line to the gear reducer.
8. Energize power to the machine and run in wash, while observing for any evidence of gear reducer misalignment such as 1) wobbling of the gear reducer or related components, or 2) any apparent difficulty of the
clutch tire to engage the drum (i.e., an extended squealing sound).
9. If any of the above symptoms are observed, repeat the alignment procedures.
Jackshaft Replacement: 52", 60", 64", and 72" Machines
Ê
Jackshaft components may be found in the JACKSHAFT BEARING ASSEMBLY drawing for your machine.
Replacement jackshafts are supplied, preassembled and are installed as a one-piece unit. To replace the jackshaft,
proceed as follows:
1. Remove belts, gear reducer, and clutch drum exactly as previously explained.
To align the gear reducer and clutch:
1. Observe the position of the clutch tire within the drum and check for clearance between the tire and drum all
around, with a feeler gauge. Determine that the tire is roughly centered within the drum. If it is, skip to
step 3. If not, proceed to step 2a or 2b.
2a. For all machines except 64" models, add or remove shims from between the gear reducer mounting brackets and drive base as required to roughly position the clutch tire within the drum in accordance with the
“CLUTCH ALIGNMENT REQUIREMENTS” drawing.
2b. On 64" machine models only (i.e., 64042BTN), remove the two bolts and one dowel pin from each side of
the gear reducer mounting bracket and using C-clamps to secure the mounting bracket to the angle brackets,
adjust the position of the gear reducer to achieve rough alignment in accordance with the “CLUTCH
ALIGNMENT REQUIREMENTS” drawing. If the existing bolt holes are now misaligned, either enlarge
the existing holes or drill new holes as required and reinstall the four bolts. Mark any new bolt holes as being the correct ones. Do not reinstall the dowel pins.
2. Lower the drive base using the drive base jacking bolts. Remove the main drive belts and the jackshaft pulley.
3. Remove the grease fittings (or grease lines as appropriate).
4. To remove the jackshaft bearing assembly from its housing, it is convenient to remove the mounting plates
from both ends of the housing. Shims may have been installed between the mounting plates and the housing
to align the jackshaft within the housing. It is essential to record the positions of these shims, so that
they may be replaced in the exact same position later.
On some models, the front mounting plate differs from the rear plate. Therefore, it is also necessary to identify
the mounting plates as front or rear, so that they will be returned to the same positions. Remove each mounting plate
by first unbolting the jackshaft from the plate then unbolting the plate from the housing.
5. Remove the jackshaft bearing assembly from the housing.
6. In addition to any other required maintenance, inspect all belts that were removed and replace with new belts,
if they show appreciable wear.
85
To replace the jackshaft, reassemble all components in reverse order of their removal. Make certain that the
jackshaft is properly oriented with the clutch end of the shaft to the front of the machine and that all shims are
returned to their original positions. Install all jackshaft mounting bolts hand tight. Lift each end of the jackshaft with
a pry bar (one end at a time) then tighten the bolts on that end, so that the jackshaft will sit as high as possible in the
housing. This will provide for greater clearance between the clutch pulley and the drive base for the belts and easier
alignment of the jackshaft. When tightening the bolts, tighten first the bolts that secure the jackshaft to the mounting
plate, then those that secure the mounting plate to the housing. Remember that all components such as motors,
gear reducers, brakes, etc., must be properly adjusted, using the alignment procedures explained herein.
Brake Assembly
Ê
Concept of Operation—On 42" and 48" Hydro-cushion® machines, the brake is located on the drive base.
Ë
(The clutch drum is also the brake drum.) On 60" and 72" Staph-guard® machines, the brake is located on the
idlershaft. On all other 52", 60", 64", and 72" machines, it is located on the cylinder shaft (thus, the main drive
pulley and brake drum are combined). Machines covered by these instructions use spring loaded air cylinders to
hold the brake band against the drum. Open-pocket machines use only one level of braking (“first brake”) and
divided cylinder machines (WE’s and SG’s) use two levels (“first” and “second” brake). The “first” brake is normally on, and braking pressure is supplied by the action of the springs inside the brake air cylinder. The “first” brake
is released by applying air to the top of the air cylinder to counteract the springs. This occurs whenever the cylinder
rotates under power. On divided cylinder machines, the “second” brake which is on whenever the cylinder is at rest
with the door open, supplements the “first” brake with air pressure applied to the back of the air cylinder.
Brake Assembly Maintenance—For identification of brake components and specific adjustment proceË
dures refer to the Brake Assembly, Drive Assembly and/or Brake Air Cylinder drawings for your machine. Specific
adjustment procedures are also found on the Brake Assembly drawing for your machine.
The brake may be readily adjusted to compensate for wear by adjusting the nuts on the air cylinder stem. If
brake components must be removed or repaired, it is essential to adjust the brake upon replacement in accordance
with the Brake Assembly drawing.
NOTE: For any adjustment procedure requiring air pressure to the brake, do not attempt to perform this
procedure by energizing the washer as it is not possible to release the “first” brake without the cylinder
rotating under power.
Centrifugal Switch
Ê
Concept of Operation—After an extraction, the centrifugal switch will signal the Miltrol as soon as the
Ë
washer cylinder has slowed sufficiently to permit the wash speed clutch to re-engage. Also, until this low speed has
been attained, the Miltrol circuits prevent the opening of the shell door, thus providing safety interlocking.
This centrifugal switch assembly consists of three mercury tube switches wired in parallel, and connected to
two copper rings. The shaft of the centrifugal switch is driven by the extract motor shaft and rotates at the same
speed as the extract motor. At a predetermined speed, centrifugal force will cause the mercury switches to open the
circuit. At lower speeds, there is always at least one switch closed, thus maintaining the circuit continuity. Two
spring loaded carbon brushes, riding on the copper contact rings, transmit this electrical signal to the Miltrol.
This electrical signal is used to energize the speed relay at the expiration of extraction, when the predetermined
reclutching speed has been reached. The combined operation of the extract relay and the speed relay in the Miltrol
perform all the functions of operating the brake, clutch, and extract motors incidental to the automatic entrance into
extraction, and subsequent return to wash speed.
Centrifugal Switch Maintenance—See Centrifugal Switch Assembly for your machine for identification
Ë
of switch components.
The centrifugal switch is very simple, yet of vital importance. Failure of one of the mercury switches to make
contact, an irregular contact between the brushes and the contact rings, a loose connection in the wiring, or any other
condition that would cause an open circuit will prevent the clutch from engaging, in which case the machine will
not operate after having braked down from extract speed.
The carbon brushes should be inspected occasionally, and replaced when worn. The copper contact rings may
be cleaned with fine emery when needed. (Do not scratch the surface of the contact rings.)
A short circuit or ground in the centrifugal switch or its associated wiring will cause the
wash speed clutch to engage in high speed rotation. This condition would be identified by
an extremely loud screeching sound as soon as the machine stops extracting. The sound
would be similar to skidding auto tires. Such a malfunction is very dangerous and must be
corrected at once before further operation.
To release the “first” brake without energizing the washer:
1. Disconnect the internal air line to the air cylinder. (This is the only air line to the air cylinder on open-pocket
machines and the air line closest to the air cylinder stem on divided cylinder machines.)
Turn off power at main wall switch before entering centrifugal switch. This assembly carries
high voltage, and remains energized when Miltrol master switch is off.
2. Temporarily connect a direct air line to the air cylinder where the internal line was removed and apply air to
release the brake.
3. On divided cylinder machines, make sure the doors are closed (to release the “second” brake).
86
Over-lubrication of extract motor bearings will force grease into centrifugal switch housing
and will cause the centrifugal switch to malfunction.
To replace the jackshaft, reassemble all components in reverse order of their removal. Make certain that the
jackshaft is properly oriented with the clutch end of the shaft to the front of the machine and that all shims are
returned to their original positions. Install all jackshaft mounting bolts hand tight. Lift each end of the jackshaft with
a pry bar (one end at a time) then tighten the bolts on that end, so that the jackshaft will sit as high as possible in the
housing. This will provide for greater clearance between the clutch pulley and the drive base for the belts and easier
alignment of the jackshaft. When tightening the bolts, tighten first the bolts that secure the jackshaft to the mounting
plate, then those that secure the mounting plate to the housing. Remember that all components such as motors,
gear reducers, brakes, etc., must be properly adjusted, using the alignment procedures explained herein.
Brake Assembly
Ê
Concept of Operation—On 42" and 48" Hydro-cushion® machines, the brake is located on the drive base.
Ë
(The clutch drum is also the brake drum.) On 60" and 72" Staph-guard® machines, the brake is located on the
idlershaft. On all other 52", 60", 64", and 72" machines, it is located on the cylinder shaft (thus, the main drive
pulley and brake drum are combined). Machines covered by these instructions use spring loaded air cylinders to
hold the brake band against the drum. Open-pocket machines use only one level of braking (“first brake”) and
divided cylinder machines (WE’s and SG’s) use two levels (“first” and “second” brake). The “first” brake is normally on, and braking pressure is supplied by the action of the springs inside the brake air cylinder. The “first” brake
is released by applying air to the top of the air cylinder to counteract the springs. This occurs whenever the cylinder
rotates under power. On divided cylinder machines, the “second” brake which is on whenever the cylinder is at rest
with the door open, supplements the “first” brake with air pressure applied to the back of the air cylinder.
Brake Assembly Maintenance—For identification of brake components and specific adjustment proceË
dures refer to the Brake Assembly, Drive Assembly and/or Brake Air Cylinder drawings for your machine. Specific
adjustment procedures are also found on the Brake Assembly drawing for your machine.
The brake may be readily adjusted to compensate for wear by adjusting the nuts on the air cylinder stem. If
brake components must be removed or repaired, it is essential to adjust the brake upon replacement in accordance
with the Brake Assembly drawing.
NOTE: For any adjustment procedure requiring air pressure to the brake, do not attempt to perform this
procedure by energizing the washer as it is not possible to release the “first” brake without the cylinder
rotating under power.
Centrifugal Switch
Ê
Concept of Operation—After an extraction, the centrifugal switch will signal the Miltrol as soon as the
Ë
washer cylinder has slowed sufficiently to permit the wash speed clutch to re-engage. Also, until this low speed has
been attained, the Miltrol circuits prevent the opening of the shell door, thus providing safety interlocking.
This centrifugal switch assembly consists of three mercury tube switches wired in parallel, and connected to
two copper rings. The shaft of the centrifugal switch is driven by the extract motor shaft and rotates at the same
speed as the extract motor. At a predetermined speed, centrifugal force will cause the mercury switches to open the
circuit. At lower speeds, there is always at least one switch closed, thus maintaining the circuit continuity. Two
spring loaded carbon brushes, riding on the copper contact rings, transmit this electrical signal to the Miltrol.
This electrical signal is used to energize the speed relay at the expiration of extraction, when the predetermined
reclutching speed has been reached. The combined operation of the extract relay and the speed relay in the Miltrol
perform all the functions of operating the brake, clutch, and extract motors incidental to the automatic entrance into
extraction, and subsequent return to wash speed.
Centrifugal Switch Maintenance—See Centrifugal Switch Assembly for your machine for identification
Ë
of switch components.
The centrifugal switch is very simple, yet of vital importance. Failure of one of the mercury switches to make
contact, an irregular contact between the brushes and the contact rings, a loose connection in the wiring, or any other
condition that would cause an open circuit will prevent the clutch from engaging, in which case the machine will
not operate after having braked down from extract speed.
The carbon brushes should be inspected occasionally, and replaced when worn. The copper contact rings may
be cleaned with fine emery when needed. (Do not scratch the surface of the contact rings.)
A short circuit or ground in the centrifugal switch or its associated wiring will cause the
wash speed clutch to engage in high speed rotation. This condition would be identified by
an extremely loud screeching sound as soon as the machine stops extracting. The sound
would be similar to skidding auto tires. Such a malfunction is very dangerous and must be
corrected at once before further operation.
To release the “first” brake without energizing the washer:
1. Disconnect the internal air line to the air cylinder. (This is the only air line to the air cylinder on open-pocket
machines and the air line closest to the air cylinder stem on divided cylinder machines.)
Turn off power at main wall switch before entering centrifugal switch. This assembly carries
high voltage, and remains energized when Miltrol master switch is off.
2. Temporarily connect a direct air line to the air cylinder where the internal line was removed and apply air to
release the brake.
3. On divided cylinder machines, make sure the doors are closed (to release the “second” brake).
Over-lubrication of extract motor bearings will force grease into centrifugal switch housing
and will cause the centrifugal switch to malfunction.
87
88
Jackshaft Bearing Assembly
BMP820109R/89253A
(Sheet 1 of 2)
52, 60, 64, 72
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
R
Litho in U.S.A.
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Parts List—Jackshaft Bearing Assembly
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Item
. Used In
Description
Part Number
Comments
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES-----------------------------------------------------------------X
GBJ25001
87332# JKSHFT ASSY TIMKEN 52U+72S
52 W/E,60+72
STAPHGUARD
Y
GBJ28001
87332D JKSHFT ASSY TIMKEN 60W+72W+T
60,64+72 W/E
Z
ABJ25001
92327C*JKSHFT-BRGHOUS ASSY-TIMKENS
ONLY
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS-----------------------------------------------------------------all
1
X2 18711B
93417D JACKSHAFT=TIMBRG W/TRUSTWASH
all
2
54M025
HYDRAULICFIT 1/8"-90 ALEMITE#1613-B
all
3
20H012
SHELL ALVANIA EP-2 # 71125 E=35LBPL
all
4
5SCC0CBE
NPT COUP 1/8 BRASS 125# 103A-A
all
5
5N0C04AG42 NPT NIPPLE 1/8X4 TBE GALSTL SK40
all
6
5SL0CBEC
NPT ELBOW 90DEG STRT 1/8"BRASS 125#
all
7
15K151
HXCAPSCR 1/2-13UNC24X1.25 GR5 PLATE
all
8
15U300
LOKWASHER REGULAR 1/2 ZINC PLT
all
9
15K221
HEXCAPSCR 5/8-11 UNC2X2GR5 ZINC
all
10
15U315
LOKWASHER MEDIUM 5/8 ZINCPL
all
11
15U314
FLATWASHER(USS STD) 5/8" ZNC PLT
all
12
15G238
HXNUT 5/8-11UNC2B SAE ZINC GR2
(Y onlY
13
02 19382
89016D BEARHOUSE MT PLATE REAR
(X,Y)
14
02 19383
89016D BEARHOUSE MT PLATE FRONT
all
15
01 10237
82446B NAMEPLATE LUBG BRG JACKSHAF
all
16
15P185
TRDCUT-F HXHD 1/4-20UNC2AX3/4 ZNC
all
17
51A001
ADAPTER 1/8 PT BRASS
all
18
56AHN14
N14 BEARING LOCKNUT
all
19
56AHW14
W14 BEARING LOCKWASHER
all
20
54AT060
01Z CONE TIMKEN 644 1/BOX+ PT NO
all
21
54AU060
01Z CUP TIMKEN 632 1/BOX+PT NO
all
22
54AT050
01Z CONE TIMKEN 6461 1/BOX+ PT NO
all
23
54AU050
01Z CUP TIMKEN 6420 1/BOX+ PT NO
all
24
15K193
06Z SKCPSC-1/2-13X2.75GR8 HK
89
)
BMP820109R/89253A
(Sheet 2 of 2)
R
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Item
Used In
Parts List, cont.—Jackshaft Bearing Assembly
Part Number
Description
all
25
X2 19381
94182D BEARHOUSE=LG BRG REAR TIMKEN
all
26
X2 19381B
94182D BRGHSE=SM BRG FRONT W/WASHER
all
27
02 19384
82296C COVER=BRG HOUSE FT+REAR
all
28
15U180
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM 1/4 ZINCPL
all
29
15K030
HEXCAPSCR 1/4-20UNC2X1/2 GR5 ZINC
all
30
X2 19378
88506C BRGHSG SUP=TIMKENS MACHINED
90
Litho in U.S.A.
Comments
91
92
Used In
Item
Part Number
Description
A52 00300
SA 36 009
D52 00150
D52 00160
D36 00250
D36 00160
D36 00150
D36 00660
850562*DRIVE BASE ASSY 72WEU+WTU
910131*DRIVE ASSY=7244 WED
86521M* DRIVECHART 7244WT1 50CYC
86521M* DRIVECHART 7244WT1 60CYC
87202S*DRIVECHART=7244WE2 50CYC
87202S*DRIVECHART=7244WE2 60CYC
87202S*DRIVECHART=7244WE3 50CYC
87202S*DRIVECHART=7244WE3 60CYC
X5 20111
X3 06039
7
7
used in U,
V
used in W,
X,Y,Z
20
20
560470R6SK
560407R6P1
56Q3NS2S
17
all
used in Y,
Z
56Q5EM
17
used in U,
V
used in W,
X,Y,Z
56Q0MHS
16
56Q2HR2S
15
U,V onlY
56Q2HQ2S
15
used in V,
X,Z
used in U,
W,Y
56Q1MQ1
14
56Q1MQ1
13
all
56Q1RQ1
13
56Q1GQ1
12
used in U,
V
used in W,
X,Y,Z
56Q1MQ1
12
used in U,
V
used in W,
X,Y,Z
56Q1GQ1
11
56Q1GP1
10
all
56Q1GQ1
10
used in U,
V,W,X
used in Y,
Z
X2 15106
8
all
56V40390S
6
U,V onlY
56VC195XB6
56VC190XB6
56VC187XBA
5
5
5
all
all
used in X,
Z
56VR071S
4
used in U,
V
used in W,
X,Y,Z
56VR067S
56VR071S
3
4
all
56VR0750M2
2
used in U,
V
used in W,
X,Y,Z
56VR050S
56VR0800M2
1
2
all
VPUL 6G3V4.7 (SK) TYPE QD
01Z VPUL 6G3V4.07PD/4.12
02Z 3+11/16 SPLIT BUSH'N BROWN "S2"
5+1/4" BUSHING,VPUL QD TYPE "M"
05Z .627" BUSHING,VPUL TYPE H,DORQT
01Z 2+7/16" SPLIT BUSH'N BROWN "R2"
02Z 2+7/16"SPLIT BUSH'N BROWN "Q2"
1+5/8" BUSHING,VPUL BROWNING "Q1"
1+5/8" BUSHING,VPUL BROWNING "Q1"
1+7/8" BUSHING,VPUL BROWNING "Q1"
1+3/8" BUSHING,VPUL BROWNING "Q1"
1+5/8" BUSHING,VPUL BROWNING "Q1"
1+3/8" BUSHING,VPUL BROWNING "Q1"
1+3/8" BUSHING,VPUL BROWNING "P1"
1+3/8" BUSHING,VPUL BROWNING "Q1"
94251B FLANGE=CLUTCH DRIVE 2.5
94271D CLUTCH DRUM+VPUL 72MM
79512D CLUTCH DRUM+VPUL 5G13.45+9.0
FHP V-BELT 4L390 "A" SECTION DAYCO
01Z SET OF TWO 3RCX195 VBANDS
01Z SET OF TWO 3RCX190 VBANDS
01Z SET OF TWO 3RCX187 VBANDS
VBELT 3V710
V-BELT 3V710
V-BELT 3V670
VBELT 3V750 MATCHSET=2 "EA"=1 BELT
VBELT 3V800 MATCHSET=2 "EA"=1 BELT
VBELT 3V500
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS------------------------------------------------------------------
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES------------------------------------------------------------------
.
Parts List—Drive Assembly
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Litho in U.S.A.
Comments
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
R
7244, WE1, 2, 3
Drive Assembly
-
.
38
42
all
47
48
48
49
50
51
51
52
53
54
all
used in S
used in T
all
all
used in S
used in T
used in S
all
all
45
41
all
all
40
all
39
39
all
used in S
used in T
37
34
34
used in S
used in T
all
33
all
36
32
all
35
31
all
all
30
all
28
U,V onlY
03 06029
27
all
05 20002
27
used in U,
V
used in W,
X,Y,Z
5N0E02KG42
27A005
03 25293
03 25293
X2 18634
02 175257
02 18702
05 20041
02 18701A
17R125A15K
5SP0GFFSSV
GBJ28001
54S025A
54H150
W5 20040A
W3 06072A
15E230
02 175121
03 01234
02 19286
05 20131
02 19286
02 19288
02 19131
02 19130
02 19286
02 15917
56054B1H
25
26
56140C6F
56114C6F
560685R5SK
560645R5SK
561110R4SK
561110R5SK
560685R2SE
561055R2SK
Part Number
U,V onlY
25
Item
all
all
24
23
all
all
23
all
24
22
all
all
22
Used In
all
..
NPT NIPPLE 1/4X2.5 TBE GALSTL SK40
MUFFLER 3/8" ALLIED #B38 "BANTAM"
80396B BAR=MOTOR MNT HING PIN CLAMP
80396B BAR=MOTOR MNT HING PIN CLAMP
90183# CLAMP=MACHINED DR HINGPIN
75561C GREASE RELIEF=DRIP SHIELD
81533B FORK=ADJ SCREW-MOTOR MT-FRT
81533C BRACE=SWAY
83266# SWAY BRACE=WE DRIVE BASE(REV
83287# STUD=DRIVEBASEADS 1+1/4X15.5
NPT PLUG 3/8 SQSOLIDVENTBLKSTL
87332D JKSHFT ASSY TIMKEN 60W+72W+T
02Z REDUCER T3210-600 EC2=AUTOSPOT
REPLACED BY KIT K15 0002
90052D*DRVBSE=7244 TILT (50+60C) TM
93416D*DR BASE 7244WEU(50+60)TIMKEN
STRMACHKEY 3/8SQX2+1/2 TOL.+0 -.022
71058A KEY=5/8SQ
68106A COVER=CENT-SW SHAFT PLATED
92571C MTRPLATE 254/256T BEND@PRINT
77401C PLATE=MTR MT 324FRAME BND@PT
92571C MTRPLATE 254/256T BEND@PRINT
87483B BRACKET=ADJUSTING-1.5X1.75
88473C BRACKET=FRONT REDUCER MOUNT
86226C BRACKET=REAR REDUCER MOUNT
92571C MTRPLATE 254/256T BEND@PRINT
71064B VPUL=CENT SW DR A1GR 5.0PD
87382D VPUL+BRKDRUM 6C44.0-410# 72W
92607D VPUL+BRAKEDRUM 6C44.0"M"BUSH
VPUL 1B5.4/A5.0 B#BK60H OR EQUAL
VPUL 6C14.0 (F) TYPE QD
VPUL 6C11.4 (F) TYPE QD
VPUL 5G3V6.85 (SK) TYPE QD
VPUL 5G3V6.45 (SK) TYPE QD
02Z VPUL 4G3V11.1(SK) TYPE QD
01Z VPUL 5G3V11.1(SK) TYPE QD
VPUL 2G3V6.85 (SDS) TYPE QD
VPUL 2G3V10-55 (SK) TYPE QD
Description
Parts List—Drive Assembly
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Litho in U.S.A.
NEEDS QD TYPE F
BUSHING
NEEDS QD TYPE SK
BUSHING
NEEDS QD TYPE SK
BUSHING
NEEDS QD TYPE SK
BUSHING
NEEDS QD TYPE SK
BUSHING
NEEDS QD TYPE SD
BUSHING
NEEDS QD TYPE SK
BUSHING
Comments
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
R
BMP840022R/97107V
(Sheet 2 of 2)
93
R
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
60044 WP2/WP3 72044WP2/WP3
Brake Assembly
22
18
Parts List—Brake Assembly
Item
Part Number
Description
Comments
1
2
3
4
4A
5
6
9
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
A
B
A
B
A
B
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
17A010
15U240
15G205
15U255
15K110
02 18689
17A030
15H030
SA 28 154N
SA 36 007N
SA 28 153N
SA 36 008N
SA 28 152
SA 36 035
15D119
15G205
15G230
15G231
15G234N
15K095
15K117
17B062
15U255
15U280
15U300
54M025
02 18516B
W2 18661
02 18786
02 175080
ADJ YOKE 3/8-16 EMPIGARD COAT
FLATWASHER(USS STD) 3/8" ZNC P
HXNUT 3/8-16UNC2B ZINC GR2
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM 3/8 ZINCPL
HEXCAPSCR 3/8-16UNC2AX1.5 GR566404A ROLLER-BRAKE ADJUST (NYLON)
CLEVPIN 3/8"X1+3/32"DRILLD S/S
STDCOTTERPIN 3/32X3/4 ZINCPL
94153# *BRAKEBAND LT(NON-ASB)52+60WEA
84522C *BRAKEBAND LT(NON-ASB)72W+T+D
94153# *BRAKEBAND RT(NON-ASB)52+60WE
84522C *BRAKEBAND RT(NON-ASB)72W+T+D
89483V * BRAKE AIRCYL 2-WAY 60WE2+3
89483V * AIRCYL=BRAKE ASSY
HXTAPSCR 1/2-13X4 GR5 ZNC FULL
HXNUT 3/8-16UNC2B ZINC GR2
HXNUT 1/2-13UNC2B SAE ZINC GR2
HXFINJAMNUT 1/2-13UNC2B ZINC G
HXLOCKNUT NYL 1/2-13UNC2 STL/Z
HXCPSCR 3/8-16UNC2AX1 GR5 ZINC
HEXCAPSCR 3/8-16X1+3/4 GR 5 PL
EXTRETRING S/S INDUST#3100-75LOCKWASHER MEDIUM 3/8 ZINCPL
01Z FL+WASHER(USS STD)1/2 ZNC PL+D
LOKWASHER REGULAR 1/2 ZINC PLT
HYDFIT 1/8"-90 ALEMITE 1613-B
64664A WASHER=BRAKE BAND PIN +$10SU
88091B * WELDMENT=BRAKE HINGE PIN
85451A SHIM=BRAKE BAND 60+72WE
78196B PLATE-BRAKE STOP
-----------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS-------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES--------------------------------------------------------------A
AD 28 151
BRAKE INSTALLATION 6044WED+WEH
60044WP2/WP3
B
AD 36 043
86436D BRAKE INSTALLATION 7244WED
72044WP2/WP3
Used In
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP710022/99512V
(Sheet 1 of 1)
94
R
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Reducer Air Seal
Parts List—Reducer Air Seal
Item
Part Number
Description
Comments
54S012HC
54S015
54S022A
54S023B
54S025A
B
C
D
E
F
REDUCR 10.16:1 3210-600EC2
REDUCR 10.16:1 3210-375EC2
REDUCR 19.59:1 3220-300EC1
REDUCER 19.6 SKK/DOR 3220-60C
REDUCER 15.4 DORRIS #1115-25HC
REDUCER 15.4 DORRIS#1115-60HC
6442,6446,7244
6440/50
6044
4231,4244,5238
4226DYE
SHUTL36/40/48R+L
4836
3621,3626,4226,4832,
1
2
3
4
5
5
B-F
B-F
B-F
all
A-C
D-F
02 15108
02 15108A
02 10380
15Q077
02 15111
K10 0002
COVER=ROTARY AIRSEAL HOUSING
AIRINLET=CLUTCH DIECAST+TAP
Z SHAFT COLLAR FOR AIR SEAL
SOKSETSCR 1/4-20X1/4 ZINC ALLE
GASKET AIRSEALHOUSING COVER
KIT=ROTARY AIR SEAL
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS------------------------------------------------------------------
54S014HC
A
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES------------------------------------------------------------------
. Used In
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP700392/2002496V
(Sheet 1 of 1)
95
R
32
31
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Autospot Drive Assembly
8
19
7
1
20
21
25
24
23
4
3
2
5
32
31
29
30
18
17
14
15
16
31
9
10
11
12
13
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP701411/2000133V
(Sheet 1 of 2)
BMP701411/2000133V
(Sheet 2 of 2)
R
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Litho in U.S.A.
Parts List—Autospot Drive Assembly
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Description
Item Part Number
Comments
. Used In
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLY---------------------------------------------------------------------A
G15 13400
814811 MOTOR DRIVE ASSY=AUTOSPOT
4231,4244WP2/2 CP2/3
WP2/3 SP2/3
6044SP2 , 72044 SP2/SP3
B
G28 15600
81481C MOTOR DRIVE ASSY=AUTOSPOT
6044WP2/3 SP2/3
72044WP2/3
------------------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS------------------------------------------------------------------1
54N015
02Z SPROCKET BROWN#35A96-6”BORE
2
54N008
SPRKT BROWN#35-13X7/8” BORE
3
54H164A
08Z CLUTCH 12VDC MAPM02
4
15E006
KEY #6 WOODRUFF 5/32X5/8 SAE10
5
15Q068
SOKSETSCR CUP10-24X1/4ZINCALLE
7
54G010B43P 71245N ROLLCHAIN+CONNLINK 3/8”=AUTO
A
8
02 15865
96101D BASE=AUTOSPOT MOTOR BND@PRT
B
8
02 175036
96101C BASE=AUTOSPTMTR60+72WE BND@PT
9
15K105
HXCAPSCR 3/8-16UNC2A1.25 Gr5 P
10
15U255
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM 3/8 ZINCPL
11
02 175027
96101BTAPSTRIP=AUTOSPOT MOTORMOUNT
12
15K211
HEXCAPSCR 5/8-11UNC2AX1 Gr5 ZIN
13
15U315
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM 5/8 ZINCPL
14
15K180
HXCAPSCR 1/2-13UNCAX2 Gr5 ZINC
15
15U300
LOCKWSHER REGULAR ½ ZINC PLT
16
15G230
HXNUT 1/2-13UNC2B ZINC Gr5
17
03 01275
69268C COVER=AUTO CLUTCHWIRES
18
12M036L
1/2’ 90-DEG SHORT ELLS
18A
12M035
3/8’ SCREW-IN CONNECTOR
19
15K041
HXCAPSCR 1/4-20OUNC2AX1 GR 5 ZI
A
20
12C0375FN
3/8” FLX NON-METAL CONDUIT
A
21
12M040
3/8” X 90-DEG SEALTITE CONN.
A
23
12H050
HANDYBOX 4X2+1/8X21/8
A
24
12H095
HANDY BOX COVER 4+2+1/8
A
25
15P185
TRDCUT-F HXHD 1/4-20OUNC2AX3/4
A
29
15U150
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM #10 ZINCPL
A
30
15K018
05Z SKCPSCR 10-24 UNC 3X3/8
31
5SCC0GNF
NPT COUP 3/8 GALMAL 150#
32
5N0G02AG42 NPT NIP 3/8X2 TBE GALSTL Sk40
96
97
R
9
10
11
15
8
16
17
4
4
9
10
11
20
5
6
Main Drive Pulley
BMP710043/96216V (1 of 1)
NOTE: Belt guards not shown.
7. Sensing Unit=60" + 72" WE
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
60044WP2/WP3 and 72044WP2/WP3
Air Operated Autospot Assembly
Parts List—60044WP2/WP3 and 72044WP2/WP3
Item
Part Number
Description
Comments
G28 16300
G36 05500
B
C
71318D AIROP AUTOSPOT ASSY=7244WE2
71241# AIROP AUTOSPOT=60"WE3
71241Y AIROP AUTOSPOT=60"WE2
72044WP2/WP3
60044WP3
60044WP2
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
9
10
11
15
16
17
19
20
all
A, B
C
A, B
C
A, C
B
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
15U238
15K105
15E007
56Q0MHS
15U255
15U240
15G205
15K095
54X020
E28 00800
E28 01100
AD 28 119
G36 05900
54C135
54C160
02 175144
LOKWAS INTOOTH 3/8" (US STD) 410SS
HXCAPSCR 3/8-16UNC2A1.25 GR5 PLATED
KEY #7 WOODRUFF 3/4X1/8 SAE1035
05Z .627" BUSHING,VPUL TYPE H,DORQT
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM 3/8 ZINCPL
FLATWASHER(USS STD) 3/8" ZNC PLT
HXNUT 3/8-16UNC2B ZINC GR2
HXCPSCR 3/8-16UNC2AX1 GR5 ZINC/CAD
PULLEY-TIMEBELT (LH) ELECT #40L050D
71263T* SENSE UNIT AUTOSPOT60+72WE2
71263T* SENSE UNIT AUTOSPOT60+72WE3
81512U DRIVE PULLEY ASSY=AUTOSPOT
76179T DRIVE PULLEY=AIROP AUTOSPOT
GEARBELT SYNCRO-COG DAYCO #600L050
GEARBELT UNIROYAL MOLD 9386X1/2B4N1
75690B BKT MTG=AIROP AUTOSPOT
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS------------------------------------------------------------------
G28 16200
A
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES------------------------------------------------------------------
. Used In
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP710043/96216V
(Sheet 1 of 1)
98
99
100
R
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Centrifugal Switch Assembly
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP701195/2000242V
(Sheet 1 of 2)
101
Used In
Item
Part Number
Description
Comments
ADC11001
ADC14001
EDC14801
SAE13 001
SAE13 001A
V
W
X
Y
Z
3621CPE,BWP,NSP
4226DA1, 64040/64050E6N
64046E6N/J6N/D6N
Q6'S
3621/26+4226Q4'S,
3621Q'S
MANUFACTURED AFTER
JAN. 6,1993
83417J CENTRIFUGAL SW ASSY 42QHE
83246I ASSY=CENSW + MOUNTBKT SWE
86252C ASSY=CENSW+MTGBRKT RWP
90351C CENT SWITCH ASSY 3621F8P
84122D ASSY=CENSW + MOUNTBKT4226QH
83417J ASSY=CENSW + MOUNTBKT 42DYA
792571 ASSY=CENSW + MOUNTBKT 42
4226,4832,4836
3626SWE
3621/26,4226RWP/SYS
7
3621F8P
4226
5238 DYE
42031,42044,48032,48036
84412C CENTSWITCH=MOTOR MT NO-PLATE 6044,6442,6446,7244
84412# CENTSW ASSY=FRAME NO-PLATE
90000Z CENTSW+MTG BRKT 36/42QG/J/P
92000Z*CENTSW + MTG BRKT 3621/26F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
15K036
15U342
SAE03 012B
15P010
15U100
15N045
15G070
12P015C
60E005E
03 IF2X3
15G071
ESC0001
09X100
05Z SKSELL0KCP SCR 1/4-20X5/8
FLTWASH .255/.260IDX.750DX.125T SS
83407#*SLIPRING+CENT SW.ASSY(LORES)
12Z PHILPAN TRDCUTSCRTYP10-24X1/2SS
LOKWASHER MEDIUM #6 ZINCPL
RDMACHSCR 6-32UNC2AX3/8 ZINC GR2
HXMACHSCRNUT 6-32UNC2B ZINC GR2
CABLECLAMP 5/16-1/2
TUBING VINYL 3/8IDX.025"W #HT105C *
85046B INSUL.AUTOSPOT/CENTRIFUGL.SW
MACHSCRLOKNUT 6-32 NM SER ZINC
82281B* CENT SWITCH BRUSHOLDER ASSY
CARBON BRUSH 3/16"SQ=CENSW
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS------------------------------------------------------------------
SAE03 088A
G03 04500A
R
U
G10 05000B
Q
SAE03 088
EDC14002
P
T
EDC14003
N
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES------------------------------------------------------------------
.
Parts List—Centrifugal Switch Assembly
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
R
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
16
17
18
19
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
21
22
23
24
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
T-Z onlY
T-Z onlY
T-Z onlY
T-Z onlY
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
all
all
all
all
14
N-R
all
all
Used In
Item
15G201
15U150
15U130
15N117
02 15359
03 25417
02 11452
02 14609
02 14836
02 13111
03 48170
17B059W
03 01147
A03 01400
17B059W
A03 01300
A03 01300A
A03 11000
ADC14001A
ADC14801
A13 02700
A13 02700A
03 01147
A33 11000
02 15582
01Z HXLOKNUT 3/8-16 NYL/SS TYPE NE
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM #10 ZINCPL
FLAWAS#10 .031X7/16ODX.203ID ZINCPL
RDMACSCR 10-24UNC2X3/8SS18-8
CENTSW MOUNTBRACKET
76154C BRKT=CENT SWITCH MT
94222D CENTRIFUGAL SWITCH BRKT-42Q
93381D+BRKT=CENTRIF SWITCH 3621F8P
89391C CENT=SW MTG BRKT
77481C BRKT=CENT-SWITCH MT BND@PRNT
83246C BRACKET=CENT.SW.MT.2SP WASH
RETAIN RING-ROTOR CLIP# SH-62-ST
HOUSING FOR CENTRIFUGAL SWITCH
71103B SHAFT ASSY=CENTSWITCH
RETAIN RING-ROTOR CLIP# SH-62-ST
75491C*HOUSE+BKT+SHAFT=CENSW 42+52U
75491#* HOUSE+BKT+SHAF=CENSW 42DYA
82506T*CENTSWITCH=HOUSING+BRKT 42Q
93381C*C-SWITCH=MNT BRKT+HOUSING
86246C*CENT SW HOUSING & BRKT ASSY
83246C$ HOUSE+BKT+SHAF=CENSW SWE
83246# CENSW HSG+BRKT ASSY 2SPD WAS
HOUSING FOR CENTRIFUGAL SWITCH
75675B$ HOUSE+BKT+SHAF=CENSW CWM
COVER=CENTSW-CADSTL
Description
00S
Parts List, cont.—Centrifugal Switch Assembly
Part Number
Comments
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP701195/2000242V
(Sheet 2 of 2)
102
MSSM0301AE/9126BV
V-BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENTS
È
1. Place a straight edge along the top edge of the belt to be
tested so that it spans both pulleys. Place the tension
tester in the center of the belt and press down on the cap
until the lower o-ring is in line with the straight edge, as
shown.
This instruction is to be used for adjusting the belt tension on the following machine models:
42031WE2
42031SG2
42031WE3
42031SG3
42044WE2
42044SG2
42044WE3
42044SG3
Belt Tension Measurements
Ê
2. Read the setting of the upper o-ring on the lbs scale of the
tension tester.
A belt tension testing device (Milnor® part number 30T001) and a straight edge are required when using these
instructions.
Tension Settings
Ê
3. Compare this value with the acceptable range in the appropriate table. If the belt is brand new (has never been
run), use the range in the Initial Tension column. If the
belt is not brand new, locate the acceptable range in the
Final Tension column.
1. Move the upper o-ring to the topmost position, resting against the
bottom edge of the cap.
2. Find the proper Belt Deflection setting (by machine model and belt
function) in the appropriate table in this section.
Upper o-ring
3. Move the lower o-ring on the tension tester to this deflection setting
on the inches scale.
Deflection
force scale
(read down)
NOTE 2: The instruction sheet provided with the tension testing
device should not be used. Use only the instructions provided herein.
NOTE 3: The reference (ref) codes shown in the tables are for factory
use only.
103
Lower o-ring
ÎFIGURE 2 (MSSM0301AE)
ÎTaking Measurements with
the Tension Tester
4. If the reading on the tension tester is less than the range
shown in the table, the belt is too loose and must be tightened. If the reading is greater than the range shown
in the table, the belt is too tight and must be loosened. Adjust the belt until the reading falls within the acceptable range in the table.
Set the o-rings on the tension testing device (FIGURE 1) as follows:
NOTE 1: The tension testing device is marked on one side in inches
and pounds and on the other side in centimeters and kilograms. All
values in the tables are in inches (in) and pounds (lbs).
Straight edge
Ï42031WE2/WE3 and 42044WE2/WE3 Belt Tension Measurements
Belt Deflection
(inches)
Initial Tension
Final Tension
(LBS)
(REF)
(LBS)
(REF)
Wash/2-Speed Wash
11/64
9.6-13.0
MP3
7.4-10.0
MN
Drain
3/8
8.0-11.0
LP3
6.2-8.5
LN
10.5-14.3
NP3
8.1-11.0
NN
Lower o-ring
Deflection
distance scale
(read up)
Main
50Hz
9/16
60Hz
37/64
Ï42031SG2/SG3 and 42044SG2/SG3 Belt Tension Measurements
Belt Deflection
(inches)
Î IGURE 1 (MSSM0301AE)
F
ÎTension Tester Scales
Initial Tension
Final Tension
(LBS)
(REF)
(LBS)
(REF)
Wash/2-Speed Wash
11/64
9.6-13.0
MP3
7.4-10.0
MN
Drain
3/8
8.0-11.0
LP3
6.2-8.5
LN
E1 (optional)
11/32
9.6-13.0
MP3
7.4-10.0
MN
Upper Jackshaft 50Hz
to
Lower Jackshaft 60Hz
13/16
10.5-14.3
NP3
8.1-11.0
NN
13/16
MSSM0301AE/9126BV (1 of 1)
V-BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENTS
È
1. Place a straight edge along the top edge of the belt to be
tested so that it spans both pulleys. Place the tension
tester in the center of the belt and press down on the cap
until the lower o-ring is in line with the straight edge, as
shown.
This instruction is to be used for adjusting the belt tension on the following machine models:
42031WE2
42031SG2
42031WE3
42031SG3
42044WE2
42044SG2
42044WE3
42044SG3
Belt Tension Measurements
Ê
2. Read the setting of the upper o-ring on the lbs scale of the
tension tester.
A belt tension testing device (Milnor® part number 30T001) and a straight edge are required when using these
instructions.
Tension Settings
Ê
3. Compare this value with the acceptable range in the appropriate table. If the belt is brand new (has never been
run), use the range in the Initial Tension column. If the
belt is not brand new, locate the acceptable range in the
Final Tension column.
1. Move the upper o-ring to the topmost position, resting against the
bottom edge of the cap.
2. Find the proper Belt Deflection setting (by machine model and belt
function) in the appropriate table in this section.
Upper o-ring
3. Move the lower o-ring on the tension tester to this deflection setting
on the inches scale.
Deflection
force scale
(read down)
NOTE 2: The instruction sheet provided with the tension testing
device should not be used. Use only the instructions provided herein.
NOTE 3: The reference (ref) codes shown in the tables are for factory
use only.
Lower o-ring
ÎFIGURE 2 (MSSM0301AE)
ÎTaking Measurements with
the Tension Tester
4. If the reading on the tension tester is less than the range
shown in the table, the belt is too loose and must be tightened. If the reading is greater than the range shown
in the table, the belt is too tight and must be loosened. Adjust the belt until the reading falls within the acceptable range in the table.
Set the o-rings on the tension testing device (FIGURE 1) as follows:
NOTE 1: The tension testing device is marked on one side in inches
and pounds and on the other side in centimeters and kilograms. All
values in the tables are in inches (in) and pounds (lbs).
Straight edge
Ï42031WE2/WE3 and 42044WE2/WE3 Belt Tension Measurements
Belt Deflection
(inches)
Initial Tension
Final Tension
(LBS)
(REF)
(LBS)
(REF)
Wash/2-Speed Wash
11/64
9.6-13.0
MP3
7.4-10.0
MN
Drain
3/8
8.0-11.0
LP3
6.2-8.5
LN
10.5-14.3
NP3
8.1-11.0
NN
Lower o-ring
Deflection
distance scale
(read up)
Main
50Hz
9/16
60Hz
37/64
Ï42031SG2/SG3 and 42044SG2/SG3 Belt Tension Measurements
Belt Deflection
(inches)
Î IGURE 1 (MSSM0301AE)
F
ÎTension Tester Scales
Initial Tension
Final Tension
(LBS)
(REF)
(LBS)
(REF)
Wash/2-Speed Wash
11/64
9.6-13.0
MP3
7.4-10.0
MN
Drain
3/8
8.0-11.0
LP3
6.2-8.5
LN
E1 (optional)
11/32
9.6-13.0
MP3
7.4-10.0
MN
Upper Jackshaft 50Hz
to
Lower Jackshaft 60Hz
13/16
10.5-14.3
NP3
8.1-11.0
NN
13/16
104
MSSMA405AE/8737BV
Belt Tension Measurements
Ê
È-BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENTS
V
FOR 48", 52", 60" AND 72" WASHER-EXTRACTORS
Unbanded Belts
Ë
1. Place a straight edge along the top edge of the belt to be tested so that it spans both pulleys. Place the tension
tester in the center of the belt and press down on the cap until the lower o-ring is in line with the straight
edge, as shown.
This instruction is to be used for adjusting the belt tension on the following machine models:
48036QHE
48036QTG
48036QTH
2. Read the setting of the upper o-ring on the lbs scale of the tension tester.
60044WE3
3. Compare this value with the acceptable range in the appropriate table. If the belt is brand new (has never been
run), use the range in the Initial Tension column. If the belt is not brand new, locate the acceptable range in
the Final Tension column.
48032BHE
48032BTG
48032BTH
52038WE1
52038WTF
52038WTB 52038WTG 52038WTH
60036WE2
60036WE3
60036SG2
60036SG3
60044WE2
72044SG2
72044SG3
72044WE2
72044WE3
72044WTB 72044WTG 72044WTH
60044SG2
60044SG3
4. If the reading on the tension tester is less than the range shown in the table, the belt is too loose and must be
tightened. If the reading is greater than the range shown in the table, the belt is too tight and must be
loosened. Adjust the belt until the reading falls within the acceptable range in the table.
A belt tension testing device (Milnor® part number 30T001) and a straight edge are required when tensioning
unbanded belts.
Tension Settings—Unbanded Belts
Ê
Set the o-rings on the tension testing device (see FIGURE 1) as follows:
1. Move the upper o-ring to the topmost position, resting against the bottom edge
of the cap.
2. Find the proper belt deflection setting (by machine model and belt function) in
the appropriate table below.
Upper o-ring
3. Move the lower o-ring on the tension tester to this deflection setting on the inches scale.
NOTE 1: The tension testing device is marked on one side in inches and pounds
and on the other side in centimeters and kilograms. All values in the tables are in
inches (in.) and pounds (lbs.).
Deflection
force scale
(read down)
Lower o-ring
NOTE 2: The instruction sheet provided with the tension testing device should
not be used. Use only the instructions provided herein.
NOTE 3: The reference (ref.) code shown in the tables are for factory use only.
Deflection
distance
scale
(read up)
Lower o-ring
ÎFIGURE 1 (MSSMA405AE)
ÎTension Settings
105
Straight edge
ÎFIGURE 2 (MSSMA405AE)
ÎMeasuring Belt Tension
MSSMA405AE/8737BV
(1 of 2)
È-BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENTS
V
FOR 48", 52", 60" AND 72" WASHER-EXTRACTORS
Unbanded Belts
Ë
1. Place a straight edge along the top edge of the belt to be tested so that it spans both pulleys. Place the tension
tester in the center of the belt and press down on the cap until the lower o-ring is in line with the straight
edge, as shown.
This instruction is to be used for adjusting the belt tension on the following machine models:
48036QHE
48036QTG
Belt Tension Measurements
Ê
48036QTH
2. Read the setting of the upper o-ring on the lbs scale of the tension tester.
60044WE3
3. Compare this value with the acceptable range in the appropriate table. If the belt is brand new (has never been
run), use the range in the Initial Tension column. If the belt is not brand new, locate the acceptable range in
the Final Tension column.
48032BHE
48032BTG
48032BTH
52038WE1
52038WTF
52038WTB 52038WTG 52038WTH
60036WE2
60036WE3
60036SG2
60036SG3
60044WE2
72044SG2
72044SG3
72044WE2
72044WE3
72044WTB 72044WTG 72044WTH
60044SG2
60044SG3
4. If the reading on the tension tester is less than the range shown in the table, the belt is too loose and must be
tightened. If the reading is greater than the range shown in the table, the belt is too tight and must be
loosened. Adjust the belt until the reading falls within the acceptable range in the table.
A belt tension testing device (Milnor® part number 30T001) and a straight edge are required when tensioning
unbanded belts.
Tension Settings—Unbanded Belts
Ê
Set the o-rings on the tension testing device (see FIGURE 1) as follows:
1. Move the upper o-ring to the topmost position, resting against the bottom edge
of the cap.
2. Find the proper belt deflection setting (by machine model and belt function) in
the appropriate table below.
Upper o-ring
3. Move the lower o-ring on the tension tester to this deflection setting on the inches scale.
NOTE 1: The tension testing device is marked on one side in inches and pounds
and on the other side in centimeters and kilograms. All values in the tables are in
inches (in.) and pounds (lbs.).
Deflection
force scale
(read down)
Lower o-ring
NOTE 2: The instruction sheet provided with the tension testing device should
not be used. Use only the instructions provided herein.
NOTE 3: The reference (ref.) code shown in the tables are for factory use only.
Straight edge
Deflection
distance
scale
(read up)
ÎFIGURE 2 (MSSMA405AE)
ÎMeasuring Belt Tension
Lower o-ring
ÎFIGURE 1 (MSSMA405AE)
ÎTension Settings
106
Tensioning Banded Belts
Ë
Ï
Ï48032BHE, BTG, BTH
Belt
Deflect.
(inches)
48036QHE, QTG, QT
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
Belt
Deflect
(in.)
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
Ï48032BHE, BTG, BTH
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
Belt
Deflect.
(inches)
48036QHE, QTG, QT
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
Belt
Deflect
(in.)
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
WASH/
2 SPEED
WASH
9/32
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
5/16
5.7 - 7.6
JP3
4.4 - 5.9
JN
WASH/
2 SPEED
WASH
1/4
5.7 - 7.6
JP3
4.4 - 5.9
JN
17/64
5.7 - 7.6
JP3
4.4 - 5.9
JN
DRAIN
5/32
5.7 - 7.6
JP3
4.4 - 5.9
JN
5/32
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
DRAIN
3/64
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
33/64
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
E-1
9/32
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
17/64
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
10.5 - 14.3
NP3
8.1 - 11.0
NN
10.5 - 14.3
NP3
8.1 - 11.0
NN
17/32
E-2
39/64
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
5/8
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
3/16
UPPER JACK
TO
LOWER JACK
50C
.
35/64
MAIN
60C
.
LOW
SPEED
EXTRACT
17/32
17/32
13/64
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
9.62 - 13.0
MP3
7.4 - 10.0
MN
BANDED
BELTS
NEED
SPECIAL
INSTRUCTIONS
LOWER JACK
TO
UPPER JACK
Ï52038WE1, WTF, WTB, WTG, WTH
Belt
Deflect.
(inches)
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
60036 + 60044WE2 + WE3
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
Belt
Deflect
(in.)
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
25/64
10.5 - 14.3
NP3
8.1 - 11.0
NN
3/16
5.7 - 7.6
JP3
4.4 - 5.9
JN
DRAIN
5/32
10.5 - 14.3
NP3
8.1 - 11.0
NN
13/32
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
E1
1/4
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
17/64
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
E2
1/2
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
11/32
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
50C
11/16
18.2 - 26.0
SP3
14.0 - 20.0
SN
43/64
60C
23/32
16.9 - 20.8
RP3
13.0 -16.0
RN
45/64
16.9 - 20.8
RP3
13.0 - 16.0
RN
MAIN
107
Ï52038WE1, WTF, WTB, WTG, WTH
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
WASH/
2 SPEED
WASH
BANDED
BELTS
NEED
SPECIAL
INSTRUCTIONS
Belt
Deflect.
(inches)
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
60036 + 60044WE2 + WE3
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
Belt
Deflect
(in.)
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
WASH/
2 SPEED
WASH
15/64
5.7 - 7.6
JP3
4.4 - 5.9
JN
15/64
5.7 - 7.6
JP3
4.4 - 5.9
JN
DRAIN
13/32
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
25/64
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
E1
17/64
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
17/64
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
E2
5/16
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
5/16
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
50C
45/64
16.9 - 20.8
RP3
13.0 -16.0
RN
3/4
16.9 - 20.8
RP3
13.0 - 16.0
RN
60C
11/16
16.9 - 20.8
RP3
13.0 -16.0
RN
23/32
16.9 - 20.8
RP3
13.0 - 16.0
RN
MAIN
Tensioning Banded Belts
Ë
Ï
Ï48032BHE, BTG, BTH
Belt
Deflect.
(inches)
48036QHE, QTG, QT
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
Belt
Deflect
(in.)
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
Ï48032BHE, BTG, BTH
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
Belt
Deflect.
(inches)
48036QHE, QTG, QT
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
Belt
Deflect
(in.)
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
WASH/
2 SPEED
WASH
9/32
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
5/16
5.7 - 7.6
JP3
4.4 - 5.9
JN
WASH/
2 SPEED
WASH
1/4
5.7 - 7.6
JP3
4.4 - 5.9
JN
17/64
5.7 - 7.6
JP3
4.4 - 5.9
JN
DRAIN
5/32
5.7 - 7.6
JP3
4.4 - 5.9
JN
5/32
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
DRAIN
3/64
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
33/64
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
E-1
9/32
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
17/64
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
10.5 - 14.3
NP3
8.1 - 11.0
NN
10.5 - 14.3
NP3
8.1 - 11.0
NN
17/32
E-2
39/64
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
5/8
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
3/16
UPPER JACK
TO
LOWER JACK
50C
.
35/64
MAIN
60C
.
LOW
SPEED
EXTRACT
17/32
17/32
13/64
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
9.62 - 13.0
MP3
7.4 - 10.0
MN
BANDED
BELTS
NEED
SPECIAL
INSTRUCTIONS
LOWER JACK
TO
UPPER JACK
Ï52038WE1, WTF, WTB, WTG, WTH
Belt
Deflect.
(inches)
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
60036 + 60044WE2 + WE3
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
Belt
Deflect
(in.)
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
25/64
10.5 - 14.3
NP3
8.1 - 11.0
NN
3/16
5.7 - 7.6
JP3
4.4 - 5.9
JN
DRAIN
5/32
10.5 - 14.3
NP3
8.1 - 11.0
NN
13/32
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
E1
1/4
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
17/64
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
E2
1/2
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
11/32
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
50C
11/16
18.2 - 26.0
SP3
14.0 - 20.0
SN
43/64
60C
23/32
16.9 - 20.8
RP3
13.0 -16.0
RN
45/64
16.9 - 20.8
RP3
13.0 - 16.0
RN
MAIN
Ï52038WE1, WTF, WTB, WTG, WTH
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
WASH/
2 SPEED
WASH
BANDED
BELTS
NEED
SPECIAL
INSTRUCTIONS
Belt
Deflect.
(inches)
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
60036 + 60044WE2 + WE3
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
Belt
Deflect
(in.)
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
Initial
Tension
(lbs.)
(ref.)
WASH/
2 SPEED
WASH
15/64
5.7 - 7.6
JP3
4.4 - 5.9
JN
15/64
5.7 - 7.6
JP3
4.4 - 5.9
JN
DRAIN
13/32
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
25/64
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
E1
17/64
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
17/64
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
E2
5/16
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
5/16
6.6 - 9.2
KP3
5.1 - 7.1
KN
50C
45/64
16.9 - 20.8
RP3
13.0 -16.0
RN
3/4
16.9 - 20.8
RP3
13.0 - 16.0
RN
60C
11/16
16.9 - 20.8
RP3
13.0 -16.0
RN
23/32
16.9 - 20.8
RP3
13.0 - 16.0
RN
MAIN
108
Section
Bearing Assemblies
109
4
MSSM0303AE/8451BV
È AIN BEARING AND SEAL REPLACEMENT
M
FOR DIVIDED CYLINDER MACHINES
This section applies to the front and rear cylinder shaft bearings of all divided cylinder machines (Rapid Load,
Staph-guard®, dye machines, etc.). It does not apply to jackshaft bearings, idler shaft bearings or bearings on open
pocket machines.
The bearings covered by this section are double row, spherical roller, self aligning bearings; Koya, SKF, FMC,
Torrington or equal. Referring to FIGURE 1, the rear (clean side on Staph-guard® models) bearing is firmly held
in the bearing housing (bearing and seal carrier) by the shaft seal holder, preventing axial movement. The front (soil
side on Staph-guard® models) bearing is free to move axially in the bearing housing to accommodate thermal
expansion of the shaft during operation and is thus the “floating” bearing. Both bearings are held in place on the
tapered portion of the shaft by a bearing lockwasher and locknut.
The front and rear bearings are each protected from contamination from wash water by three spring loaded,
lip type seals and a shaft seal leak-off cavity (that carries off any water that leaks past the main water seals) as shown
in FIGURE 1.
Access to the bearings and seals for lubrication is provided by the various grease passages. Excess lubricant is
excreted through the bearing and seal cavity leak-offs as shown on FIGURE 1. The bearings and seals must be
lubricated regularly and the leak-off cavities flushed out periodically through the plugged cleanout connections, in
strict accordance with the preventive maintenance procedures elsewhere.
If bearing replacement becomes necessary due to wear, it is essential that the bearings and seals are replaced.
Seal replacement requires removal of the bearing housing and seal sleeve. (In rare instances where the seals are
known to be in good condition, it is not necessary to remove the bearing housing, seals or seal sleeve when a bearing
is replaced.) A pulling fixture is required to remove the bearing housing. A set of guide rods, a seal sleeve
setting fixture and a bearing setting fixture are required for reinstallation of the housing. These tools are
available for rental or purchase from the Milnor® factory and are pictured elsewhere in this section. Contact the
factory two weeks in advance of repairs, when ordering these tools.
This maintenance is performed in the following order:
1. Remove old bearing(s). When removing both bearings, remove the front (soil side) bearing first.
2. Remove bearing housings, seal sleeves, and seals.
3. If both bearings were removed, install the bearing housing, seal sleeve, seals, and new bearing on the rear
(clean side).
Cap
Bolt
Bearing
Housing
(Bearing and
Seal Carrier)
Rear Bearing Assembly
Front Bearing Assembly
Shell
Rear
Shell
Front
Seal Sleeves
Bearing Cover
4. Install the bearing housing, seal sleeve, seals, and new bearing on the front (soil side).
Cap Bolt
5. Tighten bearing(s).
Bearing
Housing
(Bearing and
Seal Carrier)
See the Main Bearing Assembly drawing for your machine for bearing component part numbers.
Seal
Bearing
Lock-nut
Bearing
Lock-washer
Shaft Seal
Holder
Shaft
Front Bearing
(floating)
Seals
Bearing and Seal
Cavity Leak-offs
Shaft Seal
Leak-off
Cavities
Rear Bearing
(fixed)
Bearing and Seal
Cavity Leak-offs
ÎFigure 1 (MSSM0303AE)
Î ross Section View of Front and Rear Bearing Assemblies
C
(Bearing Assembly for 60" and 72" WED Shown. Others similar.)
110
Removing the Bearing (Front or Rear)
Ê
1. Loosen, then remove the main drive belts and
cylinder shaft pulley (if applicable) by lowering the
drive base with the jacking bolts. Do not attempt to
pry belts off with a pry bar or by rolling the sheave.
Remove the bearing cover (or shaft seal holder) to
expose the bearing.
2. Bend back the locking tang on the bearing lockwasher then remove the locknut and lockwasher.
3. The center tapped hole in the shaft end is an oil passage through which oil may be forced between the
tapered shaft and the bearing inner race. Install a
pipe fitting into this tapped hole as shown in figure
to the right. Using a “Porto-Power” or similar hand
operated hydraulic pump, force fluid into the passage. Pump hard to build up fluid pressure. This
pressure will cause the inner race to expand slightly; just enough to free the tapered surfaces and
allow the bearing to slip off easily. If the bearing is
not readily removed, remove the front water level
ÎFIGURE 2 (MSSM0303AE)
ÎConnection From Hydraulic Pump to
Assist in Bearing Removal
MSSM0303AE/8451BV
(1 of 5)
È AIN BEARING AND SEAL REPLACEMENT
M
FOR DIVIDED CYLINDER MACHINES
This section applies to the front and rear cylinder shaft bearings of all divided cylinder machines (Rapid Load,
Staph-guard®, dye machines, etc.). It does not apply to jackshaft bearings, idler shaft bearings or bearings on open
pocket machines.
The bearings covered by this section are double row, spherical roller, self aligning bearings; Koya, SKF, FMC,
Torrington or equal. Referring to FIGURE 1, the rear (clean side on Staph-guard® models) bearing is firmly held
in the bearing housing (bearing and seal carrier) by the shaft seal holder, preventing axial movement. The front (soil
side on Staph-guard® models) bearing is free to move axially in the bearing housing to accommodate thermal
expansion of the shaft during operation and is thus the “floating” bearing. Both bearings are held in place on the
tapered portion of the shaft by a bearing lockwasher and locknut.
The front and rear bearings are each protected from contamination from wash water by three spring loaded,
lip type seals and a shaft seal leak-off cavity (that carries off any water that leaks past the main water seals) as shown
in FIGURE 1.
Access to the bearings and seals for lubrication is provided by the various grease passages. Excess lubricant is
excreted through the bearing and seal cavity leak-offs as shown on FIGURE 1. The bearings and seals must be
lubricated regularly and the leak-off cavities flushed out periodically through the plugged cleanout connections, in
strict accordance with the preventive maintenance procedures elsewhere.
If bearing replacement becomes necessary due to wear, it is essential that the bearings and seals are replaced.
Seal replacement requires removal of the bearing housing and seal sleeve. (In rare instances where the seals are
known to be in good condition, it is not necessary to remove the bearing housing, seals or seal sleeve when a bearing
is replaced.) A pulling fixture is required to remove the bearing housing. A set of guide rods, a seal sleeve
setting fixture and a bearing setting fixture are required for reinstallation of the housing. These tools are
available for rental or purchase from the Milnor® factory and are pictured elsewhere in this section. Contact the
factory two weeks in advance of repairs, when ordering these tools.
This maintenance is performed in the following order:
1. Remove old bearing(s). When removing both bearings, remove the front (soil side) bearing first.
2. Remove bearing housings, seal sleeves, and seals.
3. If both bearings were removed, install the bearing housing, seal sleeve, seals, and new bearing on the rear
(clean side).
Cap
Bolt
Bearing
Housing
(Bearing and
Seal Carrier)
Rear Bearing Assembly
Front Bearing Assembly
Shell
Rear
Shell
Front
Seal Sleeves
Bearing Cover
4. Install the bearing housing, seal sleeve, seals, and new bearing on the front (soil side).
Cap Bolt
5. Tighten bearing(s).
Bearing
Housing
(Bearing and
Seal Carrier)
See the Main Bearing Assembly drawing for your machine for bearing component part numbers.
Seal
Bearing
Lock-nut
Bearing
Lock-washer
Shaft Seal
Holder
Shaft
Front Bearing
(floating)
Seals
Bearing and Seal
Cavity Leak-offs
Shaft Seal
Leak-off
Cavities
Rear Bearing
(fixed)
Bearing and Seal
Cavity Leak-offs
ÎFigure 1 (MSSM0303AE)
Î ross Section View of Front and Rear Bearing Assemblies
C
(Bearing Assembly for 60" and 72" WED Shown. Others similar.)
Removing the Bearing (Front or Rear)
Ê
1. Loosen, then remove the main drive belts and
cylinder shaft pulley (if applicable) by lowering the
drive base with the jacking bolts. Do not attempt to
pry belts off with a pry bar or by rolling the sheave.
Remove the bearing cover (or shaft seal holder) to
expose the bearing.
2. Bend back the locking tang on the bearing lockwasher then remove the locknut and lockwasher.
3. The center tapped hole in the shaft end is an oil passage through which oil may be forced between the
tapered shaft and the bearing inner race. Install a
pipe fitting into this tapped hole as shown in figure
to the right. Using a “Porto-Power” or similar hand
operated hydraulic pump, force fluid into the passage. Pump hard to build up fluid pressure. This
pressure will cause the inner race to expand slightly; just enough to free the tapered surfaces and
allow the bearing to slip off easily. If the bearing is
not readily removed, remove the front water level
111
ÎFIGURE 2 (MSSM0303AE)
ÎConnection From Hydraulic Pump to
Assist in Bearing Removal
inspection plate and use a timber to pry up the cylinder to remove cylinder weight from the bearings. Once
the bearing is removed, the cylinder drops only approximately 1/32" before the shaft comes to rest on the
shaft support.
4. Slide the bearing off of the shaft and if it is to be reused, place it on a clean surface and cover with a clean,
lint free cloth.
Removing the Bearing Housing (Bearing and Seal
Ê
Carrier), Seal Sleeve, and Seals (Front or Rear)
NOTE: Step 2a or 2b below will cause the bearing housing to slide away from the shell. Shims were placed
under one or more of the three bearing housing pads during factory assembly to align the housing and insure
its being exactly parallel with the shaft. When removing the bearing housing, be sure to keep these shims
separate and identified so that they may be returned to their proper location, otherwise the bearing
and seal will be out of line and may be damaged after a short operating period. As a precaution in case
the shims are lost during disassembly, you will find stamped next to the bearing housing the proper thickness
of shims required (if any) under each adjacent bearing housing pad. The stamped number indicates the shim
thickness in thousandths of an inch. For example, the number “38” indicates that 38/1000 (.038") shims
would be required under this pad.
These procedures require the use of a pulling fixture and guide rods available from the Milnor® factory. With
the bearing cover (or shaft seal holder) and the bearing removed, proceed as follows:
2a. Tighten all four hexnuts on the threaded rods such that the pulling fixture plate is pressed against the shaft
end. With an impact wrench, tighten down on the center bolt until the housing slides out, or
1. Remove the three bearing housing cap bolts and the grease lines from the bearing housing front plate. Install
guide rods in two of the bolt holes, as shown in FIGURE 3.
2b. If no impact wrench is available, simply continue to tighten down on each of the four hexnuts behind the
pulling fixture plate, alternately and progressively, until the housing slides out. It may be necessary to place
a spacer (approx. two inches long) between the plate and the shaft to provide enough clearance between the
plate and the bearing housing.
2. Install the pulling fixture as shown in FIGURE 4, by placing each of the four threaded rods through a hole in
the steel plate with hexnuts to the outside of the plate then screwing each rod into the appropriate tapped
hole in the bearing housing (same holes as used to mount the bearing cover or shaft seal holder).
3. Once the bearing housing is free of the shell, carefully slide it off of the guide rods and place on a clean work
surface.
4. The seal sleeve will almost always remain on the shaft when the housing is removed. Remove the seal sleeve
taking care not to damage or scar it and place it on a clean work surface.
Precautions for Bearing Replacement
Ê
The most important ingredient in successful bearing and seal installation is cleanliness. The bearing housing
must be free of all foreign matter. The grease and leak-off passages must be blown clear and all foreign matter
removed. You must have a clean work area. Keep your hands and tools free from grit and grime. Wash your hands
before starting and as required during these procedures. Foreign matter is, without doubt, the most frequent cause
of bearing failure, and one over which the manufacturer has no control.
Where cleaning is required, bearings, bearing housings and seal sleeves may be cleaned with the following
solvents or cleaning agents (in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations as such substances are
generally toxic and/or explosive under certain conditions):
ÎFIGURE 3 (MSSM0303AE)
ÎTwo Bearing Housing Guide
Rods in Position
ÎFIGURE 4 (MSSM0303AE)
ÎBearing Housing Pulling
Fixture in Position
Benzene
Chlorethane
Freons
Gasoline
Kerosene
Mineral Spirts
Naptha
Tricholorethylene
Do not, however, expose any components to the above substances for more than 24 hours and only use at room
temperature. Never use the following solvents or cleaning agents: alcohols, cresols, phenols, flouro propanols, or
other similar chemicals or mixtures.
NOTE: Hammer blows, overheating, or improper use of force can damage precision parts.
112
inspection plate and use a timber to pry up the cylinder to remove cylinder weight from the bearings. Once
the bearing is removed, the cylinder drops only approximately 1/32" before the shaft comes to rest on the
shaft support.
4. Slide the bearing off of the shaft and if it is to be reused, place it on a clean surface and cover with a clean,
lint free cloth.
Removing the Bearing Housing (Bearing and Seal
Ê
Carrier), Seal Sleeve, and Seals (Front or Rear)
NOTE: Step 2a or 2b below will cause the bearing housing to slide away from the shell. Shims were placed
under one or more of the three bearing housing pads during factory assembly to align the housing and insure
its being exactly parallel with the shaft. When removing the bearing housing, be sure to keep these shims
separate and identified so that they may be returned to their proper location, otherwise the bearing
and seal will be out of line and may be damaged after a short operating period. As a precaution in case
the shims are lost during disassembly, you will find stamped next to the bearing housing the proper thickness
of shims required (if any) under each adjacent bearing housing pad. The stamped number indicates the shim
thickness in thousandths of an inch. For example, the number “38” indicates that 38/1000 (.038") shims
would be required under this pad.
These procedures require the use of a pulling fixture and guide rods available from the Milnor® factory. With
the bearing cover (or shaft seal holder) and the bearing removed, proceed as follows:
2a. Tighten all four hexnuts on the threaded rods such that the pulling fixture plate is pressed against the shaft
end. With an impact wrench, tighten down on the center bolt until the housing slides out, or
1. Remove the three bearing housing cap bolts and the grease lines from the bearing housing front plate. Install
guide rods in two of the bolt holes, as shown in FIGURE 3.
2b. If no impact wrench is available, simply continue to tighten down on each of the four hexnuts behind the
pulling fixture plate, alternately and progressively, until the housing slides out. It may be necessary to place
a spacer (approx. two inches long) between the plate and the shaft to provide enough clearance between the
plate and the bearing housing.
2. Install the pulling fixture as shown in FIGURE 4, by placing each of the four threaded rods through a hole in
the steel plate with hexnuts to the outside of the plate then screwing each rod into the appropriate tapped
hole in the bearing housing (same holes as used to mount the bearing cover or shaft seal holder).
3. Once the bearing housing is free of the shell, carefully slide it off of the guide rods and place on a clean work
surface.
4. The seal sleeve will almost always remain on the shaft when the housing is removed. Remove the seal sleeve
taking care not to damage or scar it and place it on a clean work surface.
Precautions for Bearing Replacement
Ê
The most important ingredient in successful bearing and seal installation is cleanliness. The bearing housing
must be free of all foreign matter. The grease and leak-off passages must be blown clear and all foreign matter
removed. You must have a clean work area. Keep your hands and tools free from grit and grime. Wash your hands
before starting and as required during these procedures. Foreign matter is, without doubt, the most frequent cause
of bearing failure, and one over which the manufacturer has no control.
Where cleaning is required, bearings, bearing housings and seal sleeves may be cleaned with the following
solvents or cleaning agents (in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations as such substances are
generally toxic and/or explosive under certain conditions):
ÎFIGURE 3 (MSSM0303AE)
ÎTwo Bearing Housing Guide
Rods in Position
ÎFIGURE 4 (MSSM0303AE)
ÎBearing Housing Pulling
Fixture in Position
Benzene
Chlorethane
Freons
Gasoline
Kerosene
Mineral Spirts
Naptha
Tricholorethylene
Do not, however, expose any components to the above substances for more than 24 hours and only use at room
temperature. Never use the following solvents or cleaning agents: alcohols, cresols, phenols, flouro propanols, or
other similar chemicals or mixtures.
NOTE: Hammer blows, overheating, or improper use of force can damage precision parts.
113
Replacing the Bearing Housing, Seal Sleeve,
Ê
and Seals (Front or Rear)
1. With the seal sleeve removed, press all old seals out of the bearing housing. Remove the large o-ring from the
outside of the housing. Thoroughly clean the bearing housing and flush out all grease passages to make certain they are unblocked. Remove the o-rings from the inside of the seal sleeve and clean the seal sleeve.
2. While the bearing housing is dissassembled, charge all grease passages with grease. This will assure that there
are no blockages.
6. With two of the three temporary guide rods in position on the shell, place the bearing housing onto the guide
rods and install the seal sleeve setting fixture on to the bearing housing as shown in FIGURE 7. The seal
sleeve setting fixture prevents the seal sleeve from being pushed out of the housing as the housing is inserted into the shell. Note that the seal sleeve setting fixture and the bearing setting fixture are very similar,
but the seal sleeve setting fixture has a longer hub.
7. With a clean, lint free cloth, apply a coating of light machine oil to the outside of the housing, to assist in installation. Push the housing into the shell as shown in FIGURE 8. Once the housing is far enough into the
shell to support itself, place any shims back into position between the housing and the shell. Remove, then
replace guide rods if required to place shims under bearing housing pads.
3. Replace the o-rings in the seal sleeve and the large o-ring on the outside of the bearing housing. Replace with
new o-rings if the old ones are worn.
4. Press new seals into the bearing housing. You may gently work the seals in with a mallet and metal drift as
shown in FIGURE 5.
Each seal must be of the proper material and face the proper direction. The type of material
and direction the seal faces may differ from one seal to another within the same bearing
housing and also from one type of machine to another. It is essential to consult the Main
Bearing Assembly drawing for your machine for the proper part number and direction to
face each seal.
5. Slip the seal sleeve into the bearing housing as shown in FIGURE 6 below right, using care not to damage or
fold under any of the seal lips. Be sure to insert the sleeve in the proper direction (see Bearing Assembly drawing).
ÎFIGURE 7 (MSSM0303AE)
IÎnstalling the Bearing Housing Setting
Fixture onto Housing (42" machine shown)
ÎFIGURE 8 (MSSM0303AE)
Î ushing the Bearing Housing into the
P
Shell (60" Rapid-load machine shown)
8. Install the third guide rod, spacers if required, and hexnuts, using these to seat the housing fully, as shown
in FIGURE 9. Remove the seal sleeve setting fixture.
9. Remove the guide rods and install the bearing housing
cap bolts. See “BOLT TORQUE REQUIREMENTS” elsewhere, for proper torques.
10. With the grease gun, pump grease into the inner portion of the bearing cavity, such that when the bearing is installed, the space between the bearing and
the seals will be approximately 1/3 full of grease.
ÎFIGURE 5 (MSSM0303AE)
ÎInstalling Seals in
Bearing Housing
Î IGURE 6 (MSSM0303AE)
F
ÎInstalling Seal Sleeve in
Bearing Housing
NOTE: If both housings are being installed, install the rear housing first.
114
11 Proceed to “Measuring Unmounted Clearance . . .”
below, even if both the front and rear bearings are
being replaced. Once the rear bearing is installed,
the bearing housing replacement procedures may
then be repeated for the front (soil side) bearing housing.
ÎFIGURE 9 (MSSM0303AE)
Î ightening the Bearing Housing
T
into the Shell (42" machine shown)
Replacing the Bearing Housing, Seal Sleeve,
Ê
and Seals (Front or Rear)
1. With the seal sleeve removed, press all old seals out of the bearing housing. Remove the large o-ring from the
outside of the housing. Thoroughly clean the bearing housing and flush out all grease passages to make certain they are unblocked. Remove the o-rings from the inside of the seal sleeve and clean the seal sleeve.
2. While the bearing housing is dissassembled, charge all grease passages with grease. This will assure that there
are no blockages.
6. With two of the three temporary guide rods in position on the shell, place the bearing housing onto the guide
rods and install the seal sleeve setting fixture on to the bearing housing as shown in FIGURE 7. The seal
sleeve setting fixture prevents the seal sleeve from being pushed out of the housing as the housing is inserted into the shell. Note that the seal sleeve setting fixture and the bearing setting fixture are very similar,
but the seal sleeve setting fixture has a longer hub.
7. With a clean, lint free cloth, apply a coating of light machine oil to the outside of the housing, to assist in installation. Push the housing into the shell as shown in FIGURE 8. Once the housing is far enough into the
shell to support itself, place any shims back into position between the housing and the shell. Remove, then
replace guide rods if required to place shims under bearing housing pads.
3. Replace the o-rings in the seal sleeve and the large o-ring on the outside of the bearing housing. Replace with
new o-rings if the old ones are worn.
4. Press new seals into the bearing housing. You may gently work the seals in with a mallet and metal drift as
shown in FIGURE 5.
Each seal must be of the proper material and face the proper direction. The type of material
and direction the seal faces may differ from one seal to another within the same bearing
housing and also from one type of machine to another. It is essential to consult the Main
Bearing Assembly drawing for your machine for the proper part number and direction to
face each seal.
5. Slip the seal sleeve into the bearing housing as shown in FIGURE 6 below right, using care not to damage or
fold under any of the seal lips. Be sure to insert the sleeve in the proper direction (see Bearing Assembly drawing).
ÎFIGURE 7 (MSSM0303AE)
IÎnstalling the Bearing Housing Setting
Fixture onto Housing (42" machine shown)
ÎFIGURE 8 (MSSM0303AE)
Î ushing the Bearing Housing into the
P
Shell (60" Rapid-load machine shown)
8. Install the third guide rod, spacers if required, and hexnuts, using these to seat the housing fully, as shown
in FIGURE 9. Remove the seal sleeve setting fixture.
9. Remove the guide rods and install the bearing housing
cap bolts. See “BOLT TORQUE REQUIREMENTS” elsewhere, for proper torques.
10. With the grease gun, pump grease into the inner portion of the bearing cavity, such that when the bearing is installed, the space between the bearing and
the seals will be approximately 1/3 full of grease.
ÎFIGURE 5 (MSSM0303AE)
ÎInstalling Seals in
Bearing Housing
Î IGURE 6 (MSSM0303AE)
F
ÎInstalling Seal Sleeve in
Bearing Housing
NOTE: If both housings are being installed, install the rear housing first.
11 Proceed to “Measuring Unmounted Clearance . . .”
below, even if both the front and rear bearings are
being replaced. Once the rear bearing is installed,
the bearing housing replacement procedures may
then be repeated for the front (soil side) bearing housing.
115
ÎFIGURE 9 (MSSM0303AE)
Î ightening the Bearing Housing
T
into the Shell (42" machine shown)
Measuring Unmounted Clearance and
Ê
Setting Bearing (Front or Rear)
The bearings used on Milnor® washer and dye extractors are the very best anti-friction devices available for
these applications. However, the anti-frictional characteristics of the bearings will be reduced if they are not properly installed. It is of critical importance when installing these tapered roller bearings, to accomplish the following (A
step by step procedure follows this synopsis):
NOTE 1: The clearances listed in the chart are industry standards and therefore apply to all brands of
bearings supplied by Milnor®. If other sources of bearings are used, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions
for proper clearances.
NOTE 2: To locate your bearing on the chart, match the first five characters of the manufacturer’s part
number (not the Milnor® part number) with those in the chart. For example, for a manufacturer’s part
number 22217LBK, find under “Manufacturer Part Number” the line “22217 . . .”
ÏTable of Bearing Clearances
1. Accurately measure the unmounted internal clearance of the bearing (gap between the rollers and outer race
before the bearing is installed). This is an essential quality control measure.
2. Calculate the final internal clearance by subtracting the specified clearance reduction (amount that the internal
clearance must be reduced when the bearing is tightened onto the tapered shaft) from the unmounted
clearance.
3. Tighten the bearing onto the shaft until the final internal clearance as calculated is achieved and verified by
measurement.
These measurements are taken in thousandths of an inch. Although this requires precise work, attention to
detail and a good set of feeler gauges, it is the only way to insure that the bearing will be tightened onto the shaft to
precisely the right tension. If you have any questions on performing the measurements or adjustments described
below, your local bearing supplier or the Milnor® factory can assist you. Although these procedures require
precision over and above that normally required for laundry room maintenance, they are standard in bearing installation and absolutely essential:
NOTE: Step 1 which follows, requires a good set of feeler
gauges including .001" through .010" in thousandths of an inch
increments. Contact your local bearing supplier.
Minimum
Maximum
Minimum
Maximum
22330 . . .
.0071
.0091
.002
.003
22213 . . .
.0030
.0039
.001
.002
22216 . . .
.0028
.0037
.001
.002
22217 . . .
.0044
.0057
.0015
.0025
22312 . . .
.0030
.0039
.001
.002
22316 . . .
.0037
.0049
.001
.002
22320 . . .
.0044
.0057
.0015
.0025
22328 . . .
.0063
.0081
.002
.003
23220 . . .
.0044
.0057
.0015
.0025
5. Hand pack the bearing with grease by rotating the inner race and rollers, forcing grease between all rollers.
NOTE: The bearing will be set into position in Step 6. If both front and rear bearings are being installed,
the rear (clean side on Staph-guard® models) bearing should be set in position first because it is the fixed
bearing.
ÎFIGURE 10 (MSSM0303AE)
ÎMeasuring Bearing
Unmounted Clearance
(bridge for 42" machine shown)
3. Compare the measured clearance with the “Unmounted Clearance” in the table below. If the measured
clearance is not within the range shown, do not use the bearing. Contact your bearing supplier for an exchange.
116
Clearance Reduction
4. Calculate and record the final internal clearance by deducting the “Clearance Reduction” for your bearing (see
above chart) from the measured clearance. For example, if you measured .004 and the clearance reduction is
.001 to .002, then the final internal clearance should be between .002 and .003.
1. When you are ready to proceed (and not before) remove the
new bearing from it’s box or protective wrapping. Do not attempt to clean the bearing or wash out the preservative coating. On a clean work surface, stand the bearing on edge and
insert a .003 feeler gauge into the bearing as shown in FIGURE 10, at right. The gauge should be inserted just inside
the outer race between two rollers and worked through to the
opposite row of rollers. Rotate the inner race of the opposite
row so that the end of the feeler gauge is caught between a
roller and the outer race.
2. Try to pull the gauge straight out. If it comes out, increase the
size of the gauge by .001". If it does not come out, decrease
the gauge by .001". The thickest feeler gauge that will come
out is the unmounted internal clearance of the bearing.
Unmounted Clearance
Manufacturer Part Number
6. Set the bearing into the housing (with the taper facing the proper direction) and seat the bearing using the bearing setting fixture. This fixture is installed in similar fashion to the seal sleeve setting fixture. If you have
just set the rear bearing and the front bearing housing is yet to be installed, leave the bearing setting fixture
in place for now.
7. If you have just set the rear bearing and the front bearing housing is yet to be installed, repeat all steps in bearing housing installation, measuring unmounted clearance and setting bearing, for the front bearing and housing. The bearing setting fixture should not be removed from the rear housing until it is needed to seat the
front bearing. This will prevent rear bearing components from being pushed out of position by the shaft as
the front housing components are seated. Remove the bearing setting fixture from the front housing once the
bearing is seated.
Measuring Unmounted Clearance and
Ê
Setting Bearing (Front or Rear)
The bearings used on Milnor® washer and dye extractors are the very best anti-friction devices available for
these applications. However, the anti-frictional characteristics of the bearings will be reduced if they are not properly installed. It is of critical importance when installing these tapered roller bearings, to accomplish the following (A
step by step procedure follows this synopsis):
NOTE 1: The clearances listed in the chart are industry standards and therefore apply to all brands of
bearings supplied by Milnor®. If other sources of bearings are used, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions
for proper clearances.
NOTE 2: To locate your bearing on the chart, match the first five characters of the manufacturer’s part
number (not the Milnor® part number) with those in the chart. For example, for a manufacturer’s part
number 22217LBK, find under “Manufacturer Part Number” the line “22217 . . .”
ÏTable of Bearing Clearances
1. Accurately measure the unmounted internal clearance of the bearing (gap between the rollers and outer race
before the bearing is installed). This is an essential quality control measure.
2. Calculate the final internal clearance by subtracting the specified clearance reduction (amount that the internal
clearance must be reduced when the bearing is tightened onto the tapered shaft) from the unmounted
clearance.
3. Tighten the bearing onto the shaft until the final internal clearance as calculated is achieved and verified by
measurement.
These measurements are taken in thousandths of an inch. Although this requires precise work, attention to
detail and a good set of feeler gauges, it is the only way to insure that the bearing will be tightened onto the shaft to
precisely the right tension. If you have any questions on performing the measurements or adjustments described
below, your local bearing supplier or the Milnor® factory can assist you. Although these procedures require
precision over and above that normally required for laundry room maintenance, they are standard in bearing installation and absolutely essential:
NOTE: Step 1 which follows, requires a good set of feeler
gauges including .001" through .010" in thousandths of an inch
increments. Contact your local bearing supplier.
Clearance Reduction
Minimum
Maximum
Minimum
Maximum
22330 . . .
.0071
.0091
.002
.003
22213 . . .
.0030
.0039
.001
.002
22216 . . .
.0028
.0037
.001
.002
22217 . . .
.0044
.0057
.0015
.0025
22312 . . .
.0030
.0039
.001
.002
22316 . . .
.0037
.0049
.001
.002
22320 . . .
.0044
.0057
.0015
.0025
22328 . . .
.0063
.0081
.002
.003
23220 . . .
.0044
.0057
.0015
.0025
4. Calculate and record the final internal clearance by deducting the “Clearance Reduction” for your bearing (see
above chart) from the measured clearance. For example, if you measured .004 and the clearance reduction is
.001 to .002, then the final internal clearance should be between .002 and .003.
1. When you are ready to proceed (and not before) remove the
new bearing from it’s box or protective wrapping. Do not attempt to clean the bearing or wash out the preservative coating. On a clean work surface, stand the bearing on edge and
insert a .003 feeler gauge into the bearing as shown in FIGURE 10, at right. The gauge should be inserted just inside
the outer race between two rollers and worked through to the
opposite row of rollers. Rotate the inner race of the opposite
row so that the end of the feeler gauge is caught between a
roller and the outer race.
2. Try to pull the gauge straight out. If it comes out, increase the
size of the gauge by .001". If it does not come out, decrease
the gauge by .001". The thickest feeler gauge that will come
out is the unmounted internal clearance of the bearing.
Unmounted Clearance
Manufacturer Part Number
5. Hand pack the bearing with grease by rotating the inner race and rollers, forcing grease between all rollers.
NOTE: The bearing will be set into position in Step 6. If both front and rear bearings are being installed,
the rear (clean side on Staph-guard® models) bearing should be set in position first because it is the fixed
bearing.
ÎFIGURE 10 (MSSM0303AE)
ÎMeasuring Bearing
Unmounted Clearance
(bridge for 42" machine shown)
3. Compare the measured clearance with the “Unmounted Clearance” in the table below. If the measured
clearance is not within the range shown, do not use the bearing. Contact your bearing supplier for an exchange.
6. Set the bearing into the housing (with the taper facing the proper direction) and seat the bearing using the bearing setting fixture. This fixture is installed in similar fashion to the seal sleeve setting fixture. If you have
just set the rear bearing and the front bearing housing is yet to be installed, leave the bearing setting fixture
in place for now.
7. If you have just set the rear bearing and the front bearing housing is yet to be installed, repeat all steps in bearing housing installation, measuring unmounted clearance and setting bearing, for the front bearing and housing. The bearing setting fixture should not be removed from the rear housing until it is needed to seat the
front bearing. This will prevent rear bearing components from being pushed out of position by the shaft as
the front housing components are seated. Remove the bearing setting fixture from the front housing once the
bearing is seated.
117
Tightening Bearing(s) (Front and/or Rear)
Ê
1. Once both bearings are seated, or if only one bearing was replaced, install the bearing lockwasher(s) and locknut(s). Use a hammer and a metal drift as shown in FIGURE 11, to tighten the locknut. It is imperative to
only tap lightly and to assure that metal chips from the drift or locknut do not fall off and contaminate the bearing. If both bearings are being tightened, work between the front and rear bearings and
turn the basket by hand periodically, while tightening the locknut(s).
2. After tightening the bearing(s) onto the tapered shaft, check the internal clearance as pictured in FIGURE 12,
by working a feeler gauge between the outer race and a roller of the outer row then between the outer race
and a roller of the inner row.
NOTE: Sometimes, when setting the bearings, all the load is taken by only one row of rollers (although the
load would quickly equalize on both rows after the machine has run for only a few minutes). If all the load
is taken by one row, you will get an erroneous clearance reading. It is therefore, necessary to use the feeler
gauge to measure the clearance of both rows of rollers. With the bearing in place on the machine it is
admittedly rather difficult to get a feeler gauge back past the first row of rollers to measure the second but it
must be done.
3. If one row of rollers is tight but the other has measurable clearance, tap lightly on the end of the shaft nearest
the tight row of rollers to cause the shaft to shift axially and equalize the roller loading. Adjust the bearing
tightness to achieve the internal clearance previously calculated.
4. When the proper internal clearance has been attained, lock the nut by bending over the matching tang on the
lockwasher, making sure that all unused tangs are bent as near the nut as possible so that they will not rub
against the bearing roller cage.
Check each unused tab individually to insure this.
ÎFIGURE 12 (MSSM0303AE)
ÎMeasuring the Mounted Internal
Clearance of the Bearing
(42" machine shown)
Î IGURE 11 (MSSM0303AE)
F
ÎTightening the Bearing
Locknut (42" machine shown)
118
5. With the grease gun, fill the space between the bearing and the front of the housing 1/3 full of grease.
6. Install the bearing cover plate or shaft seal holder, as appropriate. When installing the shaft seal holder, take
care not to damage the seal as it is gently pushed over the shaft. Cover the keyway on the end of the shaft
with tape to prevent the sharp corners of the keyway from cutting the seal lip. Also, make sure that the seal
lip does not turn over as it passes over rough areas.
Tightening Bearing(s) (Front and/or Rear)
Ê
1. Once both bearings are seated, or if only one bearing was replaced, install the bearing lockwasher(s) and locknut(s). Use a hammer and a metal drift as shown in FIGURE 11, to tighten the locknut. It is imperative to
only tap lightly and to assure that metal chips from the drift or locknut do not fall off and contaminate the bearing. If both bearings are being tightened, work between the front and rear bearings and
turn the basket by hand periodically, while tightening the locknut(s).
5. With the grease gun, fill the space between the bearing and the front of the housing 1/3 full of grease.
6. Install the bearing cover plate or shaft seal holder, as appropriate. When installing the shaft seal holder, take
care not to damage the seal as it is gently pushed over the shaft. Cover the keyway on the end of the shaft
with tape to prevent the sharp corners of the keyway from cutting the seal lip. Also, make sure that the seal
lip does not turn over as it passes over rough areas.
2. After tightening the bearing(s) onto the tapered shaft, check the internal clearance as pictured in FIGURE 12,
by working a feeler gauge between the outer race and a roller of the outer row then between the outer race
and a roller of the inner row.
NOTE: Sometimes, when setting the bearings, all the load is taken by only one row of rollers (although the
load would quickly equalize on both rows after the machine has run for only a few minutes). If all the load
is taken by one row, you will get an erroneous clearance reading. It is therefore, necessary to use the feeler
gauge to measure the clearance of both rows of rollers. With the bearing in place on the machine it is
admittedly rather difficult to get a feeler gauge back past the first row of rollers to measure the second but it
must be done.
3. If one row of rollers is tight but the other has measurable clearance, tap lightly on the end of the shaft nearest
the tight row of rollers to cause the shaft to shift axially and equalize the roller loading. Adjust the bearing
tightness to achieve the internal clearance previously calculated.
4. When the proper internal clearance has been attained, lock the nut by bending over the matching tang on the
lockwasher, making sure that all unused tangs are bent as near the nut as possible so that they will not rub
against the bearing roller cage.
Check each unused tab individually to insure this.
Î IGURE 11 (MSSM0303AE)
F
ÎTightening the Bearing
Locknut (42" machine shown)
ÎFIGURE 12 (MSSM0303AE)
ÎMeasuring the Mounted Internal
Clearance of the Bearing
(42" machine shown)
119
120
121
BMP840039R/96142V (1 of 2)
Parts List—60036, 60044 & 72044 WE2, WE3, SG2, SG3, & DA3
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Item
Part Number
Description
Comments
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
8
9
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
02 18928
02 18219
X3 06165
X3 06006
X2 175053
X3 06370
X2 175052
X2 18190
02 18618A
X3 06369S
X3 06369
X2 175007
X2 175007
X3 06005S
X2 175005
X2 175005
X3 06005
X3 06003S
X3 06003
X2 175009
X3 06003
X3 06047S
X3 06047
X2 175009
X2 175008
60036,44WE2+3,DA3
72044DA3
72044WE2+3
72044SG2+3
60036,44WE2+3,DA3, SG2+3
72044DA3
72044SG2+3
60036,44WE3,SG2+3, DA3
60036,44WE2, 72044WE2+3
72044DA3
72044WE2+3,SG2+3
60036,44WE2+3,DA3, SG2+3
72044SG2+3
72044DA3
72044WE2+3
60036,44WE3,DA3, SG2+3
60036,44WE2
72044WE2+3,DA3
91046C DRIPSHIELD=60" WE + ZINC
86176B LOCKWASH=MAIN BEARHOUSE ZINC
95103B SLEEVE=SHAFT SEAL=2/72WEDU
95103B SLEEVE=SEAL 2/60WEHU
ALL EXCEPT SG'S
72044WE2+3,DA3,SG2+3
60036,44WE2+3,DA3, SG2+3
75631C HOLDER=SEAL=60SG SS W/AUTOSP 72044SG2+3
87387C HOLDER=REAR SEAL
75873C HOLDER=SEAL=60SG CS W/AUTOSP 60036,44SG2+3
87382C HOLDER=SHAFT SEAL
70120A COVER=BEARING 60 WED
81422D HOUSING REAR BRG S/S CAP
95522D HOUSING=REAR=BRG :C2-18590
95522D BRGHOUS=REAR=WEH:C2-18590
95522D BRGHOUS=REAR=WEH:C2-18590
81086D FRT BRG HSG W/ S/S CAP 60WEU
95522D BRGHOUS=FNT=SG: C2-18590
95522D BRGHOUS=FNT=SG: C2-18590
94277D HOUSING=FNT BRG+SIL:C2-18842
82261C SHAFTSURPORT-REAR 4.81"D S/S
82261C SHAFTSUPORT= 72"WE :C2-18592
72111C SHAFTSUPORT= 60"WE :C2-18592
82261C SHAFTSUPORT= 72"WE :C2-18592
82082C SHAFTSURPORT-FRONT 4.81"D SS
72111C SUPORT=FNTSHFT=72" :C2-18843
72111C SHAFTSUPORT= 60"WE :C2-18592
72111C SUPORT=FNTSHFT=60" :C2-18843
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS------------------------------------------------------------------
none
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES------------------------------------------------------------------
. Used In
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
R
15
all
23
24
25
26
all
all
all
all
all
32
32
all
30
all
31
29
all
all
28
27
all
all
27
22
all
all
21
20
all
all
19
18
all
all
18
all
18
17
all
all
16
all
15
14
all
all
13
all
15
12
all
all
11
10
Item
RELIEFFIT 1/8"STR ALEMITE#47200
NPT COUP 1/8 BRASS 125# 103A-A
ORING 6+1/4"IDX1/8CS BUNA-N 70 #259
03Z SEAL 3.75X4.75X.500 CS/BUNA
01Z SEAL 3X4.008X.437 CS/BUNA
01Z SEAL 3X4.008X.437 CS/BUNA
ORING 3+7/8"IDX3/16CS BUNA-N70 #344
ORING 8"IDX1/4CS BUNA-N 70 #445
ORING 8"IDX1/4CS BUNA-N 70 #445
ORING 8"IDX1/4CS BUNA-N 70 #445
ORING 6"IDX1/4CS BUNA-N 70 #437
06Z SEAL 4.5X5.5X.50 JM# 9170 LUP
06Z SEAL 4.5X5.5X.50 JM# 9170 LUP
W16 BEARING LOCKWASHER
AN16 BEARING LOCKNUT
08Z SPHEROLBRG 22316 BK-C3-W33
Description
NPT COUP 1/4 BRASS 125# #103
15B243
15B236
15U300
15K145
15U400
15B243
5SL0ENFK
5SL0CBEA
ALL EXCEPT SG'S
SG MACHINES ONLY
ALL EXCEPT SG'S
72044WE2+3,DA3
72044SG2+3
60036,44WE2+3,DA3, SG2+3
60036,44WE2+3,DA3, SG2+3
72044SG2+3
60036,44WE3,DA3, SG2+3
7244WE2+3,DA3
60036,44WE2,
Comments
HEXCAPSCR 1-8X2+1/2 GR5 ZINC
60036,44WE3,DA3, SG2+3
HEXCAPSCR 1-8UNC2AX3 SAEGR5 ZNC/CAD 60036,44WE2,
7244WE2+3,DA3
LOKWASHER REGULAR 1/2 ZINC PLT
HXCAPSCR 1/2-13UNC2AX3/4 GR5 PLATED
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM 1" ZINCPL
HEXCAPSCR 1-8X2+1/2 GR5 ZINC
NPT ELBOW 45DEG 1/4" GALMAL 150#
NPT ELBOW 90DEG 1/8" BRASS 125#
5N0CCLSB42 NPT NIPPLE 1/8XCLS TBE BRASS STD
5SB0E0CBEO HEXPIPBUSH 1/4 X 1/8 BRASS 125#
5N0E02KG42 NPT NIPPLE 1/4X2.5 TBE GALSTL SK40
5SCC0EBE
5N0C03AG42 NPT NIPPLE 1/8X3 TBE GALSTL SK40
54M029
5SCC0CBE
60C160J
24S112
24S111
24S111
60C154
60C172
60C172
60C172
60C161
24S114
24S114
56AHW16
56AHN16
56S22316T
Part Number
Parts List, cont.—60036, 60044 AND 72044 WE2, WE3, SG2, SG3, AND DA3
all
all
Used In
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP840039R/96142V
(Sheet 1 of 2)
BMP840039R/96142V
(Sheet 2 of 2)
R
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Litho in U.S.A.
Parts List, cont.—60036, 60044 AND 72044 WE2, WE3, SG2, SG3, AND DA3
Item
Used In
Part Number
Description
Comments
all
all
all
32
33
34
15B243
15K236
15K162
HEXCAPSCR 1-8X2+1/2 GR5 ZINC
05Z SKCPSCR 1-8 3X 2.75BLK-HK
HXCAPSCR 1/2-13UNC2AX1.5 GR5 PLATED
72044SG2+3
all
34
15K162
HXCAPSCR 1/2-13UNC2AX1.5 GR5 PLATED
72044WE2+3,DA3,SG2+3
all
34
15K147C
03Z SKCPSC 1/2-13X1 BLK HK
60036,44SG2+3
all
all
35
35
02 18768D
02 18870
93123A GASKET=SHAFT SUPT DA3
93362B GASKET=SHAFTSUPPORT 2/60WEDU 60036,44WE2 ONLY
all
all
36
37
02 18768D
02 18105
93123A GASKET=SHAFT SUPT DA3
93362A BEARING CAP GASKET
all
38
54M015
65408A GREASEFIT 60X36/60X44 1610BL
all
39
5SP0CFESSV NPT PLUG 1/8SQSOLIDBLKSTL LVENT125#
all
40
53A039B
BODY=BRMAL90 5/16X1/8COMP #B69A-5A
all
41
53A508
5/16" SLEEVE-DELRIN
all
42
53A509
TUBEINSERT .187"OD
all
43
53A019B
BODY=BRMALCON 5/16X1/8COMP #68B-52
all
44
5N0E01KBE2 NPT NIPPLE 1/4X1.5 TBE BRASS 125#
all
45
51P008B
PLUG PIPE SQ 1/4"BLKW/LVENTSOLIDSTL
all
46
X2 175053
75631C HOLDER=SEAL=60SG SS W/AUTOSP 60036,44SG2+3 ONLY
all
46
X2 175052
75873C HOLDER=SEAL=60SG CS W/AUTOSP 72044SG2+3 ONLY
all
47
24S111
01Z SEAL 3X4.008X.437 CS/BUNA
SG MACHINES ONLY
all
48
15K147C
03Z SKCPSC 1/2-13X1 BLK HK
60036,44SG2+3 ONLY
all
48
15K162
HXCAPSCR 1/2-13UNC2AX1.5 GR5 PLATED
72044SG2+3 ONLY
all
49
02 18105
93362A BEARING CAP GASKET
SG MACHINES ONLY
all
50
56S22316T
08Z SPHEROLBRG 22316 BK-C3-W33
ALL EXCEPT
72044WE2+3
all
50
56S23220T
04Z SPHEROLBRG 23220LBK-C3-W33
72044WE2+3 ONLY
all
51
56AHN16
AN16 BEARING LOCKNUT
ALL EXCEPT
72044WE2+3
all
51
56AHN20
AN20 BEARING LOCKNUT
72044WE2+3 ONLY
all
52
56AHW16
W16 BEARING LOCKWASHER
ALL EXCEPT
72044WE2+3
all
52
56AHW20
W20 BEARING LOCKWASHER
72044WE2+3 ONLY
all
53
53A060A
NUT BRASS 5/16 COMP W#61X5
122
60036,44WE2+3,DA3
ALL EXCEPT SG'S
Section
Frame, Pivots, and Suspension
123
5
124
Hold Down Adjustments
60" & 72" Rapid Load and Staph-Guard
R
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
BMP701672R/71051
(Sheet 1 of 1)
Litho in U.S.A.
Parts List—Hold Down Adjustments
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
.
The shipping bolt (Item 9) must be removed from all four hold downs before the machine is operated and
before making any adjustment. The four base pads of the machine must be adjusted so that the machine
touches all four pads simultaneously with uniform pressure.
This holds the machine steady during washing and allows the machine to travel vertically without “twist”
or undulating motion.
Place the machine on a level floor. Lower the shell front and back onto three blocks. Locate two blocks
in front and one block in the rear. The blocks must hold the machine shell about 3/8" above the base
pads.
Remove the four bolts holding the ring weldment (Item 5). Place the ring weldment firmly on top of the
plug welded onto the base pad and measure the clearance between the mounting bracket and the ring
weldment (Item 5). Stack the necessary number of shims to remove all of the measured clearance. Place
extra shims on top of the mounting bracket so that they may be used for later adjustments if necessary.
Check the adjustment by turning the master switch (located on the MILTROL) on and observing how the
machine seats itself on the pads, and how it rises vertically off of the pads. No rocking motion as the
machine goes down, or twisting motion as it rises should be present. Repeat the adjustments if necessary.
Enough clearance must exist between the ring weldment (Item 5) and the plug on the base pad when the
machine goes into extraction to prevent binding, but must not be so much that it prevents the machine
from being pushed down solidly while the machine is in wash and drain. When the machine is empty it
should move 2" from the down-solid to the free-hanging position.
ITEM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
PARTS LIST
DESCRIPTION
Plate, Hold Down Centering
Shim, Hold Down Ring, 0.25"
Shim, Hold Down Ring, 0.12"
Shim, Hold Down Ring, 0.06"
Ring Weldment
Hex Nut, 5/8"-11 UNC2
Lockwasher, 5/8", Medium
Hex Tap Screw, 5/8"-11X4", Full Thread
Hex Cap Screw, 1"-8X4-1/2", Grade 5
125
PART NO.
03-06215B
03-06216A
03-06216B
03-06216C
W3-06215
15G238
15U315
15D125
15K300
MSSM0302AE/8414BV
ÈUSPENSION ADJUSTMENTS FOR
S
DIVIDED CYLINDER MACHINES
®
®
The suspension system on Milnor Hydro-cushion machines is adjusted and thoroughly tested at the factory.
It should not require subsequent adjustment unless the machine is distorted during shipment or installation or unless
some component of the system, such as a Hydro-cushion® cylinder is replaced.
There are two primary objectives when adjusting the suspension system on any Hydro-cushion® machine model:
1. To position the shell in the proper location within the frame (hanging dimensions) to maximize freedom of
movement of the shell and to insure proper draining, and
2. To adjust the length of up and down travel at each of the push-down locations (push down travel) so that the
shell will not be distorted (racked) when pushed down.
All Milnor® Hydro-cushion® machines contain the following suspension system components (as shown on
the typical system on the previous page):
1. Hydro-cushion® cylinder—which suspend the shell and cylinder within the frame and provide vibration
damping during extraction.
2. Pneumatic push down devices (air bags)—which when inflated, force the shell downward where it is held
against rigid pads during loading, unloading, washing, and draining.
3. Metal or rubber pads—some rigidly fixed to the shell and some rigidly fixed to the frame, which come in contact when the shell is pushed down.
The actual configuration of these components varies from model to model.
How Shell Adjustments are Made
Ê
Regardless of machine model, repositioning of the shell is always accomplished by adjusting the nuts at the
top of the upper Hydro-cushion® shafts. To move the shell up or down at the location of any Hydro-cushion®, see
FIGURE 2 and proceed as follows:
Hydro-cushion®
adjusting and
lock nuts
Frame
These procedures should be accomplished with power to the machine locked off.
1. Straighten the tongues on the keyed lock washer using
pliers, screw driver, etc.
Hydro-cushion®
cylinder
Shell
2. Loosen the lock nut (upper hex nut) and move it all the
way up to the top of the shaft, but do not remove it.
Hydro-cushion®
shaft
Locknut
3. Use the adjusting nut (lower hex nut) to “crank” the shaft
up or down as required.
Push-down
device (air bag)
4. Once final adjustment is made, while holding the adjusting nut to prevent it from turning, retighten the lock nut
against the adjusting nut (with the lock washer between).
Rest pad
5. Rebend the tongues on the lockwasher as before, to
prevent movement of the nuts.
Push-down
travel dimension
Keyed
lockwasher
Ajusting
Nut
ÎFIGURE 2 (MSSM0302AE)
Î ydro-cushion® Upper
H
Shaft and Adjusting Nuts
ÎFIGURE 1 (MSSM0302AE)
ÎHydro-cushion® Suspension System Components
(does not depict a specific machine)
126
MSSM0302AE/8414BV
(1 of 3)
ÈUSPENSION ADJUSTMENTS FOR
S
DIVIDED CYLINDER MACHINES
®
®
The suspension system on Milnor Hydro-cushion machines is adjusted and thoroughly tested at the factory.
It should not require subsequent adjustment unless the machine is distorted during shipment or installation or unless
some component of the system, such as a Hydro-cushion® cylinder is replaced.
There are two primary objectives when adjusting the suspension system on any Hydro-cushion® machine model:
1. To position the shell in the proper location within the frame (hanging dimensions) to maximize freedom of
movement of the shell and to insure proper draining, and
2. To adjust the length of up and down travel at each of the push-down locations (push down travel) so that the
shell will not be distorted (racked) when pushed down.
All Milnor® Hydro-cushion® machines contain the following suspension system components (as shown on
the typical system on the previous page):
1. Hydro-cushion® cylinder—which suspend the shell and cylinder within the frame and provide vibration
damping during extraction.
2. Pneumatic push down devices (air bags)—which when inflated, force the shell downward where it is held
against rigid pads during loading, unloading, washing, and draining.
3. Metal or rubber pads—some rigidly fixed to the shell and some rigidly fixed to the frame, which come in contact when the shell is pushed down.
The actual configuration of these components varies from model to model.
How Shell Adjustments are Made
Ê
Regardless of machine model, repositioning of the shell is always accomplished by adjusting the nuts at the
top of the upper Hydro-cushion® shafts. To move the shell up or down at the location of any Hydro-cushion®, see
FIGURE 2 and proceed as follows:
Hydro-cushion®
adjusting and
lock nuts
Frame
These procedures should be accomplished with power to the machine locked off.
1. Straighten the tongues on the keyed lock washer using
pliers, screw driver, etc.
Hydro-cushion®
cylinder
Shell
2. Loosen the lock nut (upper hex nut) and move it all the
way up to the top of the shaft, but do not remove it.
Hydro-cushion®
shaft
Locknut
3. Use the adjusting nut (lower hex nut) to “crank” the shaft
up or down as required.
Push-down
device (air bag)
4. Once final adjustment is made, while holding the adjusting nut to prevent it from turning, retighten the lock nut
against the adjusting nut (with the lock washer between).
Rest pad
5. Rebend the tongues on the lockwasher as before, to
prevent movement of the nuts.
Push-down
travel dimension
Keyed
lockwasher
Ajusting
Nut
ÎFIGURE 2 (MSSM0302AE)
Î ydro-cushion® Upper
H
Shaft and Adjusting Nuts
ÎFIGURE 1 (MSSM0302AE)
ÎHydro-cushion® Suspension System Components
(does not depict a specific machine)
127
Shell Hanging Dimensions and Adjustment Procedures
Ê
To adjust the shell of a divided cylinder machine, proceed as follows:
Push-Down Travel Dimensions and
Ê
Adjustment Procedures
1. Locate the shell hanging dimension for your machine in the table below and adjust your machine accordingly.
Take measurements on the left and right sides of the shell, to assure that the shell is horizontal, left to right.
2. The shell and cylinder should be level front to back. Check this with a bubble level, as shown in FIGURE 3.
3. If further adjustment is required in order to level the cylinder, make small adjustments at all four corners. For
example, if the cylinder slopes down to the front, try raising the two front corners by 1/16" (2mm) and
lowering the two rear corners by 1/16" (2mm). Always split the difference.
NOTE: Only slight deviations from the dimensions shown should be used to level the shell. If large deviations are required, this may indicate that the frame is out of level. If so, this condition must be corrected
before attempting to level the shell.
MACHINE
MODEL
Some of the following procedures require power to the machine. Take the necessary
precautions to assure that no one operates the machine controls while personnel are adjusting the push-down components.
42" Divided Cylinder Machines
Ë
The push-down stops on these machines consist of brackets attached to the shell and rubber rest pads, mounted
atop the base pads (see figures below) which make contact when the shell pushes down. The rubber rest pads sit in
metal pans and are raised or lowered by adding metal shims to or removing the shims from inside the pans. Extra
shims and adhesive for securing the shims were supplied with your machine.
There is no specific push-down travel dimension for these machines; however, length of travel must be adjusted as follows:
1. With the Master switch set to off, and the shell hanging free, measure the gap between each bracket and base
pad.
42031WE
4 1/8" (105)
2. Add or remove shims from the appropriate pads as required to make all four gaps equal and to insure that no
rest pad protrudes completely from its metal pan.
42031SG
4 1/8" (105)
Test for equal length of travel at all four locations as follows:
44044WE
4 1/8" (105)
42044SG
4 1/8" (105)
3. With four sheet metal shims of equal thickness, set one shim on top of each rubber rest pad, such that at least
a one inch length of the shim overhangs the outside edge of the pad.
60031WE
3 5/8" (92)
4. Set the Master switch to manual, causing the shell to push-down.
60031SG
3 5/8" (92)
60044WE
3 5/8" (92)
60044SG
3 5/8" (92)
72044SG
3 3/4" (95)
72044WE
3 3/4" (95)
DIMENSION A
Push-down housing (Rest pads
and bracket within)
Rubber rest pad
(Shim between
rubber pad and
metal pan)
ÎFIGURE 3 (MSSM0302AE)
ÎShell Hanging Dimensions for Divided Cylinder Machines
(Left side view of 60044WE shown)
Gaps must be
equal.
ÎFIGURE 4 (MSSM0302AE)
ÎPush-down Travel Adjustment: 42" Div-cyls (42" Staph-guard® shown)
128
Shell Hanging Dimensions and Adjustment Procedures
Ê
To adjust the shell of a divided cylinder machine, proceed as follows:
Push-Down Travel Dimensions and
Ê
Adjustment Procedures
1. Locate the shell hanging dimension for your machine in the table below and adjust your machine accordingly.
Take measurements on the left and right sides of the shell, to assure that the shell is horizontal, left to right.
2. The shell and cylinder should be level front to back. Check this with a bubble level, as shown in FIGURE 3.
3. If further adjustment is required in order to level the cylinder, make small adjustments at all four corners. For
example, if the cylinder slopes down to the front, try raising the two front corners by 1/16" (2mm) and
lowering the two rear corners by 1/16" (2mm). Always split the difference.
NOTE: Only slight deviations from the dimensions shown should be used to level the shell. If large deviations are required, this may indicate that the frame is out of level. If so, this condition must be corrected
before attempting to level the shell.
MACHINE
MODEL
Some of the following procedures require power to the machine. Take the necessary
precautions to assure that no one operates the machine controls while personnel are adjusting the push-down components.
42" Divided Cylinder Machines
Ë
The push-down stops on these machines consist of brackets attached to the shell and rubber rest pads, mounted
atop the base pads (see figures below) which make contact when the shell pushes down. The rubber rest pads sit in
metal pans and are raised or lowered by adding metal shims to or removing the shims from inside the pans. Extra
shims and adhesive for securing the shims were supplied with your machine.
There is no specific push-down travel dimension for these machines; however, length of travel must be adjusted as follows:
1. With the Master switch set to off, and the shell hanging free, measure the gap between each bracket and base
pad.
42031WE
4 1/8" (105)
2. Add or remove shims from the appropriate pads as required to make all four gaps equal and to insure that no
rest pad protrudes completely from its metal pan.
42031SG
4 1/8" (105)
Test for equal length of travel at all four locations as follows:
44044WE
4 1/8" (105)
42044SG
4 1/8" (105)
3. With four sheet metal shims of equal thickness, set one shim on top of each rubber rest pad, such that at least
a one inch length of the shim overhangs the outside edge of the pad.
60031WE
3 5/8" (92)
4. Set the Master switch to manual, causing the shell to push-down.
60031SG
3 5/8" (92)
60044WE
3 5/8" (92)
60044SG
3 5/8" (92)
72044SG
3 3/4" (95)
72044WE
3 3/4" (95)
DIMENSION A
Push-down housing (Rest pads
and bracket within)
Rubber rest pad
(Shim between
rubber pad and
metal pan)
ÎFIGURE 3 (MSSM0302AE)
ÎShell Hanging Dimensions for Divided Cylinder Machines
(Left side view of 60044WE shown)
Gaps must be
equal.
ÎFIGURE 4 (MSSM0302AE)
ÎPush-down Travel Adjustment: 42" Div-cyls (42" Staph-guard® shown)
129
5. With the shell pushed down, attempt to pull each test shim out from between the bracket and rubber pad. The
test shims should all be tight. If any shim(s) are not pinched tightly between the bracket and pad, take note
of which one(s) are not.
Make final adjustments as follows:
6. Set the Master switch to off, remove the test shims and make the necessary changes to the shims below the
rubber pads as indicated by the above test.
7. Repeat Steps 3 through 6 as required, until this test is successful.
8. Once the adjustments are completed, secure all shims and rubber rest pads with the adhesive provided.
60" Divided Cylinder Machines
Ë
These machines have push-down stops on the four corners of the frame which appear as shown in FIGURES
5 and 6. When pushed down, the ring weldments (which move with the shell) must seat firmly onto the plugs which
are mounted atop the base pads. The push-down travel dimension must assure that 1) the ring weldments and plugs
are far enough apart when the shell is not pushed down, so as not to interfere with the free movement of the shell,
and 2) that all four stops are in solid contact when the shell is pushed down. To accomplish this, proceed as follows:
1. With the Master switch set to off and the shell hanging free, remove the bolts securing the ring weldments to
the mounting brackets. Set each ring weldment on top of its respective plug, removing any shims which
may have been used and placing them next to the ring weldment.
2. Measure the gap between the top of the ring weldment and the bottom of the mounting bracket, at each location.
Mounting Bracket
Shell
(hanging
free)
Shell
(hanging
free)
Frame
2"
Shims
Shims
Ring
Weldment
Ring
Weldment
ÎFIGURE 5 (MSSM0302AE)
ÎShimming Ring Weldments
ÎFIGURE 6 (MSSM0302AE)
ÎReconnecting Ring Weldments
130
3. Stack shims on top of the ring weldment as required to make each gap exactly 2 inches as shown in FIGURE
5. If the gap at any location is less than 2 inches without shims, the shell must then be raised in the frame,
using the procedures previously described.
4. Once the proper arrangement of shims is made, remount the ring weldment and shims to the mounting bracket
(see FIGURE 6). Any extra shims may be stacked on the top side of the mounting bracket plate to which the
ring weldment is attached.
5. With the shell pushed down, attempt to pull each test shim out from between the bracket and rubber pad. The
test shims should all be tight. If any shim(s) are not pinched tightly between the bracket and pad, take note
of which one(s) are not.
Make final adjustments as follows:
6. Set the Master switch to off, remove the test shims and make the necessary changes to the shims below the
rubber pads as indicated by the above test.
3. Stack shims on top of the ring weldment as required to make each gap exactly 2 inches as shown in FIGURE
5. If the gap at any location is less than 2 inches without shims, the shell must then be raised in the frame,
using the procedures previously described.
4. Once the proper arrangement of shims is made, remount the ring weldment and shims to the mounting bracket
(see FIGURE 6). Any extra shims may be stacked on the top side of the mounting bracket plate to which the
ring weldment is attached.
7. Repeat Steps 3 through 6 as required, until this test is successful.
8. Once the adjustments are completed, secure all shims and rubber rest pads with the adhesive provided.
60" Divided Cylinder Machines
Ë
These machines have push-down stops on the four corners of the frame which appear as shown in FIGURES
5 and 6. When pushed down, the ring weldments (which move with the shell) must seat firmly onto the plugs which
are mounted atop the base pads. The push-down travel dimension must assure that 1) the ring weldments and plugs
are far enough apart when the shell is not pushed down, so as not to interfere with the free movement of the shell,
and 2) that all four stops are in solid contact when the shell is pushed down. To accomplish this, proceed as follows:
1. With the Master switch set to off and the shell hanging free, remove the bolts securing the ring weldments to
the mounting brackets. Set each ring weldment on top of its respective plug, removing any shims which
may have been used and placing them next to the ring weldment.
2. Measure the gap between the top of the ring weldment and the bottom of the mounting bracket, at each location.
Mounting Bracket
Shell
(hanging
free)
Shell
(hanging
free)
Frame
2"
Shims
Ring
Weldment
ÎFIGURE 5 (MSSM0302AE)
ÎShimming Ring Weldments
Shims
Ring
Weldment
ÎFIGURE 6 (MSSM0302AE)
ÎReconnecting Ring Weldments
131
132
Suspension Cylinder Assembly
R
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
BMP701629R/73261A
(Sheet 1 of 2)
Litho in U.S.A.
Parts List—Suspension Cylinder Assembly
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
. Used In
Item
Part Number
Description
00A
00B
00C
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
027
028
028
029
030
SA-36-021
SA-36-023
SA-36-047
15G268
W3-06203
02-18256
02-18571
15K191
15K202
15K198
02-18534
X3-06252
54M025
15G230
15U300
02-18795
15G267
27B240
15U452
51P020
60C159
02-18840
02-18839
15U400
15G255
15B237
W3-06201
W3-06200
02-18619
03-06139
03-06338
03-06138
03-06337
X2-18228
02-175034
Hydrocushion Cylinder Assembly
Hydrocushion Cylinder Assembly
Hydrocushion Cylinder Assembly
Hxfinjamnut 1+1/2-12NF Zinc
70207D Cyl=Hydrocushion-Suspension
LokWash-Tongue 8/WEH CAD
68155Z Piston Rod Washer Cadstl
Hexcapscr 1/2-13X2+1/2 GR5CAD
HXCAPSCR 1/2-13X5 GR5 Zinc
HEXCAPSCR 1/2-13 UNCX3 Zinc
65061Z Holdplate=Ballbush CAD
71153B Retainer-Ballbush
Hydraulicfit 1/2"-90 ALEMITE#1613-B
Hexnut 1/2-13UNC2 Zinc
Lokwasher Medium 1/2 Zinc Pl
70199B Washer-Timing=Hydro Cylinder
Hexnut 1+1/2-12 UNCF2 Zinc
Spacer.5091DX.813X.048T Rollstlcad
Lokwasher Medium 1+1/2 Blk
SQPIPPLUG 1/2 125#C1 GALSOLID
Oring 5+1/21DX1/4" CS Buna-N 70 Duro
UPCAP=HYDROCYL
68046Z Bored Bushing-Hydrocyl Cap
Lockwasher Medium 1" ZincPl
Regularsqnut 1-8UNC2 Blk
Hexcapscr 1-8UNC 2X6 Zinc
70234B Bolt=Upper Cylinder
70207B Spacer=Uydro-Cushion Cyl
Bushing Retainer
71225B Spring=in hydrocyl 331LB/IN
71220B Spring=inner gold 14" long
71225B Spring=out hydrocyl 667LB/IN
71220B Spring-Outer-Gold 14.5" Long
71105C Piston=Hydrocylinder
70148B Shield-Ballbush
133
Comments
00A
00A, 00B
00C
00C
BMP701629R/73261A
(Sheet 2 of 2)
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
R
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Used In
Item
031
031
032
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
Parts List, cont.—Suspension Cylinder Assembly
Part Number
03-06138A
03-06338
03-06139A
03-06337
M2-18690
54A705
15G231
96D026
51A025
51A028
51J021
51L026
51P012
53A005B
53A057
53A056
60E004T
53A007B
51A010
54M023
Description
Spring-Inner
71330B Spring Inner-Gold 14" Long
Spring-Outer
71220B Spring-Outer-Gold 14.5" Long
67433Z Lower Cap=Hydrocyl
01Z Bushing Ball RBC B24L Bushing #1
Hexfinjamnut 1/2-13UNC2Zinc
#1 Globevalve 1/4" Bronze 125# Steam
Hexpipbush 3/8X1/4 Gal 125#C1
Hexpipbush 1/2X3/8 Gal 125#C1
Streetell 90Deg 1/4 150# GalMal
Nipple Pipe 1/4X Close Galstl
Sqpipplug 1/4 125#C1 Gal Solid
Body=Maleconn 1/4X1/8 Compfit WO#68
Pollysleeve 1/4 Polyflo Imp#260P
Nut 1/4 Polyflo IMP # 261-U
01Z 1/4OD X .1901D Polypen L3HS
Body=Femconn 1/4X1/4 Comfit WH#66X4A
Hexpipbush 1/4X1/8 Brass WO#110
Greasefit Linc# 5200 45Deg
134
Litho in U.S.A.
Comments
00B
00C
00B
00C
00B, 00C
00B, 00C
Suspension Cylinder Locations
BMP701235/2000133V
(Sheet 1 of 1)
Use with BMP701408
R
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Litho in U.S.A.
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Note: A letter is stamped
on the end of the upper
bolt to designate the
cylinder assembly.
CYLINDER #4
CYLINDER #1
CYLINDER #3
CYLINDER #2
FRONT OR
SOILED SIDE
SEE BMP701408
FOR REPAIR PARTS:
HYDROCUSHION CYLINDER ASSEMBLY “B”
THROUGH HYDROCUSHION CYLINDER ASSEMBLY “K”
MACHINE MODELS:
POSITION:
42031
CP2,NP2
WP2,WP3
42031
SP2,SP3
42044
CP2,NP2
WP2,WP3
D7P
42044
SP2,SP3
52038
WTL,WTN
WP1
60044
WP2,WP3
SP2,SP3
72044
WP2,WP3
DA1
72044
SP2,SP3
CYLINDER #1
B
B
C
C
D
K
H
G
CYLINDER #2
B
C
B
C
D
K
H
G
CYLINDER #3
B
C
B
C
D
K
F
G
CYLINDER #4
B
C
C
C
D
K
F
G
135
136
Push Down Assembly
R
BMP701671R/70526
(Sheet 1 of 1)
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Litho in U.S.A.
Parts List—Push Down Assembly
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
. Used In
Item
Description
Part Number
Comments
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES------------------------------------------------------------------
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
27A090
60E085
15K095
15U240
15U255
60B120
27A005
51A025
51J020
51L030
51V015
Hose Clamp, 9/16" - 1-1/2"
Air Hose, 1/2", Single Braid
Hex Cap Screw, 3/8"-16UNC2 X 1"
Flatwasher, 3/8", U.S. Std.
Lockwasher, 3/8", Medium
Airmount, Firestone #3582-01-7081
Muffler, 1/4" Pipe, Unipress #27583
Hex Pipe Bushing, 3/8" X 1/4"
Elbow, Street, 1/4" X 90°, Brass
Nipple, Pipe, 1/4" X 1-1/2", Brass
Tee, Pipe, 1/4", Brass
137
138
Cylinder Assembly
BMP790019R/86387A
(Sheet 1 of 2)
7244 WE3
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
R
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Litho in U.S.A.
Parts List—Cylinder Assembly
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Item
. Used In
Description
Part Number
Comments
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES-----------------------------------------------------------------none
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS-----------------------------------------------------------------all
1
ACA36WE3A
87401D* CYL ASSY=7244WE3 WELD/SHAFT
(COMPLETE CYL ASS)
all
2
SA 36 002
93461Y* CYLDOR UPRT 72WE2+ MAX-REIF
(COMPLETE DOOR ASS)
all
3
SA 36 001
93397Y* CYLDOR LORT 72WE2+ MAX-REIF
(COMPLETE DOOR ASS)
all
4
SA 28 116
94367C* CYLDOR ASY,SMALL =60+72SG2
(COMPLETE DOOR ASS)
all
5
X2 15201
89207A KEEPER=CYLDOOR LATCH
all
6
02 19183
COVER=DOORLATCH KEEPER (DOUBLER)
all
7
03 06174
77426A KEEPER=DOORLATCH REINFORCE
all
8
02 18962
72175B STOP=CYLDOOR=42WEHU
all
9
02 18977A
84426A SHIM=CYL DRLATCH KEEPER-11GA
all
10
02 18977B
84426# SHIM=CYL DRLATCH KEEPER-14GA
all
11
02 18977C
84426# SHIM=CYL DRLATCH KEEPER-18GA
all
12
15A015
67381A CARRSCR 3/8-16X1+1/4 SPECIAL
all
13
15U260
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM 3/8 SS18-8
all
14
15G206
HEXNUT 3/8-16 UNC2 SS 18-8
all
15
15A010
67346A CARRSCR 3/8-16UNC2X1 SPECIAL
all
16
15K084S
HXCAPSCR 3/8-16NCX5/8 SS18-8
all
17
X3 06166
89207A KEEPER=CYL DOOR LATCH
all
18
03 06167
88161L COVER-LARGE CYLDOOR KEEPER
all
19
15K106E
BUTSOKCAPSCR 3/8-16NCX1+1/2 SS18-8
all
20
02 15040
PLUNGER-CYLDOOR LATCH
(FOR-SA-28-116)
all
21
02 15041
76241A BODY=CYLDOOR LATCH
(FOR-SA-28-116)
all
22
02 15077
PLATE=CYLDOOR LATCH ANTI-FRICTION
(FOR-SA-28-116)
all
23
02 15093
76571A SPRING=DOOR LATCH 9.4#/INCH
(FOR-SA-28-116)
all
24
02 18858
94277B HALFHINGE=60"WED CYLDOR SMAL
(FOR-SA-28-116)
all
25
02 18865
70120A PIN=SM CYL DOOR HINGE
(FOR-SA-28-116)
139
BMP790019R/86387A
(Sheet 2 of 2)
R
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Item
Used In
Parts List, cont.—Cylinder Assembly
Part Number
Description
Litho in U.S.A.
Comments
all
26
15N173
FLATMACSCR 1/4-20NCX5/8SS18-8
(FOR-SA-28-116)
all
27
15G170
HEXNUT 1/4-20UNC2 SS18-8
(FOR-SA-28-116)
all
28
15N159
HEXCAPSCR 1/4-2OUNC2AX7/16 18-8SS
(FOR-SA-28-116)
all
29
15J008H
BUTTON HD RIVET 3/16 X 1/2" SS18-8
(FOR-SA-28-116)
all
30
03 06035
70123A PIN=CYL DOOR HINGE 72WED
all
31
03 06031
94277C HALFHINGE=CYLDOOR 4/72WED
(FOR-36-001-AND-36-002)
all
32
02 18869
78041B SPACER-LATCH PULL BND@PRNT
(FOR-36-001-AND-36-002)
all
33
03 06156
70025A SPRING=LARGE CYLDOOR LATCH
(FOR-36-001-AND-36-002)
all
34
X3 06152
87346A PLATE = LARGE DOORLATCH
(FOR-36-001-AND-36-002)
all
35
03 06151
94222A LATCHBODY-LARGE=CYLDOOR
(FOR-36-001-AND-36-002)
all
36
X3 06150
72195B PLUNGER=LARGE CYLDOOR(CAST)
(FOR-36-001-AND-36-002)
all
37
15K042
BUTSOKCAPSCR 1/4-20NCX1 SS18-8
(FOR-36-001-AND-36-002)
all
38
15U181
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM 1/4 SS18-8
(FOR-36-001-AND-36-002)
all
39
03 06172
77422A SHIM=DOOR LATCH-18GA
(FOR-36-001-AND-36-002)
all
41
03 06317
71325B STOP=CYLINDER DOOR LATCH
(FOR-36-001-AND-36-002)
all
42
03 06431
73460B BAR=REINFORCE HINGE CYL DOOR
(FOR-36-001-AND-36-002)
all
43
03 06173A
77422A SHIM=DOOR LATCH-11GA
(FOR-36-001-AND-36-002)
140
141
P/L CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
BMP780043R/86387A
(Sheet 1 of 2)
60 & 70 WE2
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
R
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Litho in U.S.A.
Parts List—P/L CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Item
. Used In
Description
Part Number
Comments
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES-----------------------------------------------------------------none
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS-----------------------------------------------------------------all
1
ACA18WE2A
91091Y* CYL ASSY=6036WE2 WELD/SHAFT
(USED ON 6036 WE2)
all
1
ACA19WE2A
91091@* CYL ASSY=6044WE2 WELD/SHAFT
(USED ON 6044 WE2)
all
1
ACA36WE2A
91091D* CYL ASSY=7244WE2 WELD/SHAFT
(USED ON 7244 WE2)
all
2
Y2 175001
93421D MAINSHAFT 6036
(6036 WE2)
all
2
Y2 19216
93421# MAINSHAFT 6044
(6044 WE2)
all
2
Y3 06368
94247D MAINSHAFT 7244WE2+3
(7244 WE2)
all
3
X2 18825
92413D CYLFRONT 60WE2 ONLY
(6036&6044 WE2)
all
3
X3 06013
92413D+CIRCLE-CYLFRONT=1/72WED
(7244 WE2)
all
4
X2 18678
92413C CYLBAK W/SPRAYHOLES WE2
(6036&6044 WE2)
all
4
X3 06014
92413C CIRCLE-CYLBACK=1/72WED
(7244 WE2)
all
5
X2 18813
70256C CYLSIDE=2/6036WEDU
(6036 WE2)
all
5
X2 19161
70256C CYLSIDE=2/6044WED+6044SGD
(6044 WE2)
all
5
X3 06011
70256C SHEET-CYLSIDE=2/72WEDU
(7244 WE2)
all
6
15U260
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM 3/8 SS18-8
all
7
02 18096
70123C RING=REAR CYL REINFORCING
(6036&6044 WE2)
all
7
03 06018
89321C RING=CYL REINFORCING
(7244 WE2)
all
8
15K084S
HXCAPSCR 3/8-16NCX5/8 SS18-8
all
9
15A010
67346A CARRSCR 3/8-16UNC2X1 SPECIAL
all
10
15G206
HEXNUT 3/8-16 UNC2 SS 18-8
all
11
X2 15201
89207A KEEPER=CYLDOOR LATCH
all
12
SA 28 110
83206D* CYLDOR LOLT 60WE2+ MIN-REIF
(6036&6044 WE2)
all
12
SA 36 003
93461@* CYLDOR LOLT 72WE2+ MAX-REIF
(7244 WE2)
all
13
SA 28 111
83206D* CYLDOR UPLT 60WE2+ MIN-REIF
(6036&6044 WE2)
all
13
SA 36 004
93397@* CYLDOR UPLT 72WE2+ MAX-REIF
(7244 WE2)
all
14
SA 28 112
93386D* CYLDOR LORT 60WE2+ MIN-REIF
(6036&6044 WE2)
142
BMP780043R/86387A
(Sheet 2 of 2)
R
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Litho in U.S.A.
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Item
Used In
Parts List, cont.—P/L CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
Part Number
Description
Comments
all
14
SA 36 001
93397Y* CYLDOR LORT 72WE2+ MAX-REIF
(7244 WE2)
all
15
SA 28 113
93386D* CYLDOR UPRT 60WE2+ MIN-REIF
(6036&6044 WE2)
all
15
SA 36 002
93461Y* CYLDOR UPRT 72WE2+ MAX-REIF
(7244 WE2)
all
16
SA 28 114
96172D* CYLDOR ASY,SMALL =60+72WE2
all
17
02 18899C
78202B FAIRING=REAR SIDES
all
18
02 18901A
81442# FAIRING TOP
all
19
02 18857
91091B TAPSTRIP-CYL DOOR 2/60WEDU
(6036&6044 WE2)
all
19
02 18859
86216A TAPSTRIP=SMALL CYL DOOR
(7244 WE2)
all
20
03 06174
77426A KEEPER=DOORLATCH REINFORCE
all
21
02 19207
90372D COUNTERWEIGHT=CYL 60WE2
(6036&6044 WE2)
all
21
03 06177
81333# COUNTERWEIGHT=CYL 72WE2
(7244 WE2)
all
25
15K106E
BUTSOKCAPSCR 3/8-16NCX1+1/2 SS18-8
(6036&6044 WE2)
all
25
15A015
67381A CARRSCR 3/8-16X1+1/4 SPECIAL
(7244 WE2)
all
26
X3 06166
89207A KEEPER=CYL DOOR LATCH
all
27
03 06167
88161L COVER-LARGE CYLDOOR KEEPER
all
28
15A015
67381A CARRSCR 3/8-16X1+1/4 SPECIAL
all
30
X3 06150
72195B PLUNGER=LARGE CYLDOOR(CAST)
all
31
03 06151
94222A LATCHBODY-LARGE=CYLDOOR
all
32
X3 06152
87346A PLATE = LARGE DOORLATCH
all
33
03 06156
70025A SPRING=LARGE CYLDOOR LATCH
all
34
02 18869
78041B SPACER-LATCH PULL BND@PRNT
all
35
15K042K
BUTSOKCAPSCR 1/4-20UNCX1+1/4 SS18-8
all
36
03 06172
77422A SHIM=DOOR LATCH-18GA
all
38
03 06173A
77422A SHIM=DOOR LATCH-11GA
all
39
15G170
HEXNUT 1/4-20UNC2 SS18-8
143
144
Section
Control and Sensing
Devices
145
6
MSSMA408BE/9273BV
VIBRATION SAFETY SWITCH ADJUSTMENTS
È
B
B
What the Vibration Safety Switch Does
Ë
The vibration safety switch pictured below is an important safety feature. If properly adjusted, the switch will
momentarily actuate as a result of repeated machine movement caused by an out-of-balance condition. Table A
below illustrates the effect of the vibration safety switch actuation.
ÏTable A—Effect of Tripping Vibration Safety Switch
Machine Model
B
Function of Vibration Safety Switch
30015, 30020, and 30022
Disables high speed extract
All microprocessor-controlled washer-extractors not
listed above, and all dye machines
De-energizes three-wire relay, effectively
terminating machine operation
Adjustments
Ê
B
When the machine leaves Milnor®, the actuator arm is
tie-wrapped to prevent damage (except on 30015, 30020, and
30022 models). This tie wrap must be removed after the
machine is set into position but before the machine is operated.
Adjustment of this switch from the factory setting is not
recommended; however, it should be checked for proper
functioning and adjusted if its proper setting is lost.
As shown at right in FIGURE 1, the unit consists of a
sensitive micro-switch with an extended actuating arm supporting an eccentric weight. The weight may be adjusted by
moving it up and down on the arm and by rotating it on the
arm. In addition, the micro-switch itself may be tilted from
side to side.
The sensitivity of the switch increases as the eccentricweight is raised on the actuating arm and decreases as the weight is lowered.
The unit should be adjusted so that the actuating arm
will always reset by itself, this being accomplished by rotating either the switch or the weight to give just enough bias to
cause the switch to reset. Check the adjustment by moving the
arm to the left then slowly releasing it. Make sure the microswitch clicks when the arm is slowly released, thus indicating
146
ÎFIGURE 1 (MSSMA408BE)
ÎVibration Switch
that it has reset. In the released position the arm should rest lightly but definitely against the stop on the micro-switch
case that prevents any further arm movement to the left.
For machines with rigid mounted shells, where the machine is bolted to a very substantial foundation, very
little machine movement will occur for a given degree of out-of-balance. Under such conditions it may be better to
adjust the switch to be very sensitive. With less substantial foundations (e.g., ones where the sub-soil is mushy or
springy or otherwise not as desirable), considerably greater machine movement will occur for a given degree of
out-of-balance, in which case a less sensitive vibration switch setting may be indicated.
MSSMA408BE/9273BV (1 of 1)
VIBRATION SAFETY SWITCH ADJUSTMENTS
È
B
B
What the Vibration Safety Switch Does
Ë
The vibration safety switch pictured below is an important safety feature. If properly adjusted, the switch will
momentarily actuate as a result of repeated machine movement caused by an out-of-balance condition. Table A
below illustrates the effect of the vibration safety switch actuation.
that it has reset. In the released position the arm should rest lightly but definitely against the stop on the micro-switch
case that prevents any further arm movement to the left.
For machines with rigid mounted shells, where the machine is bolted to a very substantial foundation, very
little machine movement will occur for a given degree of out-of-balance. Under such conditions it may be better to
adjust the switch to be very sensitive. With less substantial foundations (e.g., ones where the sub-soil is mushy or
springy or otherwise not as desirable), considerably greater machine movement will occur for a given degree of
out-of-balance, in which case a less sensitive vibration switch setting may be indicated.
ÏTable A—Effect of Tripping Vibration Safety Switch
Machine Model
B
Function of Vibration Safety Switch
30015, 30020, and 30022
Disables high speed extract
All microprocessor-controlled washer-extractors not
listed above, and all dye machines
De-energizes three-wire relay, effectively
terminating machine operation
Adjustments
Ê
B
When the machine leaves Milnor®, the actuator arm is
tie-wrapped to prevent damage (except on 30015, 30020, and
30022 models). This tie wrap must be removed after the
machine is set into position but before the machine is operated.
Adjustment of this switch from the factory setting is not
recommended; however, it should be checked for proper
functioning and adjusted if its proper setting is lost.
As shown at right in FIGURE 1, the unit consists of a
sensitive micro-switch with an extended actuating arm supporting an eccentric weight. The weight may be adjusted by
moving it up and down on the arm and by rotating it on the
arm. In addition, the micro-switch itself may be tilted from
side to side.
The sensitivity of the switch increases as the eccentricweight is raised on the actuating arm and decreases as the weight is lowered.
The unit should be adjusted so that the actuating arm
will always reset by itself, this being accomplished by rotating either the switch or the weight to give just enough bias to
cause the switch to reset. Check the adjustment by moving the
arm to the left then slowly releasing it. Make sure the microswitch clicks when the arm is slowly released, thus indicating
ÎFIGURE 1 (MSSMA408BE)
ÎVibration Switch
147
148
Vibration Switch Assembly
R
BMP700613R/83211A
(Sheet 1 of 1)
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Litho in U.S.A.
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Parts List—Vibration Switch Assy.
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Item
. Used In
Part Number
Description
Comments
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES-----------------------------------------------------------------A
SAE03 151
80142B* ASSY-VIBRATION SWT=LG CONTR
CONTAINS 001,002,
005-009
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS-----------------------------------------------------------------all
1
02 02038
85482A PLATE INSULATING SMALL9NOV51
all
2
15P008
02Z TRDCUT PANHD 6-32X1 NIKSTL +WAX
all
5
02 15119
BRACKET = VIBRATION SWITCH
all
6
09R020
04Z SWITCH NC VIBR #WZ-2RW84429-P52
all
7
03 01059
91046A VIBSWITCH CLAMP CADSTL
all
8
03 01058
89417A VIBSWITCH WEIGHT-CADSTL
all
9
15P101
04Z TRDCUT-F PANHD 8-32X3/8 NIKSTL
all
10
02 02038
85482A PLATE INSULATING SMALL9NOV51
all
11
02 10264
BRACKET=SAFESW CAD
149
BMP750047/81307A
MAINTENANCE - VIB SAFETY SWITCH
The vibration safety switch will shut off the machine if properly adjusted. The unit consists of a
sensitive micro switch having a long extended actuating arm on which is mounted on eccentric
weight. The weight may be adjusted both by moving it up and down on the arm, and also by
rotating it on the arm. In addition, the micro switch itself may be turned from side to side.
Upon repeated machine movement caused by out-of-balance, the weight will vibrate sufficiently
to momentarily actuate the switch with electrically causes the 3 wire relay to de-energize.
The unit should be adjusted so that the weighted lever will always reset by itself, this being
accomplished by rotating either the switch or the weight to give just enough bias to cause the
switch to reset. Check the adjustment by moving the arm to the left then slowly releasing it.
Make sure the micro switch “clicks” when arm is slowly released, thus indicating that it has
reset. In the released position, the arm should reset lightly but definitely against the stop on the
micro switch case that prevents any further arm movement to the right.
The sensitivity of the unit increases as the weight is raised on the arm and decreases as the
weight is lowered.
It is not recommended that the adjustment of this switch be changed from the factory setting. It
is, however, true that many installation conditions will dictate readjustment. Essentially, this
device senses the movement of the machine during extraction. In installations with very
substantial foundations and ideal sub-soil condition, very little machine movement will occur for
a given degree of out-of-balance and under such conditions it may be well to adjust the switch to
be very sensitive. In poor installations, or ones where the sub-soil is mushy or springy or
otherwise not as desirable, considerably greater machine movement will occur for a given degree
of out-of-balance, in which case a less sensitive vibration switch adjustment may be indicated.
The vibration safety switch is attached to the frame of the sensing device on the right side of the
machine base of 25 and 60 lb. washer-extractors. Remove the sensing device cover to work on
this switch. On larger machines the vibration safety switch is located in the control box.
NOTE:
The vibration safety switch is not installed on machines for shipboard use.
150
Section
Chemical Supply Devices
151
7
MSSM0213AE /89457V (1 of 2)
È ULES FOR THE FIELD INSTALLATION OF
R
PUMPED-TYPE LIQUID SUPPLY SYSTEMS
APPLICABILITY: All Washer-Extractor Models
GENERAL
Ê
Pellerin Milnor Corporation does not guarantee machines against damage from corrosion caused
by improper installation and/or operation of pumped-type liquid supply systems. The following
precautions must be observed when pumps are used:
1.
Always install the pumping unit lower than the discharge end of the chemical delivery tube as shown
at right. This will prevent any excess chemical concentrate from dribbling out of the tube and onto
unprotected machine surfaces when the machine is
idle.
Merely putting a "drip loop" in the delivery tube
won’t help much. (It might reduce the dribble a
little, but not enough to prevent damage.) The real
solution is to install the pumps below the discharge end of the delivery tubes so excess chemical
won’t dribble out of the tube long after the pumps
stop.
2.
Discharge end
of delivery tube
Pump (below
discharge end
of delivery tube)
If the machine is also equipped with a flushing supply injector:
a.
Always wire the new system so the appropriate flushing valve also operates whenever
chemical is being injected. This will dilute
the concentrated chemical with obvious advantages. If possible, the water flushing valve
should remain on for a minimum of 30 seconds after the longest injection time for that
chemical.
b.
Always inject the chemical into a plastic cup
(and direct the flushing water into the same
cup). This way, any chemical that dribbles out
152
Flush valve ON
when pump is
operating
Supply
tube feeds
into cup
RULES FOR THE FIELD INSTALLATION OF
PUMPED-TYPE LIQUID SUPPLY SYSTEMS
MSSM0213AE/89457V (2 of 2)
of the tube after the pump stops will be diluted by the water remaining in the cup.
3.
Never inject any concentrated chemical directly onto any metal, rubber, or plastic surface
of the machine other than the plastic cups provided.
It is not enough to merely inject the chemical onto a surface that will be subsequently flushed or wetted
sometime during the wash process. This is because the "culprit" is the chemical which dribbles out later.
The damage occurs when the residue of a chemical (even a diluted chemical) dries on a surface—as when
a chemical dribbles out of the delivery tube after the last wash cycle is finished. As the chemical dries, the
water content evaporates—leaving a deposit of a very concentrated chemical which is then free to attack
the host surface throughout the night (or over the weekend) or until the machine is returned to service.
The only realistic solution is to make sure that the discharge end of each chemical delivery tube
is above the pump so excess chemical left in the tube after the pump stops cannot dribble out
later.
153
154
72" Supply Injector Assembly
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
R
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
BMP701401R/83173A
(Sheet 1 of 1)
Litho in U.S.A.
Parts List—72" Supply Injector Assembly
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Item
. Used In
Part Number
Description
Comments
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES-----------------------------------------------------------------A
A36 04900
86417D* ASSY,5FLUSH SUPINJ=72DIVCYL
CONTAINS ALL P/N
BELOW
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS-----------------------------------------------------------------all
7
96M001
02Z 1/2" X 3/8" RELIEF VAL. SET 31#
all
9
03 06253
81271D SUPPORT=SUPPLY INJ PIPING
all
13
60E301
HOSE 2+1/2"ID FOR HYDROCOMBO SUPINJ
all
15
51X019
UNION STRADAPT 3/4" PH#0107-12-12
all
22
15K096
HEXCAPSCR 3/8-16UNC2X1SS18-8
all
23
24G030N
ROLLED WASHER .379"ID NYLTITE #37W
all
24
15U245
01Z FLTWASH 3/8 STD COMM 18-8 SS
all
25
15U260
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM 3/8 SS18-8
all
26
03 06323
83392C MTANGLE,FRONT=FLUSHSUP 72WEU
all
27
03 06324
77446C MTG=SUP INJ REAR WED BND@PRT
all
28
27A083
HOSECLAMP,5+1/8-7.0" CADSCR HS-104
all
33
15G206
HEXNUT 3/8-16 UNC2 SS 18-8
all
34
60E086C16K
79292N* HOSE ASSY=3/4"X 16+1/2"LG
all
35
27A004
01Z NOZZLE SPRACO#H3/4U00350G=WETDN
all
38
30N100
07Z PRESSGUAGE 1/8"BACKCONN 0-30PSI
all
48
15G200
01Z HXCPNUT 3/8-16 UNC2A 5/8X1/2
all
53
27A001
NOZZLE BRASS 1/2" SPRAYSYS #HH29SQ
all
54
03 06261
77446C BOTTOM=SUPVAL COVER BND@PRT
all
55
03 06360
94277D COVER=SUPPLY VALVE TOP
all
56
03 06359
85013D COVER=SUPPLY VALVE FRONT
all
57
W2 15831A
81052P*TRAP-WELDED=SUPINJ INLET SG
all
61
03 06286A
76052C END=SUPPLY VALVE COVER
all
62
03 06286B
76052# END=SUPPLY VALVE COVER-FRONT
all
63
96D047
01Z 1/2" SWING CHECK VALVE
155
156
Section
Water and Steam Piping
and Assemblies
157
8
158
Water Inlet Assembly
R
BMP701634R/71521A
(Sheet 1 of 2)
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Litho in U.S.A.
Parts List—Water Inlet Assembly
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Used In
Item
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
Description
Part Number
96M032
51A074
51L269D
51E061
03-06256
51J120
51L251
51V100
15K086
15U255
15G205
03-06280
96D089
02-10438A
51J143
51L299
51R130
15K173
15G230
15U300
15U280
15U243
15H040
SA-36-041
15G165
15K041
15U180
51L284C
02-18714
15G222
2-15893
51L283K
27B240
03-06257
15K095
96H018
51J007D
51L005
54E221
17A036
Vacuum Breaker, Watts #288A
Hex Pipe Busing, 3" X 2"
Nipple, Pipe, 2" X 9"
Coupling, Pipe, 2"
Bracket, Air Cylinder, 2" Pipe
Elbow, Pipe, 90°, 2"
Nipple, Pipe, 2" X Close
Tee, Pipe, 2"
Hex Cap Screw, 3/8"-16NC X 3/4"
Lockwasher, Medium, 3/8"
Hex Nut, 3/8"-16UNC2
Locking Strap, Ball Valve
Ball Valve, 2", Pitt. #SP17-NOHNDL
Drain Pipe
Elbow, Pipe, 45°, 3"
Nipple, Pipe, 3" X 6"
Bell Reducer, 3" X 2"
Hex Cap Screw, 1/2"-13 X 1-3/4"
Hex Nut, 1/2"-13UNC2
Lockwasher, Medium, 1/2"
Flatwasher, 1/2"
Flatwasher
Std. Cotter Pin, 1/8" X 3/4"
Air Cylinder Assembly, Long
Hex Nut, 1/4"-20UNC2
Hex Cap Screw, 1/4"-20UNC2 X 1"
Lockwasher, Medium, 1/4"
Nipple, Pipe, 2" X 26"
Bearing Housing Shim
Hex Finished Jam Nut, 7/16"-14UNC2
Spacer, Ball Valve Crank Stem
Nipple, Pipe, 2" X 21"
Spacer
Crank, 2" Full Port Ball Valve
Hex Cap Screw, 3/8"-16UNC2 X 1"
Needle Valve, 1/4" X 1/8" X 90°, Anderson #69V-4J
Elbow, Pipe, 90°, 1/8"
Nipple, Pipe, 1/8" X Close
Nyliner 8L5+1/2F Bush
Clevis Pin
159
Comments
160
R
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
BMP920005/96067V (1 of 3)
Universal Actuators & Mounting Hardware for
Watts Ball Valves - New Pivot
3) ASSEMBLE SO THAT THE LINKAGE IS FREE TO MOVE IN THE SPACER, THIS MEANS THAT THERE
SHOULD BE DAYLIGHT BETWEEN THE CRANK AND EACH ADJACENT WASHER WITHOUT
EXCESSIVE CLEARANCE.
2) FOR 90 DEGREE VALVE SET, VALVE IS ROTATED 90 DEGREES.
1)RIGHT HAND ASSEMBLY IS SHOWN, LEFT HAND ASSEMBLY IS OPPOSITE.
NOTES:
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP920005/96067V
(Sheet 1 of 3)
161
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
BMP920005/96067V (2 of 3)
Item
Part Number
Description
Comments
96D085BCSL
96D085BCSR
96D085BOSL
96D085BOSR
96D085SOSR
96D085SCSR
96D086BCSL
96D086BCSR
96D086BOSL
96D086BOSR
96D086SCNR
96D086SCSL
96D086SCSR
96D086SOSL
96D086SOSR
96D087BCSL
96D087BCSR
96D087BOSR
96D087SCNR
96D087SCSR
96D087SOSR
96D088BCSR
96D088BCNR
96D088BCSL
96D088BOSR
96D088SCNR
96D088SCSR
96D088SOSR
96D088BCNL
96D088BOSL
96D088SCSL
96D088SOSL
92000Z 1.00WAT BVAL+ACT/BR/NC/ST/LH
93513S 1.00WAT BVAL+ACT/BR/NC/ST/RH
93513S 1.00WAT BVAL+ACT/BR/NO/ST/LH
93513S 1.00WAT BVAL+ACT/BR/NO/ST/RH
92000Z 1.00WAT BVAL+ACT/SS/NO/ST/RH
92000Z 1.00WAT BVAL+ACT/SS/NC/ST/RH
93513S 1.25WAT BVAL+ACT/BR/NC/ST/LH
93513S 1.25WAT BVAL+ACT/BR/NC/ST/RH
93513S 1.25WAT BVAL+ACT/BR/NO/ST/LH
93513S 1.25WAT BVAL+ACT/BR/NO/ST/RH
92000Z 1.25WAT BVAL+ACT/SS/NC/90/RH
92000Z 1.25WAT BVAL+ACT/SS/NC/ST/LH
92000Z 1.25WAT BVAL+ACT/SS/NC/ST/RH
92000Z 1.25WAT BVAL+ACT/SS/NO/ST/LH
92000Z 1.25WAT BVAL+ACT/SS/NO/ST/RH
93513S 1.50WAT BVAL+ACT/BR/NC/ST/LH
93513S 1.50WAT BVAL+ACT/BR/NC/ST/RH
93513S 1.50WAT BVAL+ACT/BR/NO/ST/RH
92000Z 1.50WAT BVAL+ACT/SS/NC/90/RH
92000Z 1.50WAT BVAL+ACT/SS/NC/ST/RH
92000Z 1.50WAT BVAL+ACT/SS/NO/ST/RH
92177S 2.00WAT BVAL+ACT/BR/NC/ST/RH
92177S 2.00WAT BVAL+ACT/BR/NC/90/RH
92177S 2.00WAT BVAL+ACT/BR/NC/ST/LH
92177S 2.00WAT BVAL+ACT/BR/NO/ST/RH
92177S 2.00WAT BVAL+ACT/SS/NC/90/RH
92177S 2.00WAT BVAL+ACT/SS/NC/ST/RH
92177S 2.00WAT BVAL+ACT/SS/NO/ST/RH
92177S 2.00WAT BVAL+ACT/BR/NC/90/LH
92177S 2.00WAT BVAL+ACT/BR/NO/ST/LH
92177S 2.00WAT BVAL+ACT/SS/NC/ST/LH
92177S 2.00WAT BVAL+ACT/SS/NO/ST/LH
AA-AE
AF
BA-BD
BE-BJ
CA-CC
AA-AD,
BA-BD,
CA-CC
AE-AF,
BE-BJ,
CD-CF
DA-DD,
DH-DJ
DE-DG,
DK-DL
SA 10 057C
SA 10 057D
1
1
96D085WEXS
96D085WSS
96D086WEXS
96D086WSS
96D087WEXS
SA 10 056G
1
2
2
2
2
2
SA 10 056F
1
07Z BALVAL 1" BRZ WATTS#B6400SSZ107
07Z BALVAL 1" SS WATTS S8000-Z107
08Z BAVAL 1+1/4BRZ WATS#B6400SSZ107
08Z BAVAL 1+1/4"SS WATTS S8000-Z107
09Z BAVAL 1+1/2BRZ WATS#B6400SSZ107
95222# AIRCYL=3.0ODX3.89ST171/176SS
95222D AIRCYL=3.0ODX3.89ST171/176CD
92000Z*AIRCYL=2.38ODX2.70STX20.5#SS
92000Z AIRCYL=2.38ODX2.70STX20.5#CD
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS------------------------------------------------------------------
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
BG
BH
BJ
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
DA
DB
DC
DD
DE
DF
DG
DH
DJ
DK
DL
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES------------------------------------------------------------------
. Used In
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Parts List—Actuators & Mounting Hardware for Watts Ball Valves
R
15N117
7
8
9
10
all
all
all
15U135
15N130
15U181
15K031
03 01624C
6
7
03 01624B
6
all except
CC,CD
CC,CD
07 20703B
03 01631A
07 20703A
6
6
6
03 01631
6
AA,AB,AF,
CD
AC-AE
BA,BB,BE,
BF,BG,CA,
CB,CE
BC,BD,BH,
BJ
DA,DC,DF,
DK
DB,DD,DE,
DG,DH,DJ,
DL
03 01629L
4
54E001PABA
54E002PABA
03 01629
4
5
5
07 20702A
4
03 01628L
3
07 20702L
03 01633
03 01628
3
3
4
07 20700
3
03 01632A
03 01632
07 20700L
3
4
4
03 01634A
03 01634
96D088WSS
2
3
3
96D087WSS
96D088WEXS
Part Number
2
2
Item
Description
FLATWASH#10 .4370DX.203IDX.04TSS188
RDMACHSCR 10-24UNC2A X 1/2 SS18-8
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM 1/4 SS18-8
RDMACSCR 10-24UNC2X3/8SS18-8
BUTSOKCAPSCR 1/4-20X1/2 SS18-8
92061B CRANK=NO 2"BALVAL .626 STEM
92061B CRANK=NC 2"BALVAL .626 STEM
88153B VALVE CRANK N.O.WATTS 1.5"
88381B VALVE CRANK N.O.WATTS-1.0"
91507B VALVE CRANK N.C.WATTS 1.5"
91507B+VALVE CRANK N.C.WATTS 1.0"
89281B ASSY=1/4"PRESSBEARING
89281B ASSY=5/16"PRESSBEARING
92023# ACT BEARING SUPPORT 3"-LEFT
92023C ACTUATOR BEARING SUPPORT 3
88512C ACTUATOR BEARING SUPPORT
88512# ACTUATOR BEARING SUPPORT-LFT
90507# ACTUATOR BEARING SUPPRT-LEFT
90507C ACTUATOR BEARING SUPPORT-1"
92126# ACT ZEE SUP 3" AIRCYL-LEFT
92651C ACTUATOR SUPPORT BRKT 1.0"
92126D ACTUATOR ZEE SUP 3"AIRCYL
88512D ACTUATOR ZEE SUPPORT
88512# ACTUATOR ZEE SUPPORT-LEFT
94053# ACTUATOR CHANNL SUPPORT-LEFT
94053C ACTUATOR CHANNL SUPPORT 1.0"
09Z BALVAL 2" SS WATTS S8000-Z107
08Z BAVAL 1+1/2"SS WATTS S8000-Z107
09Z BALVAL 2" BRZ WATTS#B6400SSZ107
Comments
Parts List, cont.—Actuators & Mounting Hardware for Watts Ball Valves
AA-AF,CD
BA-BJ,
CA-CC,CF,
DA-DL
AA,AC
AB,AD-AF,
CD
BA,BC,BF,
BH,CA
BB,BD,BE,
BG,BJ,CB,
CC,CE, CF
DA,DB,
DD-DG
DC,DH-DL
AA,AC
AB,AD,AE,
AF
BA,BC,BF,
BH,CA
BB,BD,BE,
BG,BJ,CB,
CC,CE, CF
CD
DA,DB,
DD-DG
DC,DH-DL
CD-CF
DA-DD,
DH-DJ
DE-DG,
DK-DL
Used In
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP920005/96067V
(Sheet 2 of 3)
BMP920005/96067V
(Sheet 3 of 3)
R
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Litho in U.S.A.
Parts List, cont.—Universal Actuators & Mounting Hardware for Watts Ball Valves
Item
Used In
Part Number
Description
all
11
15G126
01Z HXLOCKNUT NYLON 10-24 UNC SS NM
all
all
12
13
15N159
15G170
HEXCAPSCR 1/4-2OUNC2AX7/16 18-8SS
HEXNUT 1/4-20UNC2 SS18-8
AA-AF,BE,
CD,DA-DL
BA-BD,
BF-BJ,
CA-CC,CE,
CF
14
07 20703D
89354B WASHER=2.00"WATTS CRANK
14
07 20703C
89354B WASHER=1.25-1.50 WATTS CRANK
all
15
02 15893
92683B SPACER=BALL VALVE CRANK STEM
all
16
15U188
01Z FLTWASH 1/4 STD COMM SS18-8
all
17
15N186
HXCAPSCR 1/4-20UNC2X3/4SS18-8
all
18
15G164
01Z HX THIN LOCKNUT NYL1/4-20 SS
BA,BB,BE,
BJ,CE
DA,DB,
DD-DG
DC,DH-DL
19
03 01661A
92271B BRKT=RHT AIR CYL SUPT-S/S
19
03 01625A
92271B 3" AIR-CYL SPT BRK R-SIDE RT
19
03 01625B
92271# 3" AIR-CYL SPT BRK R-SIDE LT
BE,BG,BJ,
CE-CF
DA,DB,
DD-DG
DC,DH,
DJ-DL
20
03 01662A
92271B BRKT=LFT AIR CYL SUPT-S/S
20
03 01625C
92271B 3" AIR-CYL SPT BRK L-SIDE RT
20
03 01625D
92271# RIGHT=3"AIR CYL SUPT BRKT
all
21
15K190S
HXCAPSCR 1/2-13UNC2AX2.5 FLTHRD SS
all
22
27B24S0K1P
SPACER ROLL.5ID1.75L.062T 304 SS
all
23
15U318S
FLATWASH 1.12ODX.656IDX.09T 304 SS
AB,DA-DL
24
15G234NS
HXLOCKNUT NYL 1/2-13UNC2 SS18-8
all
25
15K180S
HXCAPSCR 1/2-13UNCAX2 18-8SS
all
26
27B24SSK1F
SPACER ROLL.5ID1.25L.062T S/S
all
27
15U310
LOKWASHER REGULAR 1/2 SS18-8
all
28
15G231S
HXFINJAMNUT 1/2-13UNC2B SS18-8
AA-AF
BA-BJ
CA-CF
DA-DL
29
29
29
29
03 01633
07 20771
07 20770
03 01626
92651C ACTUATOR SUPPORT BRKT 1.0"
88407C ACTUATOR SUPPORT BRKT 1.25"
88243B ACTUATOR SUPPORT BKT 1+1/2
89473B ACTUATOR SUPPORT BRKT 2"VAL
162
Comments
163
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
BMP920007/96067V (1 of 2)
3
SEE NOTE
BODY SEAL
ADAPTER
THRUST
WASHER
PACKING
HANDLE
STEM (BK)
3
5
NO REPAIR KITS
NO REPAIR KITS
3/4",1"
BRONZE
DETAIL
OLD STYLE STEM
PACKING NUT
SEAL (SSK)
SEE NOTE.
1/2" BRONZE OR 1/2", 3/4" STAINLESS
(BK) BALL
SEATS
BODY
LOCK NUT
2
PACKING
NUT
1
BALL VALVES WITHOUT ACTUATOR PADS FOR MANUAL OPERATION
R
Watts Ball Valves and Repair Kits
8
9
ADAPTER
BODY SEAL (SSK)
SEATS (SSK)
THRUST WASHER (SK,SSK)
STEM O-RINGS (SK,SSK)
WASHER (SK)
(For Bracketry and Mounting Hardware, See BMP920005. For Air Cylinders
that Operate Watts Ball Valves, See BMP920006.)
(BK) BALL
BODY
(SK,SSK) PACKING
GLAND O-RING
NUT (SK)
STEM (BK)
1",1-1/4",1-1/2",2"
BRONZE & STAINLESS
10 11 12 13
(SK) PACKING NUT
7
The ball valves are separated by size, material, and type of operation. Find the cross section which shows your ball
valve (example 1-1/2" bronze air operated). See the parts list for the item number which represents your ball valve
(1-1/2" bronze air operated would be item 10 on the parts list). For valves that offer repair kits the internal parts are
labled and marked as to which kit they are found in:
- (BK) part of Ball Kit
- (SK) part of Stem Kit
- (SSK) part of Seat/Seal Kit
For the part number of the Seat/Seal Kit for item 10 (1-1/2" bronze air operated valve) see the parts list and look for
item 10SSK, likewise the Stem Kit will be 10SK.
NOTE:
AIR OPERATED VALVES: (SSK) kits for air operated ball valves include all parts required to repair either our old style
or new style stems. A packing nut seal is provided to repair our old style stems which had a seal in the packing nut (see
Detail). Our new style stem uses a double o-ring design.
HOW TO USE THIS DRAWING:
6
AIR OPERATED BALL VALVES
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP920007/96067V
(Sheet 1 of 2)
164
Parts List—Watts Ball Valves and Repair Kits
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
BMP920007/96067V (2 of 2)
Item
Part Number
Description
Comments
002BK
002SSK 96V040SSK
all
all
4
004BK
004SSK 96V055SSK
5
6
006BK
006SK
006SSK 96V085SSK
7
007BK
007SK
007SSK 96V085SSK
8
008BK
008SK
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
01Z BALL VALVE 1" WATTS#B6100 BRZ
01Z REPKIT 3/4"VAL WATTS#4SSK-02-RK
BALL & STEM KIT WATTS #4BSK-SSRK
01Z 3/4"BALLVALVE S/S WATTS#S-8000
01Z 3/4"BALLVALVE BRZ WATTS#B6100
01Z REPKIT 1/2"VAL WATTS#3SSK-02-RK
BALL KIT WATTS #BV4SSA6
01Z 1/2" BALLVALVE S/S WATTS#S-8000
04Z BALLVALVE 1/2" WATTS #6400-SS
02Z REPKIT 1"BALVAL#1SSK-02-KK-Z107
02Z STEM KIT 1" WATTS#1-ST-RK-Z107
BALL KIT WATTS #1-BALL-RK-Z107
07Z BALVAL 1" SS WATTS S8000-Z107
02Z REPKIT 1"BALVAL#1SSK-02-KK-Z107
02Z STEM KIT 1" WATTS#1-ST-RK-Z107
BALL KIT WATTS #1-BALL-RK-Z107
96V086A7SK
96V086BK
02Z STEMKIT 1.25-1.5-ST-RK-Z107
BALL KIT WATTS #1.25-BALL-RK-Z107
96D086WEXS 08Z BAVAL 1+1/4BRZ WATS#B6400SSZ107
96V085SK
96V085BK
96D085WSS
96V085SK
96V085BK
96D085WEXS 07Z BALVAL 1" BRZ WATTS#B6400SSZ107
96D084
96V055BK
96D055WSS
3
all
96D050A
96V040BK
96D040WSS
2
all
96D034
1
all
1-1/4"BRONZE-AIR
OPERATED
1" STAINLESS-AIR
OPERATED
1" BRONZE-AIR
OPERATED
NO KITS
1" BRONZE-MANUAL ,
3/4"STAINLESS-MANUAL
NO KITS
3/4"BRONZE-MANUAL,
1/2"STAINLESS-MANUAL
NO KITS
1/2"BRONZE-MANUAL,
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS------------------------------------------------------------------
none
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES------------------------------------------------------------------
. Used In
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
R
96V086A7SK
96V087BK
011SSK 96V087SSK
12
all
all
02Z REPAIR KIT 1.5" BALL VALVE
02Z STEMKIT 1.25-1.5-ST-RK-Z107
BALL KIT WATTS #1.5-BALL-RK-Z107
08Z BAVAL 1+1/2"SS WATTS S8000-Z107
02Z REPAIR KIT 1.5" BALL VALVE
02Z STEMKIT 1.25-1.5-ST-RK-Z107
BALL KIT WATTS #1.5-BALL-RK-Z107
012SK
012SSK 96V088SSK
13
all
all
all
013SK
013SSK 96V088SSK
all
all
96V088SK
013BK
all
96V088BK
96D088WSS
96V088SK
012BK
all
96V088BK
02Z REPKIT 2"VAL WAT2SSK-02-RK-Z107
03Z STEM KIT 2" WATTS#2-ST-RK-Z107
BALL KIT WATTS #2-BALL-RK-Z28
09Z BALVAL 2" SS WATTS S8000-Z107
02Z REPKIT 2"VAL WAT2SSK-02-RK-Z107
03Z STEM KIT 2" WATTS#2-ST-RK-Z107
BALL KIT WATTS #2-BALL-RK-Z28
96D088WEXS 09Z BALVAL 2" BRZ WATTS#B6400SSZ107
96V086A7SK
011SK
all
96V087BK
96D087WSS
011BK
11
010SSK 96V087SSK
010SK
02Z REPKIT 1.25BALVALSSK-02-RK-Z107
02Z STEMKIT 1.25-1.5-ST-RK-Z107
BALL KIT WATTS #1.25-BALL-RK-Z107
08Z BAVAL 1+1/4"SS WATTS S8000-Z107
96D087WEXS 09Z BAVAL 1+1/2BRZ WATS#B6400SSZ107
all
all
all
all
010BK
10
all
all
009SSK 96V086SSK
all
96V086A7SK
009SK
all
96V086BK
96D086WSS
009BK
9
02Z REPKIT 1.25BALVALSSK-02-RK-Z107
Description
Comments
2"STAINLESS-AIR
OPERATED
2"BRONZE-AIR
OPERATED
OPER.
1-1/2"STAINLESS-AIR/
1-1/2"BRONZE-AIR
OPERATED
1-1/4"STAINLESS-AIR
OPER.
Parts List, cont.—Watts Ball Valves and Repair Kits
Part Number
008SSK 96V086SSK
Item
all
all
all
Used In
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP920007/96067V
(Sheet 2 of 2)
165
R
5. Unscrew and remove adjusting screw, check nut, and spring cage screws. Lift off
spring cage, spring washer and adjusting spring.
4. While disassembled open gate valve to flush out collected sediment.
8. To reassemble valve follow above instructions in reverse. Tighten or loosen adjusting
screw for the required pressure of 28 P.S.I.
7. Lift stem assembly upwards to remove from body.
6. Loosen and remove lock nut, washer, plate, and diaphragm.
4. Seat can be removed, if necessary, with an allen wrench or socket wrench.
3. Unscrew seat cylinder from body and remove entire assembly.
2. Loosen disc holder with screwdriver or socket wrench.
1. Remove bottom plug and gasket.
TO CLEAN OR REPLACE PARTS:
ALL ITEMS MARKED WITH
AN ASTERISK (*) ARE
INCLUDED IN A REPAIR KIT.
FOR A LIST OF AVAILABLE
REPAIR KITS, SEE PARTS
LIST.
Litho in U.S.A.
3. Inspect disc and clean or replace.
BMP900031/96081V (1 of 2)
BMP900031/96081V
(Sheet 1 of 2)
2. Loosen and remove diaphragm lock nut, lock washer, pressure plate, and
diaphragm from valve stem.
1.Remove spring cage and all parts above diaphragm.
TO CLEAN OR REPLACE PARTS:
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Pressure Regulators
BMP900031/96081V
(Sheet 2 of 2)
R
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Litho in U.S.A.
Parts List—Pressure Regulators
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Item
. Used In
Part Number
Description
Comments
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES-----------------------------------------------------------------X
96J030FF
01Z 1/2"PRESS REG SET 28# FEM X FEM
(NO REPAIR KIT)
Y
96J030D
01Z 1/2" PRESREGULTR SET 28# FEM-UN
(FOR KIT, SEE BELOW)
Z
96J031D
01Z 3/4" PRESREGULTR SET 28# FEM-UN
(FOR KIT, SEE BELOW)
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS-----------------------------------------------------------------all
1
96V158B
REPAIRKIT #14510=1/2 PRESSREG EB86
(KIT/DISCONT.VLV1/2
EB72)
all
2
96V158C
REPAIRKIT #10341 FOR E24U (96J030C)
(KIT/DISCONT.VLV1/2
E24U)
Y
3
96V158D
REP.KIT #14649FOR 1/2"E72U& E86U
all
4
96V159B
REPAIRKIT C/A#14511=3/4PRESREG EB72
Z
5
96V159D
REP KIT #14648 FOR 3/4"E72U +E86U
166
(KIT/DISCONT.VLV3/4
EB72)
167
R
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Water Level Float Chamber
Parts List—Water Level Float Chamber
Item
Part Number
Description
Comments
A03 03100
ALL11001
A14 07200C
ALL48001
AD 14 046
AD 15 047
ALL11000
G28 18700A
G36 07500A
G25 02600A
GLL64002
ALL64002
FLOAT CHMBR ASSY=8.25"CLDCON
*FLOAT CHAMBER INSTAL=4226QHE
$ ASSY=FLOAT SPRAY 42DAZ
*FLOAT CHAMBER ASSY 4832-36
*FLOAT CHMBR INSTAL=35#+60#W
FLOAT CHMBR 25.25ASY=42+72WE
*FLOAT CHMBR 33.25ASSY=4226Q
FLOAT CHAMBER 25.25 INST=60"
FLOAT CHAMBER 25.25 INST=72"
FLOAT CHAMBER INSTAL=5238
FLOAT CHAMB=FRAME INSTL 64NP
FLT CHAMBR ASSY64NP W/90D 1N
DYE TANKS
4832,4836
3621CPE,BWP
4231,4244
4226Q
6044
7244
5238
6446
6446
5N0K04AG42 NPT NIP 1/2X4 TBE GALSTL SK40
5SR0K0CNF
3
3
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
alL
alL
alL
alL
alL
alL
alL
alL
alL
.
alL
alL
alL
HXNUT 1/4-20UNC2BSAE ZC GR2
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM 1/4 ZINCPL
HXCAPSCR 1/4-20UNC2AX3/4 GR5 Z
BRACKET LEVCONT PER PRINT
CLAMP-3"FLOAT CHAMBERED
10-24 SPEDNUT #C10733-1024-373
LEVEL CONTROL FLOAT ROD=25"L
LEVEL CONTROL FLOAT ROD=66"L
COUPLING=FLOAT ROD
5SP0KGFSS
5S0KNFA1A
5SL0KNFA
NPT PLUG 1/2 SOSOLID GALSTL
NPT TEE 1/2X1/2X1" GALMAL 150#
NPT RED 1/2X1/8 GALMAL 150#
NPTELB 90DEG 1/2 GALMAL 150#
5N0KCLSG42 NPT NIP 1/2XCLS TBE GALSTLSK40
15G165
15U180
15K039
02 15097C
02 15642A
17N050
02 02146
02 02146E
02 02146B
FLOAT=PLAST LVL CONT(SANDED)
alL
alL
alL
X2 02239
2
* FLOAT-TUBE L=25.25"
FLOAT CHAMBER 96"LG REUSE
*FLOAT CHAMBER-33.25"W/90DIN
AlL
W2 14432
X2 14432K
W2 14432M
1
1
1
alL
alL
alL
4226,4832,4836,6442
4226,4832,4836,6442
COOLDOWN OPT.
COOLDOWN OPT
COOLDOWN OPT.
TO ORDER SEE ITEMS 30+31
TO ORDER SEE ITEM 30
TO ORDER SEE ITEM 31
FOR USE WITH REUSE SUMP
TO ORDER SEE ITEMS 30+31
FOR USE WITH REUSE SUMP
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS------------------------------------------------------------------
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES------------------------------------------------------------------
. Used In
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP810111/2003262V
(Sheet 1 of 2)
168
26
26
27
27
27
27
30
31
alL
AlL
alL
alL
alL
alL
alL
24
alL
alL
23
alL
26
22
alL
alL
21
alL
26
20
alL
alL
19
alL
25
18
alL
alL
17
alL
Used In
R
Item
Description
NPT RED 1X1/4 GALMAL 150#
NPTELB 90DEG 1/4 BRASS 125#
SA 02 011B
SA 02 011
03 25298A
08 01065
02 15649
02 10505
03 25298A
02 15649
02 15663
02 10506
27A003
53A008B
12P014KK
51V015
*FLOAT ASSY L=66" 42DA+52DYA
*FLOAT ASSY L=25"-STD LEVEL
FLOAT CHAMBER BRACK
BRACKET=LEVEL CNTRL MT 90DEG
BRKT=FLOAT CHAMBER MTG
BRACKET=TOP FLOATCHMBR+$8 SU
FLOAT CHAMBER BRACK
BRKT=FLOAT CHAMBER MTG
BRKT=FLOAT CHAMBER MTG
BRACKET-BOTTOM FLOAT=CHAMBER
NOZZLE 1/4" BRASS SQUARE PATTE
BODYMALECON.25X.25COMP#B68A-4B
CABLE CLMP NONMTL 1/2IDX1/2WID
TEE 1/4 FGDBRASS 101T7-444
5N0E03KBE2 NPT NIP 1/4X3.5 TBE BRASS STD
5SL0EBEA
5N0KCLSG42 NPT NIP 1/2XCLS TBE GALSTLSK40
5SR1A0ENF
5N1A07AG42 NPT NIP 1X7 TBE GALSTL SK40
Part Number
Comments
ITEMS 002,003B,004
ITEMS 002,003A,004
4832,4836,6442
4226DYA
4231,4241,6036, 6044,7244
3016,3621
4832,4836,6442
6036,6044
4231,4241,7244
3016,3621
SPRAY-DOWN /DYE MACHINES
SPRAY-DOWN /DYE MACHINES
SPRAY-DOWN /DYE MACHINES
SPRAY-DOWN /DYE MACHINES
SPRAY-DOWN /DYE MACHINES
SPRAY-DOWN /DYE MACHINES
4226,4832,4836,6442
4226,4832,4836,6442
4226,4832,4836,6442
Parts List, cont.—Water Level Float Chamber
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Used In
Item
Part Number
Description
Comments
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP810111/2003262V
(Sheet 2 of 2)
WATER LEVEL FLOAT CHAMBER
ASSEMBLY
R
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
BMP810111R/89256A
(Sheet 1 of 2)
Litho in U.S.A.
Parts List—WATER LEVEL FLOAT CHAMBER
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Item
. Used In
Part Number
Description
Comments
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES-----------------------------------------------------------------A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
A03 03100
ALL11001
A14 07200C
ALL48001
AD 14 046
AD 15 047
ALL11000
G28 18700A
G36 07500A
G25 02600A
GLL64002
ALL64002
78226U FLOAT CHMBR ASSY=8.25"CLDCON
92052D*FLOAT CHAMBER INSTAL=4226QHE
80326L$ ASSY=FLOAT SPRAY 42DAZ
92052#*FLOAT CHAMBER ASSY 4832-36
78267U*FLOAT CHMBR INSTAL=35#+60#W
92053# FLOAT CHMBR 25.25ASY=42+72WE
92053#*FLOAT CHMBR 33.25ASSY=4226Q
80086D FLOAT CHAMBER 25.25 INST=60"
80086# FLOAT CHAMBER 25.25 INST=72"
77137# FLOAT CHAMBER INSTAL=5238
85376D FLOAT CHAMB=FRAME INSTL 64NP
92086D FLT CHAMBR ASSY64NP W/90D 1N
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS-----------------------------------------------------------------alL
alL
1
1
W2 14432
X2 14432K
91436T* FLOAT-TUBE L=25.25"
77521B FLOAT CHAMBER 96"LG REUSE
alL
1
W2 14432M
84472T*FLOAT CHAMBER-33.25"W/90DIN
alL
2
X2 02239
92683# FLOAT=PLAST LVL CONT(SANDED)
TO ORDER SEE ITEMS
30+31
alL
3
02 02146
84277A LEVEL CONTROL FLOAT ROD=25"L
TO ORDER SEE ITEM
30
alL
3
02 02146E
84277# LEVEL CONTROL FLOAT ROD=66"L
TO ORDER SEE ITEM
31
alL
3
02 02146B
73336A COUPLING=FLOAT ROD
FOR USE WITH REUSE
SUMP
alL
4
17N050
10-24 SPEEDNUT #C10733-1024-373
TO ORDER SEE ITEMS
30+31
alL
6
02 15642A
CLAMP-3"FLOAT CHAMBER
alL
7
02 15097C
88036B BRACKET LEVCONT PER PRINT
alL
8
15K039
HXCAPSCR 1/4-20UNC2AX3/4 GR5 ZNC/CD
alL
9
15U180
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM 1/4 ZINCPL
alL
10
15G165
HXNUT 1/4-20UNC2BSAE ZC GR2
alL
11
5N0KCLSG42 NPT NIPPLE 1/2XCLS TBE GALSTL SK40
alL
12
5SL0KNFA
NPT ELBOW 90DEG 1/2" GALMAL 150#
169
FOR USE WITH REUSE
SUMP
COOLDOWN OPT.
BMP810111R/89256A
(Sheet 2 of 2)
R
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Litho in U.S.A.
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Parts List, cont.—WATER LEVEL FLOAT CHAMBER
Item
Used In
Part Number
Description
Comments
alL
13
5N0K04AG42 NPT NIPPLE 1/2X4 TBE GALSTL SK40
COOLDOWN OPT.
alL
14
5SR0K0CNF
NPT RED 1/2X1/8 GALMAL 150#
COOLDOWN OPT.
alL
15
5S0KNFA1A
NPT TEE 1/2X1/2X1" GALMAL 150#
4226,4832,4836,6442
alL
16
5SP0KGFSS
NPT PLUG 1/2 SOSOLID GALSTL
4226,4832,4836,6442
alL
17
5N1A07AG42 NPT NIPPLE 1X7 TBE GALSTL SK40
4226,4832,4836,6442
alL
18
5SR1A0ENF
4226,4832,4836,6442
alL
19
5N0KCLSG42 NPT NIPPLE 1/2XCLS TBE GALSTL SK40
4226,4832,4836,6442
alL
20
5SL0EBEA
NPT ELBOW 90DEG 1/4" BRASS 125#
SPRAY-DOWN /DYE
MACHINES
alL
21
5N0E03KBE2 NPT NIPPLE 1/4X3.5 TBE BRASS 125#
SPRAY-DOWN /DYE
MACHINES
alL
22
51V015
03Z TEE PIPE 1/4"FGDBRASS101-T7-444
SPRAY-DOWN /DYE
MACHINES
alL
23
12P014KK
01Z CABLE CLMP NONMTL 1/2IDX1/2WIDE
SPRAY-DOWN /DYE
MACHINES
alL
24
53A008B
BODY=BRMALCON 1/4X1/4COMP W#B68X4X4 SPRAY-DOWN /DYE
MACHINES
alL
25
27A003
NOZZLE 1/4" BRASS SQUARE PATTERN
alL
26
02 10506
84417B BRACKET-BOTTOM FLOAT=CHAMBER 3016,3621
alL
26
02 15663
85093C BRKT=FLOAT CHAMBER MTG
4231,4241,7244
alL
26
02 15649
83403B BRKT=FLOAT CHAMBER MTG
6036,6044
alL
26
03 25298A
83182C FLOAT CHAMBER BRACK
4832,4836,6442
alL
27
02 10505
70097B BRACKET=TOP FLOATCHMBR
3016,3621
alL
27
02 15649
83403B BRKT=FLOAT CHAMBER MTG
4231,4241,6036,
NPT RED 1X1/4 GALMAL 150#
SPRAY-DOWN /DYE
MACHINES
6044,7244
alL
27
08 01065
84402B BRACKET=LEVEL CNTRL MT 90DEG
4226DYA
alL
27
03 25298A
83182C FLOAT CHAMBER BRACK
4832,4836,6442
alL
30
SA 02 011
90013C*FLOAT ASSY L=25"-STD LEVEL
ITEMS 002,003A,004
alL
31
SA 02 011B
90013#*FLOAT ASSY L=66" 42DA+52DYA
ITEMS 002,003B,004
170
171
R
Notes:
1. Disconnect power at main switch before operating this enclosure.
2. Wiring must not interfere with movement of item 8.
3. To order complete water level switch assembly, see items A-G.
4. When item 20 is used in assembly G, flange will be on top (shown).
When item 20 is used in assembly F, flange will be on bottom.
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Water Level Switch Assembly
Parts List—Water Level Switch Assembly
ELL000MK1
ELL000MK2
ELL000MK2A
ELL000MK2S
ELL000MK3
ELL000MK4
ELL000MK5
*LIQUOR LEVEL SW ASSY CBW
*WATER LEV SW ASSY: 1 UP+ 1LO
*CONVEYOR E-STOP ASSY 1UP-1DN
*MK2 WATER LEVE SWITCH ASSYSS
WATER LEV SW ASSY:0 UP +1 LO
*WATER LEV SW ASSY:1 UP +2 LO
$WATER LEV SW:2UP +1LO
1 UP + 0 LO
1 UP + 1 LO
1 UP + 1 LO
1 UP + 1 LO SS
0 UP + 1 LO
1 UP +2 LO
2 UP + 1 LO
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
10
10
10
11
12
13
14
14
15
16
16
17
17
18
19
20
21
A-D,F-G
B-G
F-G
004-C,E-G
D only
all
all
all
all
A-C-E-G
D only
A-B-E-G
C only
D only
all
all
A-C,E-G
A-C,E-G
D
all
A-C,E-G
D only
A-C,E-G
D only
all
F-G only
F-G only
F-G only
03 01462C
15J051
15U060
15U100
15U102
15P105
15P103
15P100
15N021
02 02554
02 02554A
02 02554S
15N019
15U021
15N055
15G070
15G075
02 02152
02 02164
02 02190
02 02553
02 02553S
09R014A
09R014A
09R014WS
02 02150M
02 02150S
01 10227
ANGLE=H20 LEVEL ACTUATOR
POPRIVET 1/8DIAX.265 LONG S/S
FLAT WASHER#6 ANSI TYPEB BRASS
LOKWASHER MEDIUM #6 ZINCPL
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM #6 SS18-8
TRDCUT-F PANHD 8-32X5/8 NIKSTL
TRDCUT-F RDHDSLOT 8-32UNCX1/2
#8 X 3/8 PHILPANHD TYPE B SMS
RDMACSCR 4-40 UNC2X1 ZINC PLT
COVER=LEVEL CONTROL-PLTD
COVER=CONVEYOR E-STOP-PLATED
WATER LEVEL CONTROL ENCL S/S
RDMACSCR 4-40UNC2AX5/8 ZINC GR
LOKWASH EXTOOTH #4 (US STD) ZI
RDMACHSCR 6-32UNC2AX5/8 ZINC G
HXMACHSCRNUT 6-32UNC2B ZINC GR
HEX MACH SCREW NUT 6-32UNC2 S
BUSHING=FLOAT LEVER
INSULATION=V3-1 MICROSWITCH
FLOATLEVER=LEVEL SW
BASE=LEVEL CONTROL
BASE=LEVEL CONTROL ENCL S/S
MINI-SW SPDT STAKON #V15G1C26K
MINI-SW SPDT STAKON #V15G1C26K
MICROSW SPDT STAKON V3-2101-D8
SW MOUNTPLATE=LEVCONT ZINCPL
PLATE=SWITCH MNT LEVEL S/S
LABEL=WATER LEVEL SWITCH ASMB
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS------------------------------------------------------------------
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Item Part Number
Description
Comments
. Used In
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES------------------------------------------------------------------
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP800186/2002226V
(Sheet 1 of 1)
172
Stainless Steel Dump Valve Assembly
R
BMP701370R/72431A
(Sheet 1 of 1)
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Litho in U.S.A.
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Parts List—S/S Dump Valve Assembly
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Item
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
MILNOR Part No.
8"
10"
Description
Head, Cylinder
Hex Nut, 5/16"-18UNC2, Zn. Pltd. Stl..
"0" Ring, 2" I.D. X 3/16" C.S., Buna-N, 70 Duro
Tie Rod, Dump Valve Cylinder
Hex Thin Lock Nut, 3/8"-24, S.S.
Washer, Piston Cup, Small
Washer, Piston Cup, Large
Washer, Piston Cup Comp. Limiting
Bonnet, Dump Valve
Washer, 3/8", Nyltite
Gasket, Bonnet
Dump Valve Weldment
Bushing
Seat, Dump Valve
Flatwasher, U.S. Std., 1/2", 18-8 S.S.
Flatwasher, U.S. Std., 3/8", 18-8 S.S.
Bumper, Piston Stem
Disk, Dump Valve
Stem
Hex Nut, 1/4"-20UNC2, 18-8 S.S.
Lockwasher, Medium, 1/4", 18-8 S.S.
Gasket, Bonnet
Hex Cap Screw, 3/8"-16UNCX 3/4", 18-8 S.S.
Bonnet
Rolled Washer
Hex Cap Screw, 1/4" 2OUNC2X1", Zn. Pltd. Stl.
Spring, Dump Valve, Inner
Spring, Dump Valve, Outer
"O" Ring, 5/16" I.D. X 1/16" C.S., Buna-N, 70 Duro
Piston Cup
Cylinder
Lockwasher, Medium, 5/8", Zn. Pltd. Stl.
Square Pipe Plug, 1/2", 125# PSI Rating, Galv. Cast
Iron, Solid
173
02-02101
15G185
60C132
02-02272
15G220
02-02085
02-02105
02-02185
02-18931E
24G030N
02-18104
W2-18931
02-09164
02-18068
15U285
15U245
02-02545
02-18796
02-16021
15G170
15U181
02-02743
15K086
02-18931F
24G020N
15K041
02-17023
02-02110
60C106
02-02194
02-02068A
15U210
51P020
02-02101
15G185
60C132
02-02272
15G220
02-02085
02-02105
02-02185
02-18931E
24G030N
03-06086G
W3-06086
02-09164
03-06084
15U285
15U245
02-02545
03-6083
02-16021
15G170
15U181
02-02743
15K086
02-18931F
24G020N
15K041
02-17023
02-02110
60C106
02-02194
02-02068A
15U210
51P020
174
R
3
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Burket Steam Valve
2
1
BMP800020/96066V (1 of 1)
Parts List—Burket Steam Valve
Item
Part Number
Description
Comments
96D0011ER1
96D0011ER2
96D0011ER3
X
Y
Z
REPAIR KIT MULLER 1.25 VALVE #554
ACTUATOR HOUSING FOR BURKET #251
02Z REPAIR KIT 1.25" STEAM VALVE
02Z REPAIRKIT 3/4" STEAM VALVE
KIT FOR 001B
KIT FOR 001B
KIT FOR 001B
KIT FOR 001A
2
3
3
all
all
1
all
all
1
all
51T060
51T030
96H018
96D0011E
96D0009E
01Z Y-STRAINER 1+1/4" CAST IRON
01Z Y-STRAINER 3/4" CAST IRON
NEEDLE VALVE
08Z 1/25"NPT N/C STEAMVAL ANGLEBODY
03Z 3/4"NPT N/C STEAMVAL ANGLE BODY
USED WITH 001B
USED WITH 001A
1-1/4"
3/4"
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS------------------------------------------------------------------
96D0009ER1
W
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES------------------------------------------------------------------
. Used In
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP800020/96066V
(Sheet 1 of 1)
175
ASS14001
ASS25001
ASS52001
ASS52001D
ASS65001
ASS29001
NOTE: TO DETERMINE
ASSEMBLY NUMBER
FOR YOUR MACHINE
SEE REVERSE SIDE
ASS64001
STEAM SPARGER ASSEMBLIES
ASS60005A - (3/4" ORIFICE)
ASS60006A - (1/2" ORIFICE)
ASS60007A - (3/4" ORIFICE)
ASS60008A - (1/2" ORIFICE)
BMP900001/96132V (Page 1)
176
ASS14001
ASS25001
ASS52001
ASS52001D
ASS29001
ASS64001
ASS64001A
ASS65001
ASS60005A
ASS60006A
ASS60007A
ASS60008A
W2 14628A
W3 64566B
W2 19565A
W3 64564
W3 64564A
02 11369D
00A
00B
00C
00D
00E
00F
00FF
00G
00H
00I
00J
00K
001A
001B
002
003
004
005
92612T*ASSY=STM MIXER .5 ORF-21.5"L
92612#*ASSY=STM MIXER .75 ORF-21.5L
95496#*WLM=STM SPARGER .63 ORF-12"L
95496C*WLM=STM SPARGER .75 ORF-12"L
92637Y*WLM=STM SPARGER .75 ORF-15"L
94277D*PART1=2PART 6442 STM SPARGER
94277#*PART2=2PART 6442 STM SPARGER
95191B GASKET STEAM FLANGE MTG DYE
******** END OF PARTS LIST ********
91533@*STM SPARGER 5/8 ORIFICE 3621
91533T*52&60 STEAM SPARGER3/4ORFICE
90092Y*72SGU STEAM SPARGER3/40RFICE
900921*72TILT/DYE/DAN ST.SPAR 3/40R
90206D*6044DA3 ST.SPARGER 3/4ORFICE
902061*6442 STEAM SPARGER 3/4ORFICE
94277#*ASSY 2PART 6442 STM SPARGER
92000Z ASSY=SPARGER 3/40RFICE TPIPE
92612T*ASSY=STM MIXER .5 ORF-24.5"L
92612#*ASSY=STM MIXER .75 ORF-24.5L
CBW .5" ORIFICE 21.5"L
CBW .75" ORIFICE 21.5"L
00A
00B-00D,00G
00E
00F
00F
00A-00G
3621F8P
4231+44+6044WP’S;5238WT’S,WP1;7244WP’S,WE1
7244DBN,WTL,WTN
7244SP2,SP3
6044D3A
6442BTL,BTN,BHP,TTL,TTN
USED ON 00F-CONTAINS ITEMS 3-4 ONLY
6446E6N,J6N 7258J5N
CBW .5" ORIFICE 24.5"L
CBW .75" ORIFICE 24.5"L
STEAM SPARGER ASSEMBLIES
BMP900001/96132V (Page 2)
Section
Pneumatic Piping and
Assemblies
177
9
178
R
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
3-Way Pilot Valves
BMP900032/91182V (1 of 1)
Parts List—3-Way Pilot Valves
Item
Part Number
Description
Comments
1
1
3
3
all
all
all
all
96R302A37
96R302A24
96R301A37
96R301A24
06Z 1/8" AIRPILOT 3W NO 120V50/60
07Z 1/8" AIRPILOT 3W NO 24V50/60
05Z 1/8" AIRPILOT 3W NC 120V50/60
06Z 1/8" AIRPILOT 3W NC 24V50/60
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS------------------------------------------------------------------
none
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES------------------------------------------------------------------
. Used In
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP900032/91182V
(Sheet 1 of 1)
179
R
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Applicable Models
Asco 3-way Solenoid Valves
BMP701359/97086V (1 of 2)
Identification and Description
Remove retaining clip. NOTE: When metal retaining clip disengages, it springs upwards.
Slip yoke containing coil and sleeves off solenoid base sub-assembly.
Replace coil.
Reassemble in reverse order.
Troubleshooting
Remove retaining clip.
Slip entire solenoid enclosure off the solenoid base sub-assembly.
Remove solenoid base sub-assembly, core assembly and core spring.
Remove diaphragm spring, diaphragm assembly and gasket.
Replace all worn or damaged parts
Control Circuit:
Listen for a metallic click when energizing the solenoid. Absence of the click
indicates loss of power to the solenoid. Check for loose connections, blown fuses,
open or grounded coil circuit, and broken lead wires.
Faulty Coil: Check for open circuit in coil. Replace coil if necessary.
Low Voltage: Voltage across coil leads must be at least 85% of nameplate rating for proper
operation.
Incorrect pressure: Pressure to valve must be within range specified on nameplate.
Excessive leakage: Disassemble valve and clean all parts. Replace all worn parts for best results.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Valve Disassembly and Reassembly
1.
2.
3.
4.
Coil Replacement
READ ALL SAFETY STATEMENTS ABOVE BEFORE PROCEEDING ANY FURTHER!
Maintainence
operation usually indicates that cleaning is required.
Cleaning - Clean all solenoid valves periodically. If the voltage to coil is correct, sluggish valve
Allow solenoids to cool before servicing the valves.
BURN HAZARD - Solenoid enclosures become too hot to touch when energized
for a long period. This will not damage the solenoid, but may cause a painful
burn.
CAUTION
Release pressure to valve before disassembly.
EXPLOSION HAZARD- may cause serious injury.
WARNING
Lock OFF - and tag out power at wall disconnect before servicing. Power
switches on machine and control box disable only control circuit power in
electrical boxes.
SHOCK HAZARD - will cause death or severe injury.
DANGER
Safety Instructions
Check nameplate for correct catalog number, pressure, voltage, and service.
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP701359/97086V
(Sheet 1 of 2)
180
Parts List—Asco 3-way Solenoid Valves
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
BMP701359/97086V (2 of 2)
Item
Part Number
Description
Comments
PARTKIT 8320 1/4 ASCO#K302142P
PARTKIT 8320 1/8" ASCO#K260767
00G
VALVE REPAIR KIT
ALL SEE PARTS WITH
(*) FRONT
VALVE BODY+HARDWARE
00A,00B,00C
COMPLETE VALVE
ASSEMBLY
COMPLETE VALVE
ASSEMBLY
COMPLETE VALVE
ASSEMBLY
COMPLETE VALVE
ASSEMBLY
2
2
2
2
3
A,
B,
C,
all
all valves
SLEEVE ASCO#101400-1
COIL 24V50/60C ASCO *162-919-3
COIL 120V50/60C ASCO#162-919-2
COIL 120V50/60C ASCO#162-919-1
SOLENOID 24V ASCO#260283-005
1/8" VALVEBODY ASCO #UX8320B13
73111F 1/8"BODY-3WAY.06D NORM OPEN
96V300F
96V1002CLP
5
6
6
7
8
all valves
except G
all valves
except G
G
G
all
96V300L
96V1002PLT
96V300GA
4
4
SPRING-DISC N/O ASCO#90-083
NAMEPLTE,BLK MXX ASCO#258775-1
METAL CLIP MXX ASCO#176-993-1
METAL CLIP ASCO #92-059-1
YOKE ASCO#78-345-1
15U275
SPRINGWASHER 7/16" GAR#3W-325 ZINC
96V1002WSH STARWASHER MXX ASCO#238589-1
96V300GB
96T1003A24
96T1003A71
96T1003A37
96T1002A24
96V300
96R300AB
all
all valves
except G
+ kits J-
1
1
J
all
00K
00P
00F
00E
00D
00K
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS------------------------------------------------------------------
96V236B
96R300AAM
J
R
96TBC3BA24 04Z 1/4" N/C 3WAY 24V50/60C VALVE
G
96V304A
96TAC3AA71 04Z 1/8" N/C 3WAY 240V50/60C VALVE
C
Q
96TAC3AA37 04Z 1/8" N/C 3WAY 120V50/60C VALVE
B
78183L*NC VALVEBODY+HARDWARE
96TAC3AA24 04Z 1/8" N/C 3WAY 24V50/60C VALVE
A
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES------------------------------------------------------------------
. Used In
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
R
Used In
Item
Description
Parts List, cont.—Asco 3-way Solenoid Valves
Part Number
Comments
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP701359/97086V
(Sheet 2 of 2)
181
182
183
P/L UNIVERSAL AIRVALVE BOX
R
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
BMP780088R/93046N
(Sheet 1 of 2)
Litho in U.S.A.
Parts List—P/L UNIVERSAL AIRVALVE BOX
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Item
. Used In
Part Number
Description
Comments
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES-----------------------------------------------------------------none
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS-----------------------------------------------------------------all
1
03 01180A
84232D ENCL=AIR VALVE FORMED
all
2
03 01180B
84136B PLATE=BOTTOM AIRVALVE BOX
all
3
17C051
01Z RECP BKT #2 FAST CAMLOCK
all
4
15J051
01Z POPRIVET 1/8DIAX.265 LONG S/S
all
5
51P013
PLUG HXCNTRSUNK 1/4"BRASS
all
6
12P1AHSB
SNAPBUSH.437MHX.312 T=1/8HEYCO#2043
all
7
X3 01507A
88462# MANIFOLD BLOCK MACH 12PORTS
all
8
5N0E11ABE2 NPT NIPPLE 1/4X11 TBE BRASS 125#
all
9
51E507
HOSESTEM BRASS 1/4 MPTX1/2 HOSE I.D
all
10
51V015
03Z TEE PIPE 1/4"FGDBRASS101-T7-444
52DRA+DYA ONLY
all
10
5SX0EBF
NPT CROSS 1/4" BRASS 150# 2205P-4
52WE1;60;72;WE2+WE3
all
11
5N0E05KB42 NPT NIPPLE 1/4X5.5 TBE BRASS STD
all
12
51T020
STRAINER-T 1/4"ANCHOR #101ST-4
all
13
60E004TE
04Z 1/4"OD X.170"ID NYLON TUBING *
all
14
53A008B
BODY=BRMALCON 1/4X1/4COMP W#B68X4X4 52DRA+DYA ONLY
all
14
53A031XB
BODY=MAL90EL 1/4X1/4COMP #269C-4-4B
all
15
5SB0E0CBEO HEXPIPBUSH 1/4 X 1/8 BRASS 125#
all
16
30N100
07Z PRESSGUAGE 1/8"BACKCONN 0-30PSI
60;72;WE3 ONLY
all
16
30N101
08Z PRESSGAUGE 1/8"BACKCONN O-60PSI
60;72;WE2 ONLY
all
17
96J019BE
78486T*PRESSURE REG=EPOXY SET 28PSI
all
18
5N0ECLSBE2 NPT NIPPLE 1/4XCLS TBE BRASS 125#
all
19
15U185
FLATWASHER(USS STD) 1/4" ZNC PLT
all
20
02 10456
65025A BUSHING=SENSDEV PIVOTPIN
all
21
12K005
01Z 1/2 CONDUIT NIPL-CHASE"LONG TYP
all
22
5N0E02ABE2 NPT NIPPLE 1/4X2TBE BRASS 125#
all
23
5SL0CBEC
NPT ELBOW 90DEG STRT 1/8"BRASS 125#
184
52WE1;60;72;WE2+WE3
BMP780088R/93046N
(Sheet 2 of 2)
R
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Litho in U.S.A.
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Parts List, cont.—P/L UNIVERSAL AIRVALVE BOX
Item
Used In
Part Number
Description
all
24
96J019E
1/4"PRESSREG2-50PSI #R07-200-RNEA
all
25
30N095
03Z PRESSGAUGE 1/8"BACKCONN 0-15PS1
all
26
5N0E03KBE2 NPT NIPPLE 1/4X3.5 TBE BRASS 125#
all
27
5S0EBEA0G
NPT TEE 1/4X1/4X3/8 BRASS 125#
all
28
5SL0EBEC
NPT ELBOW 90DEG STRT 1/4" BRASS 125
all
29
27A090
HOSECLAMP,11/16-1.5" CADSCR HS-16
all
30
60E085
07Z H0SE WATER 1/2" DAY 7192-50250*
all
all
31
31
5SB0G0EDEO NPTHEXBUSH 3/8X1/4 GALCI 125#
5SL0EBEA
NPT ELBOW 90DEG 1/4" BRASS 125#
all
32
12K070
all
33
96TCC3AA71 04Z 3/8" N/C 3WAY 240V50/60C VALVE
all
34
27A005
MUFFLER 3/8" ALLIED #B38 "BANTAM"
all
35
15K039
HXCAPSCR 1/4-20UNC2AX3/4 GR5 ZNC/CD
all
36
15U180
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM 1/4 ZINCPL
all
37
5N0E07AB42 NPT NIPPLE 1/4X7 TBE BRASS STD
1/2" CONDUIT LOCKNUT PECO #201J
185
Comments
(USED ON 52 DRA
ONLY)
186
Air Valves & Mounting Hardware
R
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
BMP780087R/83457A
(Sheet 1 of 2)
Litho in U.S.A.
Parts List—Air Valves & Mounting Hardware
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Item
. Used In
Part Number
Description
Comments
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES-----------------------------------------------------------------AA
AB
BA
BB
BC
CA
CB
CC
DA
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
AVA030537
AVA030571
AVA030324
AVA030337
AVA030371
AVA030224
AVA030237
AVA030271
AVA0304
AVA030124
AVA030124A
AVA030137
AVA030137A
AVA030171
AVA030171A
78173S ONE 1/8 AIRVALVE REG.AIR120V
84386S ONE 1/8 AIRVALVE REG.AIR240V
79066S1/4"NC24V ASCO AIRVAL+MTG HWD
79066S1/4"NC120VASCO AIRVAL+MTG HWD
79066S1/4"NC240VASCO AIRVAL+MTG HWD
78173S1/8"NC24V ASCO AIRVAL+MTG HWD
84386S1/8"NC120VASCO AIRVAL+MTG HWD
84386S1/8"NC240VASCO AIRVAL+MTG HWD
78136# TWO PLUGS+MTG HWD
78173S TWO 1/8"AIRVALVE+MTG HWD 24V
78182S TWO 1/8AIRVAL+MTG HWD 1-NO
82183S TWO 1/8 AIRVALVE+MTG HWD120V
78182S TWO 1/8AIRVAL+MTG HWD 1-NO
78173S TWO 1/8"AIRVALVE+MTG HWD240V
78182S TWO 1/8AIRVAL+MTG HWD 1-NO
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS-----------------------------------------------------------------all
1
03 01524
79177B CHANNEL=PLUG HOLDER
all
2
03 01509
77362A PLUG=MANIFOLD PORTS
all
3
60C105
ORING 1/4 ID 1/16CS BN 70 DURO #010
all
4
15P105
05Z TRDCUT-F PANHD 8-32X5/8 NIKSTL
96T1001A37
SOLENOID 120V50/60C ASCO#260283-002
AA,CB,EC, 5
ED
AB,CC,EE, 5
EF
EA,EB,CA 5
96R300B02
COIL 220/50SFT-240/60SFT#162-919-26
96T1001A24
SOLENOID 24V50/60C ASCO#260283-001
all
6
03 01182B
78036B ANGLE=SUPPORT AIR VALVE
all
7
03 01538
86053B CHANNEL=OIL SHIELD-1/8AIRVAL
all
8
15P101
04Z TRDCUT-F PANHD 8-32X3/8 NIKSTL
all
9
15U120
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM #8 ZINCPL
all
10
53A031B
BODY-MAL90ELL1/4X1/8COMPPH#269C-42B
AB only
11
53A032
MAL90ELL 5/16X1/8POLYFLO #169P-5-2
all
12
96R300AAM
78183L*NC VALVEBODY+HARDWARE
BA only
BB only
BC only
13
13
13
96T1002A24
96T1002A37
96T1002A71
SOLENOID 24V50/60C ASCO#260283-005
SOLENOID 120V50/60C ASCO#260283-006
SOLENOID 240V50/60C ASCO#260283-007
all
14
53A031XB
BODY=MAL90EL 1/4X1/4COMP #269C-4-4B
187
BMP780087R/83457A
(Sheet 2 of 2)
R
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Litho in U.S.A.
Parts List, cont.—Air Valves & Mounting Hardware
Item
Used In
Part Number
Description
all
15
96V350
1/4" VALVEBODY ASCO #UFTX8320A89
all
16
03 01523
85096C BRKT=LOCK AIR VALVE
all
17
53A005B
BODY=MALECONN 1/4X1/8COMP #B68A-4A
all
18
53A059
SLEEVE 1/4" COMP IMP #60F BRASS
all
19
53A059A
NUT 1/4"COMP.HOLYOKE ANDERSON#61A-4
EB,EC,EF 20
96R300ABM
78183@*NO VALVEBODY+HARDWARE
all
03 01508
77362A FITTING-SCREW 7/16 HEX
21
188
Comments
MSSM0130AE/9313AV
SERVICING AIR CYLINDERS
È
4. Loosen nuts on threaded rods evenly, permitting cylinder heads to separate. Use only a few turns on one nut
before moving to the other one. Continue until springs have no tension.
This is the general procedure for rebuilding an air cylinder using a Milnor® furnished repair kit, once the air
cylinder has been removed from the machine. See the specific air cylinder and major assembly parts drawing(s) for
component identification and removal/replacement information.
Maintenance procedures require:
•
•
Two threaded rods and nuts, twice the length of the tie bolts.
The appropriate repair kit.
EXPLOSION HAZARD—Spring tension can cause air cylinder to burst apart
with great force during dissassembly. You can be struck by air cylinder parts.
☞ Follow maintenance instructions carefully.
☞ Wear eye protection.
NOTE: Use a new locknut when re-assembling air cylinder (see the appropriate parts drawing).
1. Replace two diagonally opposite tie bolts with threaded rods and nuts as shown in FIGURE 1.
2. Tighten nuts on the threaded rods until they contact the air cylinder.
3. Remove the other two tie bolts and the nuts, washers, clips, and actuators from the external end of piston stem.
Tie bolt
Threaded rod
Piston
stem
ÎFIGURE 1 (MSSM0130AE)
ÎUsing Threaded Rods
189
ÎFIGURE 2 (MSSM0130AE)
ÎCorrect Piston Cup Shape
ÎFIGURE 3 (MSSM0130AE)
ÎDistorted Piston Cup Shape
5. Note position and orientation of piston cup(s), washers, and springs. Replace worn parts, then reassemble in
reverse order. Tighten locknut until it is just barely possible to turn the piston cup and washer assembly on
the stem. Correct piston cup shape is shown in FIGURE 2. DO NOT overtighten, as this causes the piston
cup to deform to the shape shown in FIGURE 3 and may cause piston to bind in cylinder.
MSSM0130AE/9313AV (1 of 1 )
SERVICING AIR CYLINDERS
È
4. Loosen nuts on threaded rods evenly, permitting cylinder heads to separate. Use only a few turns on one nut
before moving to the other one. Continue until springs have no tension.
This is the general procedure for rebuilding an air cylinder using a Milnor® furnished repair kit, once the air
cylinder has been removed from the machine. See the specific air cylinder and major assembly parts drawing(s) for
component identification and removal/replacement information.
Maintenance procedures require:
•
•
Two threaded rods and nuts, twice the length of the tie bolts.
The appropriate repair kit.
EXPLOSION HAZARD—Spring tension can cause air cylinder to burst apart
with great force during dissassembly. You can be struck by air cylinder parts.
☞ Follow maintenance instructions carefully.
☞ Wear eye protection.
NOTE: Use a new locknut when re-assembling air cylinder (see the appropriate parts drawing).
1. Replace two diagonally opposite tie bolts with threaded rods and nuts as shown in FIGURE 1.
2. Tighten nuts on the threaded rods until they contact the air cylinder.
3. Remove the other two tie bolts and the nuts, washers, clips, and actuators from the external end of piston stem.
ÎFIGURE 2 (MSSM0130AE)
ÎCorrect Piston Cup Shape
ÎFIGURE 3 (MSSM0130AE)
ÎDistorted Piston Cup Shape
5. Note position and orientation of piston cup(s), washers, and springs. Replace worn parts, then reassemble in
reverse order. Tighten locknut until it is just barely possible to turn the piston cup and washer assembly on
the stem. Correct piston cup shape is shown in FIGURE 2. DO NOT overtighten, as this causes the piston
cup to deform to the shape shown in FIGURE 3 and may cause piston to bind in cylinder.
Tie bolt
Threaded rod
Piston
stem
ÎFIGURE 1 (MSSM0130AE)
ÎUsing Threaded Rods
190
191
R
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Air Cylinders for 2" Watts Ball Valves
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP920006/2000133V
(Sheet 1 of 2)
192
Parts List—Air Cylinders for 2" Watts Ball Valves
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Item
Part Number
Description
17
17
18
18
A,B
C,D
SA 10 057C
SA 10 057D
SA 10 056F
SA 10 056G
95222D AIRCYL=3.0ODX3.89ST171/176CD
95222# AIRCYL=3.0ODX3.89ST171/176SS
92000Z AIRCYL=2.38ODX2.70STX20.5#CD
92000Z AIRCYL=2.38ODX2.70STX20.5#SS
A,B
C,D
all
STAINLESS
STAINLESS
5
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
11
11
12
12
12
13
13
13
14
15
15
all
A
B,C,D
A
B,C
D
A
B
C
D
A
Bl
C
D
all
A,B
C,D
A,B
C
D
A,B
C
D
all
A,B
C,D
3
all
4
2
all
all
1
1
A,B
C,D
03 01620A
02 18651
60C106
03 01616C
02 15880
02 15880A
03 01617C
02 15881
02 15881A
03 01621
02 02068
27B32024SS
03 01623
03 01623A
02 02546
02 02546S
02 10585H
02 10585G
02 10585E
02 10585A
15U210
15U205
15U200S
15G191
15G190
54E220
03 01209A
15U243S
15G234NS
03 01615
02 18650
92133B 3"AIR CYL=SPRING RETAINER
73171A WASHER=2 WAY BRAKE CYL
ORING 5/16ID 1/16CS BN 70 DURO #011
92133B SPRING=FL11.35SR20.5MD1.811
96471B SPRING=BRAKE1.5OD10.3FL17#/”
85504Z SPRING,02-15880 +HEAVY PAINT
92133B SPRING=FL11.5SR23.5#MD2.368
96471# SPRING=BRAKE2.1OD11FL15.5#/”
85504Z SPRING,02 -15881+HEAVY PAINT
94266BTUBE 2+7/8 AIR CYLINDER 9"
94266A AIRCYL-STAINLESS=DUMPVALVE
SPACER ROLL .51IDX.6250DX1.5L STN S
90351C CYLINDER HEAD 3"AIRCYLINDER
90351# CYLHEAD 3"AIRCYLINDER-S/S
87341C CYLHEAD=SLIDESTEM
87341# CYLINDER HEAD=SLIDE STEM SS
91142# TIE BOLT=5/16-18X10LNG PLTD
91142# TIE BOLT=5/16-18X10LG (SS)
91142# TIE BOLT=5/16-18X8.25LG PLTD
91142# TIE ROD-5/16-18X8+1/4 (SS)
LOKWASHER MEDIUM 5/16 ZINCPL
LOCKWASHER MEDIUM 5/16" 18-8SS
FLATWASHER US STD 5/16 SS18-8
HXFINJAMNUT 5/16-24UNC2 ZINC GR2
HEXFINJAMNUT 5/16-18NC2 SS18-8
NYLINER 8L2FF BUSHING 1/2X9/16X.140
92536B STEMCLIP H=1.313 BALVAL S/S
FLAWASHER 7/8ODX33/64IDX16GA 18-8SS
HXLOCKNUT NYL 1/2-13UNC2 SS18-8
94191B PISTON STEM 3"AIRCYL
96461B STEM=2 WAY AIRCYLINDER BRAKE
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS------------------------------------------------------------------
A
B
C
D
34
all
32
all
33
31
all
all
30
all
26
all
29
29
29
25
all
A,B
C
D
24
all
28
28
28
23
23
A,Bl
C,D
A,B
C
D
22
22
22
22
A
B
C
D
27
21
21
A,B
C,D
all
20
20
A,B,D
C
19
16
16
Used In
A,B
C,D
Comments
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES------------------------------------------------------------------
. Used In
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
R
Item
ORING 2.5 ID 3/16CS BN 70 DURO #333
ORING 2”IDX3/16CS BUNA70 #32
88531# CYL HEAD TAPHOLE 3"AIRCYL SS
88531# CYLHEAD TAPHOLE-3"ARCYL S/S
71334A CYLHEAD W/TAPPED HOLE
88531B CYLINDER HEAD TAP HOLE (SS)
87506B 3"AIRCYL PSTN CUP COMPLMTWSH
79237A WASHER=PISTON CUP COMP LIMIT
85506B+STOP=AIRCYL W/2+11/16STR.SS
70219A STOP=AIR CYL W/2+11/16STROKE
02Z LTHX THIN LOKNUT 3/8-24 SSNTE
91522B PISTON CUP WASHER 3"AIRCYL
94092B UP WASHER=2”OD=PISTON CUP
93356B PISTON CUP 2+7/81D CYLINDER
93217B PISTONCUP=DUMPVALVE 2+3/8”
92066# MACH=3"ACYL BRASS PISCUP WSH
92253B 2.38”ACYL BRASS PISCUP WASHR
NPT COUP 1/4 BRASS 125# #103
NEEDLE VALVE
03 01620E
27B2400K0N
20L601K
15G231S
15U200
03 01627A
03 01660D
03 01660B
92136B.WASHER=2.86ODX2.06IDX.105THK
SPACER ROLL.5ID .687L .062T STL/ZNC
ID TAG NAT'L #1614 ALUM EMB LET "K"
HXFINJAMNUT 1/2-13UNC2B SS18-8
FLATWASHER(USS STD) 5/16"ZNC PLT
92023B RIGHT=3"AIR CYL MNTG BRKT
BRKT=AIR CYL MOUNT RIGHT
92271# BRKT=AIR CYL MNT RHT-S/S
03 01627B
92023# LEFT=3"AIR CYL MNTG BRKT
03 01660C93231B BRKT=AIR CYL MONUT LEFT
03 01660A
92271B BRKT=AIR CYL MNT LFT-S/S
96H018
5SB0E0CBEO HEXPIPBUSH 1/4 X 1/8 BRASS 125#
5SCC0EBE
5N0ECLSBE2 NPT NIPPLE 1/4XCLS TBE BRASS 125#
60C134
60C132
03 01622
03 01622A
02 02101
02 02101S
03 01630
02 02185
03 01313S
03 01313
15G220
03 01618
02 02085
02 19302
02 02194
X3 01619A
02 02105B
Description
Parts List, cont.—Air Cylinders for 2" Watts Ball Valves
Part Number
Comments
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP920006/2000133V
(Sheet 2 of 2)
193
Long Air Cylinder Assembly
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
R
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
BMP701660R/89111A
(Sheet 1 of 2)
Litho in U.S.A.
Parts List—Long Air Cylinder Assembly
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Item
. Used In
Description
Part Number
Comments
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES-----------------------------------------------------------------Z
SA 36 041
89483T* AIRCYL-LONG=PITTS 72WE/SGU+
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS-----------------------------------------------------------------all
1
03 06313
94191A STEM=AIR CYL 416SS $12SU
all
2
54E220
NYLINER 8L2FF BUSHING 1/2X9/16X.140
all
3
03 06314
70291A TIEROD=AIR-CYL ACTUATOR-ZINC
all
4
15G185
HXNUT 5/16-18UNC2B SAE ZINC GR2
all
5
15U210
LOKWASHER MEDIUM 5/16 ZINCPL
all
6
02 02546
CYLHEAD=SLIDESTEM
all
7
15U243
FLAWASHER 7/8ODX33/64IDX16GA ZINCPL
all
8
03 06312
72197# SPRING=ACT 2"OD18.2"FL9.2#/"
all
9
03 06311
72197A SPRING=ACT1.5OD14.8FL12.5#/"
all
10
27B270
SPACER ROLL.5ID 2.5L .062T STL/ZNC
all
11
27B240
SPACER ROLL.51ID.813L.062T STL/ZNC
all
12
02 18651
73171A WASHER=2WAY BRAKECYL
all
13
60C106
ORING 5/16ID 1/16CS BN 70 DURO #011
all
14
02 02194
93217B PISTONCUP=DUMPVALVE 2+3/8"
all
15
02 02085
75161A UP WASHER=2"OD=PISTONCUP
all
16
02 02185
79237A WASHER=PISTON CUP COMP LIMIT
all
17
15G220
02Z LTHX THIN LOKNUT 3/8-24 SSNTE
all
18
60C132
ORING 2"ID 3/16CS BUNA 70 DURO #329
all
19
02 02101
71334A CYLHEAD W/TAPPED HOLE
all
20
02 15688
BRACK=BALLVALV ACT-CAD
all
21
96H018
all
22
03 01313
70219A STOP=AIR CYL W/2+11/16STROKE
all
23
02 02105
91522A PISTON CUP WASHER STNLS STL
all
24
03 06315A
94266B AIRCYL-LONG-SS 2/72WEDU
all
25
15U520
FLAT WASHER 2+3/8X1+41/64X12GA ZINC
all
26
15G231
HXFINJAMNUT 1/2-13UNC2B ZINC GR2
all
27
15U243
FLAWASHER 7/8ODX33/64IDX16GA ZINCPL
all
28
03 01209A
92536B STEMCLIP H=1.313 BALVAL S/S
NEEDLE VALVE
194
BMP701660R/89111A
(Sheet 2 of 2)
R
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Item
Used In
Parts List, cont.—Long Air Cylinder Assembly
Part Number
Description
all
29
5SB0E0CBEO HEXPIPBUSH 1/4 X 1/8 BRASS 125#
all
30
20L601T
ID TAG NAT'L #1614 ALUM EMB LET "T"
195
Litho in U.S.A.
Comments
196
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
NOTE: THE GOYEN VALVE MAY
BE REPLACES BY EITHER THE
WABCO OR DELTROL VALVE.
NOTE: ASCO VALVES ARE
USED PRIOR TO NOVEMBER
1987. SINCE THEN PARKER
VALVES HAVVE BEEN USED
IN PLACE OF THE ASCO.
THE GOYEN VALVE IS NOT
TO BE USED IN PLACE
OF THE WABCO OR
DELTROL VALVE.
GOYEN
(E)
WABCO
(B)
ASCO
(D)
DELTROL
(A)
R
Quick Exhaust Valves
PARKER
(C)
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP701406/2002382V
(Sheet 1 of 2)
BMP701406/2002382V
(Sheet 2 of 2)
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
R
Litho in U.S.A.
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Parts List—Quick Exhaust Valves
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
Item
. Used In
Description
Part Number
Comments
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES-----------------------------------------------------------------A
MESSAGE B2 REPAIR KITS ONLY
<>
DELTROL
B
96M051
USE KZK5B00100
WABCO
C
96M054
QWIKEXHAUSTVLV 3/4"URETHANE
PARKER
D
MESSAGE B1 PARTS NO LONGER SOLD
E
MESSAGE B2 REPAIR KITS ONLY
F
96M055
ASCO
<>
QUICK EXHAUST VALVE 1/4”
GOYEN
DELTROL
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS-----------------------------------------------------------------all
1
96M053A
KIT,QWIKRELVLV EV20A#10091-18
DELTROL VALVE ONLY
all
3
96M051B
DIAPHRAM,QWIKREL WAB#PS112-12
WABCO VALVE ONLY
all
4
96M051A
GASKET,WABCO QUICK EXHAUST VLV
WABCO VALVE ONLY
all
5A
96M052A
REPKIT,QES#M1319 (FOR 96M052)
GOYEN VALVE ONLY
all
5B
96M055A
REPAIR KIT FOR 96M055# 10128-99
DELTROL VALVE ONLY
all
6
96M054K
REPKIT 3/4"QWIKEXHAUSTVLV
PARKER VALVE ONLY
197
198
R
DETAIL D
DETAIL A-C
AIR CYLINDER MOUNTING HARDWARE
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Air Cylinder Assemblies
DETAIL F-L
DETAIL E
DETAIL P-S
DETAIL M-N
EXPLOSION HAZARD - Air cylinder can burst apart with great force.
Circled items are under high spring tension.
Follow maintenance instructions MSSM0130AE carefully.
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP830078/2005525B
(Sheet 1 of 3)
199
Parts List—Air Cylinder Assemblies
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
A52 00200
SA 10 019Q
AAC14001A
A76AC001A
A76AC001B
A75 01200
A75 01300
SA 10 019
AAC14001
A25 00600
AAC64001
AAC65001
AAC58001
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
P
Q
R
S
95000Z AIRCYL=BRAKE ASSY 7258J2N
93481B AIRCYL=BRAKE ASSY 6446E6N
89483T*BRAKE CYL ASSY=4226QWE+DYA
90000Z AIRCYL-LONG= 42S6PSG
89463T AIR CYL.2-3/8 BORE 2"STROKE
89463@ AIR CYL.2-3/8 BORE 3"STROKE
89463T*AIR CYL. DAMPER = 3"STROKE
89463U*AIR CYL. DAMPER = 2"STROKE
89497U* BRAKE AIRCYL=BALCOM+DIVCYL
90041U*AIRCYL=RATE 50-91 STRK 2.09
89457V* BRAKE AIRCYL=52WE1 +52TILT
894613*AIRCYL=BRAKE ASSY 6442
89463U* BRAKE AIRCYL=7244 TILT ONLY
89483V* AIRCYL=BRAKE ASSY
89483T* BRAKE AIRCYL 2-WAY 60+72SGU
89483V* BRAKE AIRCYL 2-WAY 60WE2+3
89483U* BRAKE AIRCYL,2-WAY=42WE+DAU
3621F8P
52LWN/H,WTL/N,WP/E1,DYA
64BTL,BTN,BHP,
DA1,DAL,DAN
6446,7246,7258,M7E
4244SP2 SM
7258J2N
72WP2,WP3,WE3
60+72SP2,SP3
60WP2,WP3,D3A,DA3
4231/4244 WP2/WP3
CP2/CP3 NP2/NP3
SP2/SP3
72DA1/L/N,DBN,
WTL/N,WP1
4226DP1,DA1,DYP,D5P
3621+26Q6X 4226Q4X,Q6X
5840TG2,TS1,TT1
5840TG2,TS1,TT1
5858+80TG1/2,TS1,TT1
5858+80TG1/2,TS1,TT1
03 06313A
02 18650A
02 18650B
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
5
5
6
7
A-D
F-Q
R
S
ALL
S
ALL
ALL
02 02085
02 02194
02 02105B
02 02105
02 02101
02 18660
02 02546
06 20702E
02 18650
2
A-D,F-G,S,
I-K,M-Q
H
L
R
W2 18646
02 02068
1
1
A-D
F-S
75161A UP WASHER=2"OD=PISTONCUP
93217B PISTONCUP=DUMPVALVE 2+3/8"
92253B 2.38"ACYL BRASS PISCUP WASHR
91522A PISTON CUP WASHER STNLS STL
71334A CYLHEAD W/TAPPED HOLE
CYLHEAD-BRASS=2WAY AIRCYL
CYLHEAD=SLIDESTEM
91227B FLOW NOT ACTUATOR CYL HEAD
96431# STEM=AIR CYL 304SS
96417B STEM-AIRCYL.UPLOCK PRESS
97362B STEM=2WAY AIRCYL BRAKE 7.88L
96431B STEM=2 WAY AIRCYLINDER BRAKE
93344L*CYLINDER-AIR=DOUBLEACT BRAKE
94266A AIRCYL-STAINLESS=DUMPVALVE
-------------------------------------------------------------------COMPONENTS------------------------------------------------------------------
SA 36 035
SA 28 128
SA 28 152
SA 10 019A
A
B
C
D
Description
Item Part Number
Comments
. Used In
---------------------------------------------------------------------ASSEMBLIES------------------------------------------------------------------
Find the correct assembly first, then find the needed components. The item letters (A, B, C, etc.) assigned to
assemblies are referred to in the "Used In" column to identify which components belong to an assembly. The item
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) assigned to components relate the parts list to the illustration.
R
02 15880
02 15881
02 17023
A-C,F-L,P-Q 11
S
A,D,F-M,Q,S 12
13
14
N
ALL
15U243
15U520
20
21
22
23
26
ALL
F-Q
ALL
A,C,F-G,I-J 24
L,Q,S
25
ALL
F-N
F-Q,S
F,I-L
G-H
29
29
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
15G220
19
19
19
S
ALL
R ONLY
A
B
C
D
S
F,H,Q,S
G
M
N
P
K
I-J,L
02 10585E
02 10585E
W6 20702F
A,C-D,F-Q,L 18
S
27
27B250
17
D,G-J,L-N
Q,S
F,K,I-J,Q,S
27B240
16
ALL
20L601A
20L601F
20L601R
20L601U
20L601P
20L601X
20L601J
20L601A
20L601Q
20L601F
20L601D
20L601V
20L601V
20L601E
17B012
54E220
15G185
15U210
15U200
60C106
15
A-D
60C110
60C132
03 01313
10
A-D,F-Q,S
ID TAG NAT'L #1614 ALUM EMB LET "A"
ID TAG NAT'L #1614 ALUM EMB LET "F"
ID TAG NAT'L #1614 ALUM EMB LET "R"
ID TAG NAT'L #1614 ALUM EMB LET "U"
ID TAG NAT'L #1614 ALUM EMB LET "P"
ID TAG NAT'L #1614 ALUM EMB LET "X"
ID TAG NAT'L #1614 ALUM EMB LET "J"
ID TAG NAT'L #1614 ALUM EMB LET "A"
ID TAG NAT'L #1614 ALUM EMB LET "Q"
ID TAG NAT'L #1614 ALUM EMB LET "F"
ID TAG NAT'L #1614 ALUM EMB LET "D"
ID TAG NAT'L #1614 ALUM EMB LET "V"
ID TAG NAT'L #1614 ALUM EMB LET "V"
ID TAG NAT'L #1614 ALUM EMB LET "E"
EXTRETRING IND#1000-50-ST-ZD ZINC
NYLNR 8L2FF BUSH 1/2X9/16X.140
FLAT WASHER 2+3/8X1+41/64X12GA ZINC
FLAWASHER 7/8ODX33/64IDX16GA ZINCPL
02Z LTHX THIN LOKNUT 3/8-24 SSNTE
HXNUT 5/16-18UNC2B SAE ZINC GR2
LOKWASHER MEDIUM 5/16 ZINCPL
FLATWASHER(USS STD) 5/16"ZNC PLT
91142# TIE BOLT=5/16-18X8.25LG PLTD
91142# TIE BOLT=5/16-18X8.25LG PLTD
90293B*FLOW NOT VLV=AIR-CYL ROD WLD
SPCRROLL.5ID1.5L.062T STLZNC
SPCRROLL.5ID.813L.062T STLZNC
ORING 5/16ID 1/16CS BUNA70#011
ORING 1/2IDX3/32CS BUNA70 #112
ORING 2"IDX3/16CS BUNA70 #329
83392B SPRING-SS=DUMP 1.5OD8FL21#/"
96471# SPRING=BRAKE2.1OD11FL15.5#/"
96471B SPRING=BRAKE1.5OD10.3FL17#/"
70219A STOP=AIR CYL W/2+11/16STROKE
Parts List, cont.—Air Cylinder Assemblies
Description
Part Number
02 02185
79237A WASHER=PISTON CUP COMP LIMIT
02 18651
73171A WASHER=2WAY BRAKECYL
8
9
Item
Used In
ALL
A-D,F-Q,S
Comments
Litho in U.S.A.
BMP830078/2005525B
(Sheet 2 of 3)
BMP830078/2005525B
(Sheet 3 of 3)
R
Pellerin Milnor Corporation
Litho in U.S.A.
P. O. Box 400, Kenner, LA 70063-0400
Item
Used In
Parts List, cont.—Air Cylinder Assemblies
Part Number
Description
N
Q
29
29
20L601C
20L601D
ID TAG NAT'L #1614 ALUM EMB LET "C"
ID TAG NAT'L #1614 ALUM EMB LET "D"
ALL
30
03 06309
70310C RIGHTMOUNT=BRAKE CYL ZNC
RIGHT
ALL
31
03 06308
70310C LEFTMOUNT=BRAKE CYL ZINC
LEFT
ALL
32
02 02550
97437ABRKT=AIRCYL-RIGHT ZINC/CAD
RIGHT
ALL
33
02 02547
LT BRACKET=AIRCYL CAD
LEFT
ALL
34
02 02556
SUPPORT=AIRCYL CADSTL
ALL
35
27B2750L0T
01Z SPC RROLL.562ID.937L.048T ZNK
ALL
36
15K206
HEXCAPSCR M5-.8X40MM 18-8SS
ALL
37
15G235F
HXFNJAMNUT 9/16-12UNC2B ZINC GR2
ALL
38
15U280
01Z FL+WASHER(USS STD)1/2 ZNC PL+D
ALL
39
15G230
HXNUT 1/2-13UNC2B SAE ZINC GR2
ALL
40
17A020
ADJ CLEVIS MACHINED 1/2-13 ZINC PLT
ALL
41
17A065
01Z EYEEND 1/2-13 X2.25 ZINC
ALL
42
17A040
CLEVISPIN 1/2"X1+3/8" DRILLED
ALL
43
15H030
STDCOTTERPIN 3/32X3/4 ZINCPL
ALL
44
27B34010SZ
SPCRROLL.512ID.625L.062T STLZC
ALL
45
02 17024
94302B SPRING-SS=DUMP 1.5OD4FL40#/"
200
Comments